Skip to main content

Full text of "The philosophy of words: a popular introduction to the science of language"

See other formats


THE 


mosopHY  OF  WORDS. 


A       T>rvDTTT 


A  POPULAR  INTRODUCTION  TO  THE 
SCIENCE  OF  LANGUAGE 


BY 


FREDERIC  GARLANDA,  PH.D. 


NEW  YORK: 

ft 

A.  LOVELL  &  CO. 

1 6  ASTOR  PLACE. 


COPYRIGHT,  1886, 

BY 

F.    GARLANDA. 


The  more  we  analyze  language,  the  more  clearly  we  see 
that  it  transcends  in  depth  the  most  conscious  productions 
of  the  mind. 

SCHELLING. 


I  believe  truly  that  languages  are  the  best  mirror  of  the 
mind,  and  that  an  exact  analysis  of  the  signification  of 
words  would  make  us  better  acquainted  than  any  thing 
else  with  the  operations  of  the  understanding. 

LEIBNITZ. 


He  who  would  examine  the  influence  which  words,  mere 
words,  have  exercised  on  the  minds  of  men,  might  write  a 
history  of  the  world  that  would  teach  us  more  than  any 
which  we  yet  possess. 

MAX  MULLER. 


As  the  fossils  of  the  rocks  disclose  to  the  palaeontologist 
the  various  forms  of  life  that  have  successively  appeared 
upon  the  globe,  so,  too,  the  fossils  of  speech  disclose  to 
the  scientific  philologist  the  various  stages  that  have  been 
reached  in  the  growth  of  human  consciousness. 

A.  H.  SAYCE. 


Language  is  the  reflection  of  the  thoughts  and  beliefs 
of  communities  from  their  earliest  days  ;  and  by  tracing  its 
changes  and  its  fortunes,  by  discovering  the  origin  and 
history  of  words  and  their  meanings,  we  can  read  those 
thoughts  and  beliefs  with  greater  certainty  and  minute- 
ness than  had  they  been  traced  by  the  pen  of  the  histo- 
rian. 

A.  H.  SAYCE. 


Etymology  tends  directly  to  aid  us  in  the  clear  under- 
standing and  just  and  forcible  employment  of  the  words 
which  compose  our  own  language. 

GEORGE  P.  MARSH. 


Etymology  has  the  charm  of  all  sciences  which  deal 
with  the  beginning  and  growth  of  the  great  products  of 
nature  or  mind. 

GEORGE  CURTIUS. 


PREFACE. 

IT  is  the  aim  of  this  work  to  explain  as 
plainly  as  possible  some  of  the  most  important 
results  of  the  Science  of  Language. 

It  is  astonishing  how  little  is  generally 
known,  even  by  educated  people,  about  lan- 
guage,— what  it  is,  whence  our  words  come, 
what  is  their  true  bearing,  how  is  our 
language  connected  with  those  spoken  by  peo- 
ples around  us,  etc.  We  seem  to  speak  too 
much  as  birds  sing — without  ever  bending  our 
minds  to  reflect  on  the  nature  of  the  sounds 
we  utter. 

The  main  results  of  geology,  physiology, 
chemistry  and  other  sciences  are  already  a 
possession  of  the  public  at  large.  Why  should 
we  not  pay  some  attention  also  to  this  wonder- 
ful instrument,  without  which  civilization, 
society  itself,  could  not  be  possible  ?  An 
inquiry  into  the  nature  of  our  language  can 


Vl  PREFACE. 

not  be  less  interesting,  hardly  less  important, 
than  the  study  of  the  constitution  of  the  earth, 
or  of  our  body. 

A  work  on  this  subject  which  aims  to  be 
popular,  is  necessarily  imperfect  and  incom- 
plete. Many  things  are  to  be  left  out  ;  tech- 
nical terms  must  be  avoided  as  much  as  possi- 
ble ;  rigorous  scientific  order  can  not  generally 
be  followed  ;  too  often  concision  must  be  given 
up  and  repetitions  resorted  to  for  the  sake  of 
plainness  and  clearness.  It  is  also,  of  course, 
impossible  not  to  use  now  and  then  instances, 
comparisons  and  explanations  already  given  by 
others,  especially  in  such  standard  works  as 
those  of  Prof.  Whitney  and  Max  Mullen 

All  suggestions  which  may  help  to  make 
this  work  more  useful  and  less  incomplete,  will 
meet  with  thankful  acknowledgment. 

F.  G. 

New  York,  January,  1886. 


CONTENTS. 


I.  INTRODUCTION,  --------  i 

II.  SOUNDS  AND  LANGUAGE, 5° 

III.  THE  ENGLISH  LANGUAGE, 86 

HOUSEHOLD  WORDS, 108 

CHURCH  WORDS,        _..---  113 

-    WORDS  OF  SOCIETY, 118 

POLITICAL  WORDS, 129 

IV.  COMPARATIVE  GRAMMAR, 138 

V.  OUTLINES  OF  THE  HISTORY   OF  THE  SCIENCE  OF 

LANGUAGE,      --------169 

VI.  THE  QUESTION  OF  THE  ORIGIN  OF  LANGUAGE,  -  190 

VII.  COMPARATIVE  MYTHOLOGY, 208 

VIII.  LANGUAGES  AND  RACES— LOCAL  AND  FAMILY  NAMES,  228 

IX.  LANGUAGE  AND  EDUCATION, 262 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS, 


i. 


INTRODUCTION. 


IT  is  a  common  saying  that  wonder  is  the 
child  of  ignorance.  There  is  some  truth 
in  these  words,  when  they  are  applied  to  the 
unreasonable  wondering  of  slow  or  prejudiced 
minds,  which  every  thing  just  out  of  the  beaten 
tracks  of  every  day  life  is  enough  to  startle. 
But  if  we  speak  of  that  wonder  which  is  worthy 
of  a  thoughtful  mind,  we  may  call  it  rather  the 
child  of  knowledge.  Every  progress  in  life, 
every  new  discovery,  teaches  us  that  the  more 
we  know,  the  more  we  find  to  wonder  at. 
Science  increases  the  world  of  wonders  not  less 
than  the  world  of  knowledge,  and  seems  to 
add  wings  to  our  imagination  as  well  as 
strength  to  our  reason. 


2  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

Indeed,  even  the  roughest  shepherd  who 
looks  at  the  dawn  brightening  in  the  east,  or 
at  evening,  while  driving  his  flock  home,  stops 
to  contemplate  the  sky  ablaze  with  the  glow  of 
the  setting  sun,  and  the  sailor  who  watches 
from  the  deck  the  great  vault  of  heaven  and  its 
countless  stars  mirrored  in  the  water  around 
him,  can  not  but  be  moved  by  the  great- 
ness of  such  scenes.  Yet  their  admiration, 
great  as  it  is,  can  not  even  be  compared  with 
that  of  the  student  of  astronomy,  who  knows 
what  those  stars  are,  and  how  many  thousands 
of  millions  of  miles  their  light  has  traveled  to 
reach  us ;  who  knows  that  nearly  every  one  of 
those  countless  sparkling  points  is  the  centre  of. 
a  separate  solar  system,  each  system  as  great 
and  wonderful  as  that  in  which  we  live. 

Moreover,  the  scholar  brings  his  medita- 
tions to  bear  upon  fields  full  of  wonders 
unspeakably  great,  the  importance,  often  even 
the  existence,  of  which  is  entirely  unknown  to 
the  uneducated.  There  are  millions  of  men, 
for  instance,  who  live  and  die  without  ever 
asking  themselves  a  question  about  this  won- 
derful system  of  sounds  by  which  we  communi- 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  3 

cate  with  our  fellow  beings.  Yet,  what  is  there 
in  the  world  more  suggestive  of  thought  and 
worthier  of  meditation  than  "  Language "  ? 
Whence  comes  this  simple  yet  mysterious 
music,  by  means  of  which  we  lay  open,  so  to 
speak,  our  minds  to  our  fellow  men,  and  read 
in  their  minds  in  turn?  How  is  it  made?  or  is 
it  made  at  all  ?  We  speak  of  living  languages 
and  dead  languages  ;  but  how  does  a  language 
come  to  life  ?  how  does  it  perish  ?  Where  are 
the  magic  forces  to  give  birth  to  such  a 
marvelous  child,  and  where  is  the  giant  strong 
enough  to  destroy  it? 

The  growth  of  herbs  and  trees  and  flowers  is 
wonderful  indeed,  with  so  many  families  differ- 
ing from  region  to  region,  from  climate  to 
climate.  But  see  what  happens  with  language  : 
there  is  an  endless  growth  of  words  and  sounds, 
all  over  the  world,  differing  not  only  according 
to  climates  and  regions,  but  often  from  village 
to  village.  How  does  this  happen  ?  What 
does  it  mean  that,  if  you  travel  all  over  the 
world,  though  you  may  not  know  the  names  of 
all  the  trees  and  flowers  you  see,  still  their 
forms  and  colors  strike  you  not  less,  and  some- 


4  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

times  even  more,  than  they  do  the  natives  ;  but 
if  you  overstep  the  boundaries  of  your  own 
nation,  and  go  to  a  play,  or  listen  to  a  speech, 
in  a  foreign  language,  you  see  people  laughing, 
applauding  or  weeping  at  words  which  for  you 
are  entirely  meaningless  ?  If  it  is  true  that  we 
are  all  brothers,  how  is  it  that,  in  Europe  for 
instance,  a  few  hours'  travel  takes  you  among 
people  whom  you  understand  no  more  than 
you  would  the  Polynesians  or  the  Chinese? 

And  again,  how  are  words  formed  ?  What 
connection  is  there  between  our  ideas  and  our 
words,  that,  when  we  utter  certain  sounds,  we 
are  sure  that  those  who  listen  to  us  understand 
exactly  what  we  mean  ;  and  by  those  sounds 
we  actually  lay  our  minds  bare  before  our  lis- 
teners? And  how  is  it  that  an  Arab,  a  Chinese, 
in  order  to  convey  the  same  idea,  uses  quite 
different  sounds,  and  is  equally  sure  to  be 
understood  by  his  audience  ? 

It  is  hardly  possible,  I  think,  to  find  in  the 
whole  range  of  human  life  problems  more  inter- 
esting than  these  which  are  suggested  even 
by  a  superficial  consideration  of  what  "  lan- 
guage "  is. 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  5 

Still,  if  we  look  at  ourselves  and  people 
around  us,  we  may  safely  assert  that  no  nat- 
ural or  social  phenomenon  receives  so  little  con- 
sideration on  the  part  of  the  large  majority  of 
men.  So  few  pay  attention  to  these  facts  that, 
if  you  ask  a  hundred  persons  what  a  "  word  " 
is,  ninety-nine  will  not  be  able  to  give  a  satis- 
factory answer.  Only  a  few  days  ago  I  hap- 
pened to  read  in  a  grammar  that  "  words  con- 
sist of  sounds  and  letters."  That  sounds  are 
to  be  considered  as  constituents  of  "  words,"  is 
true,  but  letters  have  no  more  to  do  with  the 
constitution  of  words  than  the  colors  of  a  land- 
scape painter  with  the  existence  of  the  land 
itself.  Of  course  we  may  represent  with  let- 
ters, that  is  we  may  write  words,  just  as  we 
can  paint  trees  and  flowers  ;  but  words  exist 
without  letters,  as  flowers  and  trees  exist  with- 
out painters.  Many  tribes  have  no  writing ; 
still,  they  have  words. 

But  we  must  not  wonder  at  the  little  con- 
sideration language  (not  this  or  that  language, 
but  language  in  itself,  or  the  nature  of  language), 
has  received  and  still  receives  from  most  men. 
It  is  so  intimately  connected  with  our  own  being 


6  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  IVORDS. 

that  it  requires  no  little  power  of  reflection  to 
bring  our  thoughts  to  bear  upon  it.  It  grows 
with  our  own  consciousness,  and  we  are  no 
more  aware  of  the  growth  of  our  language  than 
we  are  aware  of  the  growth  of  our  brain. 

Every  now  and  then  one  finds  people,  other- 
wise cultivated  but  lacking  special  linguistic 
training,  who  are  ready  to  put  forth  theories 
about  words  and  languages,  and  find  special 
delight  in  hunting  out  what  they  call  etymolo- 
gies. But  their  theories  and  would-be  etymol- 
ogies are  in  the  main  nothing  but  wild  vagaries 
and  fancies,  utterly  apart  from  scientific  reason- 
ing and  facts.  They  do  just  as  men  did  when, 
in  the  absence  of  any  astronomical  lore,  looking 
at  the  daily  appearing  and  disappearing  of  the 
sun,  and  eager  to  have  some  reason  for  this 
phenomenon,  they  imagined  that  the  sun  was 
going  to  or  rising  from  his  bed.  And  we  must 
remember  that  centuries  elapsed  before  man- 
kind ceased  to  be  satisfied  with  this  explan- 
ation. 

But  however  childish  such  explanations,  how- 
ever wild  and  fanciful  such  etymologies,  we 
must  not  laugh  at  them.  In  those  puerile 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  ^ 

attempts  we  have  the  origin  of  two  great 
sciences :  astronomy  and  the  science  of  lan- 
guage. They  show  us  the  human  mind  busy, 
asking:  "Why  this?  whence?  wherefore?" 
The  answer  is  wrong,  but  at  the  same  time 
a  great  step  is  made  ;  instead  of  merely  gazing 
in  mute  bewilderment  at  the  phenomena  of 
the  sky,  instead  of  wondering  in  helpless 
stupor  at  the  mysteries  of  language,  men 
begin  to  ask,  "Why?"  and  thus  to  recognize 
by  implication  that  a  why  there  must  be,  and 
it  must  be  found  out.  This  is  the  beginning 
of  all  scientific  research,  and  all  intellectual 
progress.  There  is,  however,  this  difference, 
that  a  knowledge  of  the  laws  of  the  heavens 
was  attained  comparatively  early  in  the  history 
of  mankind,  while  the  science  of  language  is 
not  yet  one  century  old,  and  its  results  are 
even  to  this  day  outside  of  the  pale  of  common 
education.  People  who  listen  in  earnest  when 
you  explain  the  laws  that  govern  the  move- 
ments of  the  heavenly  bodies,  would  think  you 
were  jesting  were  you  to  ask  why  a  cat  is 
called  cat?  or  why  a  man  who  has  children  is 
called  father  ?  Still,  whatever  be  the  origin  of 


8  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

language,  we  can  not  suppose  that  words  have 
been  cast  to  right  and  left  upon  things,  hap- 
hazard. If  we  are  reasonable  beings,  we  may 
assume  ci  priori  that  there  must  be  a  reason, 
even  if  we  are  not  able  to  find  it  out,  why 
certain  things  have  been  called  by  certain 
names  ;  why,  for  instance,  a  certain  domestic 
animal  has  been  called  cat,  and  a  man  who  has 
children  is  called  father. 

But  we  can  go  further  than  this :  not  only 
there  must  be  a  reason  for  the  meanings  of  our 
words,  but  in  most  cases  we  are  able  to  find  it 
out,  and  this  by  processes  as  certain  and  trust- 
worthy as  those  of  the  chemist,  who,  after 
having  analyzed  a  new  substance,  tells  us  that 
it  belongs  to  such  and  such  a  family  of  chemical 
bodies,  has  such  and  such  qualities,  and  is 
made  up  of  such  and  such  elements.  This  is 
what  the  science  of  language — or  linguistic 
science,  or  comparative  philology,  as  it  is 
variously  called — does  with  words. 

Before  proceeding  to  state  and  examine  the 
theoretical  principles  which  have  been  reached 
and  which  constitute  the  main  body  of  this 
science,  let  us  take  some  practical  illustrations, 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 


In  this  way,  I  think,  the  processes  will  become 
clearer  and  the  theoretic  principles  will  be 
more  easily  understood.  Let  us  begin  with 
one  or  two  proper  names,  because  in  this, 
more  perhaps  than  in  any  other  province  in  the 
field  of  language,  people  are  reluctant  to  admit 
a  reason  for  the  meanings  of  words.  When  one 
wants  to  name  a  child,  he  consults  his  memo- 
ries, his  taste,  his  fancy,  his  interest,  often  his 
caprice,  but  seldom,  if  ever,  does  he  stop  to 
ask  whether  the  name  he  is  going  to  choose 
may  have  a  meaning.  So  when  we  call 
a  girl  by  her  name,  "  Kitty  "for  instance,  we  think 
of  her,  if  we  think  of  anything  at  all,  and  never 
.  bother  ourselves  by  asking  what "  Kitty"  means. 
Most  men  would  say  that  "  Kitty  "  is  a  name 
for  women,  not  for  men  ;  but,  as  for  its  having 
any  further  significance,  they  neither  under- 
stand nor  believe  it.  In  fact,  had  we  nothing 
but  this  form  of  the  name — Kitty — it  would 
be  difficult,  even  impossible,  to  tell  whether 
there  is  any  meaning  in  it.  But  we  know  that 
Kitty  is  a  familiar,  endearing  form  of  the  name 
Kate  ;  which,  in  its  turn,  is  not  an  original 
form,  but  is  derived  from  Katharine.  The 


10  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

word,  then,  with  which  we  have  really  to 
deal,  is  not  Kitty,  but  Katharine.  Katharine, 
we  can  say  at  once,  is  not  a  name  exclu- 
sively English ;  we  have  in  German  Kath- 
arine, in  French  Catherine,  in  Italian 
Caterina  and  Catarina,  in  Spanish  Catalina. 
All  these  forms  may  be  further  decomposed : 
ina  in  Italian  and  Spanish,  ine  in  French,  are 
suffixes  which  denote  diminution  and  at  the 
same  time  endearment  and  gracefulness ;  thus, 
in  Italian,  donna  means  "  woman  "  ;  donnina  "  a 
graceful  little  woman  "  ;  cavalla,  "a  mare  "  ; 
cavallina,  "  a  graceful  spirited  little  mare,"  etc. 
From  Katharine,  then,  we  go  back  to  a  form 
katJiara,  which  we  find  in  Greek.  Katharos, 
feminine  kathara,  is  an  adjective  which  means 
"  pure."  Kitty,  then,  is  a  secondary  endearing 
form  of  kathara,  and  means  "  pure." 

Now  one  might  ask  why  "  kathara"  means 
pure  ?  Why  the  th  is  preserved  in  German  and 
English,  and  not  in  Italian  and  Spanish,  where 
we  have  simply  t?  Why  in  Italian  we  have  two 
forms,  Caterina  and  Catarina  ?  Why  in  Span- 
ish we  have  /,  Catalina  /  And,  finally,  why  in 
tracing  back  the  meaning  of  Kitty,  we 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  II 


went  to  Greek,  and  not,  for  instance,  to  He- 
brew? 

All  these  questions  can  be  answered  fully 
and  with  certainty,  and  many  of  them  will  be 
answered  in  the  course  of  these  pages.  But 
for  the  sake  of  order  and  clearness,  let  us 
defer  these  investigations  and  proceed  step  by 
step ;  and,  first,  let  us  inquire  into  the  meaning 
of  another  proper  name. 

Suppose  we  were  asked  what  is  the  meaning 
of  that  vulgarism  "  Gene  "  which  is  used  in  some 
parts  of  this  country.  Of  course  we  must  go 
back  to  its  full  and  correct  form,  Eugene.  This 
is  also  a  Greek  word,  "  eugenes,"  which  is  a  com- 
pound :  "  eu  "  "  well  "  ;  "genes  "  derived  from  the 
root  gen,  which  we  have  also  in  "  progenitor," 
"generate,"  etc.,  and  means  "  to  generate,"  to 
"  bring  to  life."  So  that  "  eugenes,"  as  well 
as  "  Gene,"  which  at  first  looks  more  like  a 
puzzle  than  any  thing  else,  means  simply  "  well- 
born." 

And  now  it  would  be  easy  and  interesting  to 
follow  this  root  "  gen  "  in  Sanscrit,  in  Gothic, 
in  Latin,  in  Greek  and  other  kindred  languages. 
But  for  the  present  we  must  let  it  alone; 


12  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

doubtless  it  will  fall  again  in  our  track,  and  then 
we  shall  dissect  it  as  mercilessly  as  an  anato- 
mist. We  shall  be  even  more  cruel :  the  anat- 
omist plunges  his  scalpel  into  a  dead,  senseless 
body,  while  we  shall  tear  open  the  heart  and 
the  brain  of  a  being  still  palpitating  with  life. 
Let  us  now  make  the  subject  of  our  consid- 
erations some  of  the  most  common  words  which 
we  use  every  day,  without  ever  suspecting  that 
they  carry,  hidden  in  their  bosom,  the  reason 
of  their  own  meaning,  and  that  their  meaning 
was  once  entirely  different  from  now,  and  often 
absolutely  incompatible  with  our  tendencies, 
habits  and  creeds,  scientific  as  well  as  religious, 
social  as  well  as  political.  Let  us  take  for 
instance  the  word  which  I  have  just  used : 
"  consideration."  It  is  easy  to  see  that  this  word 
can  be  decomposed:  -tion  is  a  suffix  which  we 
find  in  very  many  words,  as  termina-tion,  medita- 
tion, elec-tion,  refl.cc-tion,  etc.,  and  is  used  gener- 
ally in  the  formation  (forma-tiori)  of  abstract 
nouns.  We  see,  moreover,  that  this  word  is 
formed  from  the  verb  to  consider.  Now  we 
must  ascertain  where  this  consider  comes  from. 
We  find  in  Latin  the  verb  considero  which  has 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  13 

the  same  meaning  and  is,  beyond  a  doubt,  the 
same  verb  as  the  English  consider.  Now  one 
who  knows  Latin  can  easily  see  that  this  con- 
sidero,  in  its  turn,  may  be  further  decomposed, 
as  con  is  a  prefix  which  means  with.  We  are 
left  with  the  root  sider.  What  does  this  mean  ? 
We  have  in  Latin  another  word  with  the  root 
sider:  the  word  sidus,  plural  sidera,  which 
means  star. 

What  connection  may  there  be  between  stars 
and  consideration  ?  A  very  open  and  easily 
intelligible  connection,  if  we  bear  in  mind  the 
low  state  of  civilization  in  which  this  old  word 
must  have  been  formed.  In  the  remote  past, 
when  the  Latins  were  no  more  advanced  in 
civilization  than  those  barbarians  whom  they 
were  destined  to  conquer,  the  superstitious  peo- 
ple, before  undertaking  any  thing,  before  mak- 
ing any  decision,  used  to  consult  the  stars.  So, 
in  those  times  the  man  who  said  he  wanted  to 
consider,  meant  really  that  he  wanted  to  look 
at  the  stars  and  see  whether  they  were  propi- 
tious to  his  undertaking  or  not.  By  and  by, 
with  the  progress  of  civilization,  such  super- 
stitious belief  in  the  influence  of  the  stars  died 


14  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

away,  but  the  word  remained  ;  and  when  now 
we  say,  and  we  say  it  every  moment,  "  I  must 
consider  this  matter,"  we  are  no  more  aware  of 
our  mentioning  any  thing  in  connection  with 
the  stars,  than  I  am  aware  of  the  fact  that  the 
ground  on  which  I  now  rest  my  feet  while 
writing,  flies  through  space  at  the  rate  of  thou- 
sands of  miles  an  hour. 

There  is  another  word  we  use  every  day,  of 
whose  primitive  meaning  we  are  utterly  un- 
conscious :  the  word  conjecture.  This  is  also 
a  Latin  word  :  coniectura. —  Tura,  like  -tion,  is  a 
suffix  and  is  represented  in  English  by  -ture : 
scrip-ture,na-ture,  crea-ture,  etc.  The  verb  coniccto 
is  a  Latin  verb  derived  from  coniicio,  to  "  throw 
together,"  from  con,  together,  and  the  root  iac 
(which  we  see  in  the  simple  iacio)  "  to  throw." 
Conjecture,  then,  brings  us  back  to  this  root  iac 
and  means  properly  the  action  of  "  throwing 
together"  something.  Once  superstitiouspeople, 
before  trying  to  guess  at  any  thing,  used  to 
"throw  together  "little  stones,  dice,  or  other 
things  of  the  kind,  and  according  to  the  way 
these  objects  fell,  they  formed  their  opinion. 
A  superstition  which  is  not  merely  prehistoric, 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  15 

after  all.  Very  likely  not  a  few  of  my  readers 
remember  having  seen  children  toss  up  cents 
again  and  again  in  order  to  have  a  base  for 
their  guessing. 

To  the  same  root  iac  many  other  words  are 
to  be  referred,  like  e-jec-tion,  (e,  out)  ;  de-jec-tion 
(de,  down,  downward)  ;  ob-jec-tion  (pb,  against ; 
something,  which  one  throws  against),  ob-jec- 
tion-able,  etc.  Inter-jec-tion  means  properly 
something  which  we  throw  in,  between  our 
words  (Latin  inter,  between). 

Thus,  however  different  such  words  as  con- 
jecture, objectionable,  interjection,  are  in  sound 
and  meaning,  they  are  all  to  be  referred  to  the 
root  iac. 

The  same  root  we  meet  in  other  Latin  words, 
which  have  an  echo  in  the  English  language. 
Thus,  through  the  suffix  -ulu,  we  have  iac- 
nlum,  which  means  something  to  be  thrown,  an 
arrow,  a  dart ;  iacuhis  was  the  name  given  to  a 
serpent  which  is  said  to  throw  itself  down  from 
trees  upon  its  prey.  In  connection  with 
iaculum,  we  have  the  verb  iaculari,  which 
means  to  tJirow,  to  dart  off ;  "  iaculatorius  cam- 
pus" was  the  field  where  the  youths  practiced 


1 6  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS, 

with  arrows  and  spears.  From  this  verb  "  iac- 
ulari"  with  the  prefix  e,  out,  arid  the  suffix 
-tion,  which  we  have  already  met,  is  formed  the 
English  word  e-jacula-tion,  which  means  prop- 
erly something  which  we  "throw  out"  of  our 
breast,  a  short  prayer,  which  we  speed  as  an 
arrow  to  heaven  from  the  depth  of  our  heart. 
Take  the  word  pensively  and  let  us  apply 
to  it  the  scalpel  of  the  comparative  philologist. 
First  we  have  the  suffix  -fy,  which  is  employed 
to  form  so  many  English  adjectives  and 
adverbs :  lovely,  friendly,  silly,  wittily,  stu- 
pidly, etc. — We  shall  see  further  on,  where  this 
-fy  comes  from,  and  what  it  means.  We  are 
left  with  the  adjective  pensive.  In  this  we 
recognize  the  common  suffix  for  adjectives — 
ive  :  sensit-ive,  capt-ive,  nat-ive,  adject-ive,  con- 
sumpt-ive,  talkat-ive,  primit-ive,  etc.  Thus  we 
arrive  at  the  root  pens — the  same  that  we  find 
in  the  French  "  pens-er,"  Italian  "  pens-are," 
and  Spanish  "  pens-ar,"  meaning  "to  think"; 
hence  "pensively "  corresponds  exactly  to 
"  thoughtfully."  But  "  think "  is  not  the 
primitive  meaning  of  the  root  pens.  Its  real 
meaning  was  to  weigh  ;  and  the  man  who  thinks 


I 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  17 


before  he  acts,  weighs  the  pros  and  cons.  But 
pens  itself  is  not  a  primary  root.  As  ject  (in 
e-ject,  in-ject,  etc.)  is  formed  from  the  past  of 
the  verb  "iacio,"  so  pens  is  formed  from  the 
past  (pensum)  of  the  verb  "  pend-ere,"  whose 
root  pend  means  to  hang.  When  we  say:  a 
misfortune  is  "  im-pend-ing,"  we  mean  that  it  is 
"  hanging  "  over  us.  One  who  is  in  "  suspense," 
is  swaying  to  and  fro.  One  who  is  "  depend- 
ent "  on  his  friends,  is  "  hanging  on  "  them : 
but  for  their  support  he  would  fall  to  the 
ground.  It  is  easy  to  see  the  connection 
between  the  meanings  of  the  roots  pend  and 
pens,  between  to  hang  and  to  weigh. 

But  one  might  ask,  how  do  you  pass  from 
the  root  pend  to  the  root  pens  ?  What  do  you 
do  with  the  d  of  pend?  Is  the  loss  of  the  d 
merely  an  arbitrary  thing?  Are  we  to  believe 
then  that  Voltaire  was  right  when  he  said  that 
etymology  is  a  science  where  vowels  count 
for  nothing  and  consonants  very  little? 

Not  so.  So  it  was  indeed,  when  etymology 
was  no  science  at  all ;  when  the  science  of  lan- 
guage was  in  no  better  state  than  astronomy 
or  geography,  when  men  believed  that  at  even- 


1 8  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

ing  the  sun  was  going  to  bed  ;  when  it  was 
taught  in  the  schools  that  the  so-called  columns 
of  Hercules  were  the  end  of  the  world  ;  and 
the  earth  was  a  large  flat  disk,  encircled  by  the 
great  river,  Ocean.  But  it  is  not  so  now.  The 
science  of  language  or  comparative  philology 
admits  no  fact,  not  a  change  or  a  transposition, 
which  it  can  not  account  for  in  a  satisfactory 
way.  The  philologist  is  just  as  exact  in  his 
analysis  of  words  as  the  chemist  in  his  analy- 
sis of  bodies. 

The  verb  "  pend-ere  "  takes,  in  its  past,  the 
suffix,  sum,  which  is  very  common  in  Latin  for 
such  formations.  We  should  have  then  "  pend- 
sum".  But  there  is  a  law  which  rules  through- 
out the  Latin  language  that  a  d,  when  it  hap- 
pens to  be  before  an  s,  disappears.  In  the  same 
way  from  the  root  vid,  "  to  see,"  we  have  77- 
sio  (for  vid-sid)  which  is  in  English  "vision"  ; 
from  the  root  cad,  "to  fall"  and  the  preposi- 
tion ob  "  toward,"  before,  we  have  the  noun 
oc-ca-sio  (for  ob-cad-sio,  the  b  of  ob  being  assimi- 
lated \v\\\\  the  following  consonant,  as  in  oc-cur 
from  ob-cur,  oc-cident  from  ob-cident,  etc.), 
the  English  occasion,  which  means  properly 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  19 

something  which  "  falls  before  us  ",  which  "  we 
find  in  our  way  ". 

Pensum,  then,  is  regularly  formed  from  the 
root  pend,  and  from  "  pensum  "  we  derive  the 
secondary  root  pens,  from  which  the  French 
verb  "  pen-ser,"  the  English  adjective  ^uvifv. 

In  Rome  every  matron  used  to  weigh  a  cer- 
tain quantity  of  wool,  and  give  an  equal  share 
to  each  female  slave  to  spin.  Every  one  of 
these  portions  of  wool  was  called  pensum,  that 
is,  "  weighed,"  and  as  thatflensutn  represented 
the  task  assigned  to  each  slave,  -this  word 
pcnsum  assumed  very  soon  the  meaning  of 
task,  and  nowadays  in  Italy,  beside  the  verb 
pcnsare,  to  think,  we  hear  still  the  word  pciiso, 
which  means  the  task,  especially  the  task  given 
for  punishment  to  school  boys. 

In  speaking  of  the  way  we  can  bridge  over 
from  pcnd  to  pens,  I  said  that  there  is  a  law  in 
Latin,  by  which  every  d  that  is  to  be  followed 
by  an  s  disappears. 

Are  there  such  laws  in  languages?  What 
kind  of  laws  are  they  ? 

We  must  look  into  this  subject  a  little 
deeper.  The  astronomer  repudiated  the  wild 


20  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

lawless  fancies  of  the  astrologist ;  he  set  to 
work,  observed  facts,  compared  them,  improved 
his  instruments  of  observation,  and  put  down 
in  his  books  every  thing  he  observed,  even  the 
most  insignificant  phenomena,  which  were  for- 
merly overlooked  as  of  no  account.  Then, 
when  his  collection  of  facts  reached  a  consid- 
erable amount,  he  found  out,  by  diligent  stud- 
ies and  calculations  and  comparisons,  that 
many  phenomena  could  be  grouped  together 
under  one  and  the  same  principle,  which  could 
explain  them.  Such  a  principle  he  called  a  law, 
because  it  governs  all  that  group  of  phenomena. 
Then,  by  pursuing  his  researches,  he  found  out 
another  law,  then  another  and  still  another. 
Further  on  a  law  was  found  which  accounted  for 
many  laws  previously  discovered,  and  these  were 
grouped  together  under  that  last  and  superior 
one,  and  so  on,  until  finally  a  principle  could  be 
formulated  which  comprehended  and  accounted 
for  all  the  principles  discovered  before,  and  such 
a  principle  was  called  a  system — a  Greek  word 
which  means  exactly  "  that  which  stands 
together,"  from  the  preposition  sun,  which  cor- 
responds to  the  Latin  "  cum  "  and  means 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  21 

"with"  the  root  " sta"  which  means  to  stand, 
and  the  suffix  "  via"  the  same  that  we  have  in 
"  proble-ma  "  (problem)/'  theore-ma, "(theorem), 
"program-ma,"  (program-me),  etc. 

In  the  same  way  the  chemist,  setting  aside 
the  dream  of  the  alchemist,  who  wanted  to  find 
away  of  turning  every  thing  into  gold,  pro- 
ceeded to  inquire  into  facts,  to  investigate  and 
analyze,  to  observe  and  compare,  and  so,  by  and 
by,  he  accumulated  an  enormous  quantity  of 
facts,  discovered  several  principles  under  which 
many  facts  could  be  grouped  together,  found 
ulterior  relations  between  groups  and  groups, 
principles  and  principles,  formulated  these  new 
relations,  and  so  on  and  on,  till  he  became  able 
to  formulate  a  general  principle,  and  to  con- 
ceive a  system  capable  of  explaining  the  consti- 
tution of  all  bodies,  either  hidden  in  the  breast 
of  the  earth,  or  floating  in  the  vault  of  heaven. 
And  one  fact  is*  not  to  be  overlooked  :  while 
the  putting  aside  of  the  speculations  of  the 
astrologists  and  the  dreams  of  the  alchemist, 
and  the  settling  down  to  examine  every  day 
facts  and  analyze  bodies  which  hardly  had  any 
claim  to  the  attention  of  former  savants,  seemed 


22  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

almost  to  degrade  science  into  mere  routine 
work,  and  forfeit  a  splendid  world  of  poetic 
speculations  for  a  hard,  matter  of  fact  drudgery, 
the  result  of  this  routine  and  drudgery  turned 
out  to  be  a  world  of  knowledge  far  greater  and 
far  more  sublime  than  any  thing  which  the 
imagination  of  the  alchemist  or  astrologist 
dared  to  conceive ;  and,  what  is  more  marvel- 
ous still,  the  system  which  the  astronomer  dis- 
covered from  his  specula,  with  his  compass,  his 
telescopes  and  calculations,  came  to  coincide 
with  the  system  worked  out  by  the  chemist  in 
his  smoky  shop,  with  his  retorts  and  scales. 
They  are  practically  one  and  the  same  system, 
and  the  different  and  remote  ways  in  which  it 
has  been  found  out  are  the  best  test  of  its  value. 
The  constitution  of  the  world,  as  seen  through 
the  telescope  of  the  astronomer,  is  exactly  the 
same  as  looked  at  through  the  microscope  and 
after  the  analysis  of  the  chemist.  In  each  of 
those  rough  irregular  stones  which  make 
the  streets  of  New  York  uncomfortable,  we  sec 
exactly  the  same  constitution,  the  same 
mechanical  forces  and  movements,  as  the  astron- 
omer discovers  in  the  endless  world  of  planets 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  23 

and  suns  rotating  far  beyond  the  limits  of  our 
atmosphere. 

Not  different  from  that  of  the  astronomer 
has  been  the  course  pursued  by  the  student  of 
language.  Discarding  all  the  wild  fancies  that 
were  honored  with  the  name  of  etymologies, 
but  had  no  base  whatever  except  in  the  sleep- 
walking reasonings  of  their  inventors  ;  throwing 
overboard  the  inane  speculations  about  the  pre- 
tended language  first  spoken  in  the  world,  the 
comparative  philologist  undertook  to  ascertain 
the  facts  quietly  and  steadily  ;  to  analyze  words 
with  scientific  and  minute  precision  ;  not  to 
admit  any  thing  except  what  had  been  reasona- 
bly proved  ;  and  above  all  to  compare  ever 
and  always.  Comparison  is  the  soul  of  science. 

The  result  of  these  methods  is  that  we  are 
now  as  far  advanced  in  the  knowledge  of  what 
language  is,  in  comparison  with  what  was 
known  one  hundred  years  ago,  as  the  mod- 
ern chemist  is  beyond  the  alchemist  of  the  mid- 
dle ages.  The  comparative  philologist  has  dis- 
covered that  in  the  apparent  confusion  with 
which  words  grow  into  other  words,  and 
languages  pass  into  other  languages,  there 


24  THE  riiiLosoriiY  or  iroA'j)s. 

are  laws  which  govern  the  evolution  of  vowels 
into  other  vowels,  of  consonants  into  other 
consonants,  just  as  in  the  apparent  confusion 
of  the  sky  there  are  laws  which  rule  the  move- 
ment of  every  sun,  the  appearing  and  disappear- 
ing of  every  comet. 

The  laws  thus  discovered  by  the  science  of 
language  are  rightly  called  phonetic  laws,  as 
phone  means  sound.  Between  the  system 
of  the  astronomer  and  the  chemist,  and 
the  laws  discovered  by  the  comparative 
philologist,  we  must,  however,  draw  this 
distinction.  Of  those  systems,  however  prob- 
able and  possibly  certain  they  are,  we  can 
not  give  a  positive  demonstration.  All  that 
we  can  say  is,  that  it  is  impossible  to  demon- 
strate that  they  are  not  true.  The  compara- 
tive philologist,  on  the  contrary,  can  positively 
show  that  the  laws  discovered  by  him  are  true ; 
we  can  see  them  every  day,  at  any  moment, 
working  in  every  word. 

We  shall  see,  further  on,  many  of  these  laws, 
and  their  workings.  Let  us  now  bring  other 
words  under  our  linguistic  microscope.  Ik-re 
is  a  very  common  word  :  what  do  you  mean 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  25 

when  you  say  that  Mrs.  So-and-so  is  a  stylish 
woman  ?  Of  course,  you  mean  that  she  is  ele- 
gant, that  she  dresses  beautifully.  But  did  you 
ever  ask  yourself  where  this  word  stylisJi  comes 
from  ? 

Not  many  of  my  readers,  I  dare  say,  have  done 
so.  Well,  let  us  follow  this  word  step  by  step, 
and  try  to  find  out  what  its  first  meaning  was, 
and  what  changes,  both  in  sound  and  meaning, 
it  has  gone  through. 

To  most  men,  the  stone,  on  which  they 
stumble  in  their  way,  is  nothing  but  a  stone. 
But  if  you  take  it  to  the  geologist,  he  will  tell 
you  what  is  its  composition,  to  what  age  of 
the  earth  and  to  what  strata  it  belongs,  and 
with  that  stone  he  will  take  you  back,  far 
back,  to  the  time  when  men  lived  in  caverns, 
when  the  mastodon  was  roaming  about,  and 
when  fields,  now  covered  with  flowers,  were  the 
bottom  of  a  sea. 

We  can  do  the  same  with  words ;  we  can 
follow  them  back  for  centuries  and  centuries  ; 
we  can  go  back  to  ages  so  remote,  that  no 
monument  of  any  kind  survives,  no  memories, 
but  those  hidden  in  these  words  which  we  use 


26  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

everyday,  without  even  thinking  of  them.  Of 
course,  we  can  not  go  so  far  back  as  the  geolo- 
gist can  ;  but  on  the  other  hand,  the  interest  is 
far  greater,  as  the  evolution  of  each  one  of  such 
words  is  a  fragment  of  our  own  history. 

In  stylish  we  have  the  suffix  -ish  which  is  to  be 
found  in  many  adjectives  :  as  whit-ish,  redd-ish, 
Engl-ish,  child-ish,  Ir-ish,  etc.  The  fragment  that 
remains,  styl-,  of  course  is  to  be  connected  with 
the  noun  style.  We  have  in  French  style,  in 
Italian  stile,  in  Latin  stilus.  Stilus  meant  prop- 
erly a  little  stick,  usually  of  iron,  pointed, 
with  which  the  Romans  used  to  write,  by  incis- 
ion, on  their  waxed  tablets.  And,  at  first,  to 
say  that  a  man  had  a  good  stilus  meant  "  he  is 
a  good  penman".  The  "  stilus  "  was  really  the 
pen  of  the  Romans.  Then,  by  a  natural  transi- 
tion, "  he  has  a  good  stilus  "  was  said  of  the 
man  who  turned  his  periods  well,  who  expressed 
his  ideas  in  a  charming  way.  Hence  the  mean- 
ing of  the  English  "  style,"  French  "  style," 
Italian  "stile."  In  English  we  went  further: 
we  called  style  not  only  the  way  of  writing, 
but  the  way  of  doing  any  thing,  of  dressing,  etc. 
The  word  stylisJi,  then,  however  strange  it  may 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  27 

seem  at  first,  is  intimately  connected  with  a 
word  that  meant  "  stick,"  and  nothing  else. 

Still  there  are  other  words  whose  fundamen- 
tal meaning  is  far  more  distant  from  their  pres- 
ent meaning,  than  stylisJi  is  from  stick  or  pen. 
Take  the  word  electrician.  Electrician,  electricity, 
electric,  are  all  formed  directly  from  the  Greek 
word  electron,  "amber,"  in  which  substance 
electricity  was  first  discovered.  When  we 
say  :  "  Edison  is  a  great  electrician,"  who, 
even  among  those  who  know  the  origin  of  the 
word,  thinks  any  thing  about  amber  ?  Such  is 
the  power  of  words  ! 

Here  is  another  word,  whose  evolution  is  not 
a  bit  less  curious  than  that  of  the  word  "  stilus," 
and  which  many  a  mother  has  to  say  of  her 
children,  without  ever  suspecting  what  is  at  the 
root  of  the  word :  saucy. 

"  Saucy  "  is  formed,  through  the  suffix  -y, 
which  is  very  common  in  English,  directly  from 
the  substantive  "  sauce".  "  Sauce  "  is  exactly 
the  French  word  sauce  transported  from  France 
to  England.  French,  as  Italian  and  Spanish  and 
Portuguese  and  Provencal  and  Walachian  and 
Rumansch,  descends  directly  from  the  Latin  ; 


28  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

it  is  one  of  the  Nco-Latin  or  Romance  lan- 
guages. It  is  safe  then  to  look  to  Latin  for  the 
etymology  of  "  sauce,"  as  for  that  of  most 
French  words. 

To  begin  with,  we  know  that  whenever  we 
have  in  Latin  the  group  al  followed  by  a  con- 
sonant, this  al  becomes  in  French  au:  so  the  verb 
"salt-are"  to  jump,  becomes  in  French  "saut-er;" 
the  word  "  alt-ns"  high,  becomes  "  haiit ;" 
the  word  "  calidus"  warm,  through  the  "form 
"  cald-us"  becomes  chaud ;  alba,  the  daybreak, 
becomes  "  aube  /"  "  altar"  "  autcl"  In  this  way 
for  "  sauce,"  we  must  look  for  a  word  like  sake 
or  salse  (because  French  c  before  e,  t,  represents 
a  latin  s).  This  salse  carries  us  back  to  a  Latin 
salsa,  as  a  Latin  a  is  represented  in  French  by 
an  e ;  which  by  and  by  came  not  to  be  pro- 
nounced. Now  where  can  this  Latin  salsa  come 
from  ?  Salsa  is  but  a  form  of  the  past  participle 
of  the  verb,  "salere,"  which  means  "to  salt." 
"  Salsa,"  then,  in  Latin  and  Italian,  "  sauce  "  in 
French  and  English,  means  nothing  but  "salfcd." 
It  came  to  be  used  as  a  substantive  to  mean 
something  salted^  piquant.  Hence  "  saucy,"  he, 
or  she,  who  is  "  salted,"  sharp,  flippant. 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  29 

We  have  thus  traced  the  word  "  saucy  "  back 
to  its  Latin  form,  giving  reason  for  the  least 
change  of  consonant,  showing  that  even  the 
change  of  an  a  into  an  e  is  not  arbitrary, 
or  casual,  but  in  obedience  to  a  law.  Then  we 
have  followed  the  Latin  word  in  its  gradual 
development  of  meanings.  There  can  not  be 
the  least  shade  of  doubt  that  saucy  has  been 
derived  directly  from  the  Latin  word  salere. 
Still,  how  many  are  there  who  know  that  by 
saying  saucy  they  say  any  thing  connected  with 
salt  ? 

If  now  we  look  back  at  the  words  we  have 
analyzed  thus  far,  (consideration,  conjecture, pen- 
sive, stylish,  electrician,  saucy},  we  can  draw 
some  general  conclusions,  which  will  help  us  in 
pursuing  our  investigations. 

In  the  first  place,  we  see  that  in  order  to  find 
out  what  a  word  is,  and  what  it  means,  and 
where  it  comes  from,  we  must  not  take  the 
word,  so  to  speak,  as  a  whole  ;  we  must  ana- 
lyze  it,  and  resolve  it  into  its  components.  We 
have  seen  that  we  have  "  suffixes,"  that  is, 
additions  at  the  end  of  a  word  ;  and  "  prefixes," 
or  words  put  at  the  beginning  of  a  word  ;  we 


30  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

have  also  "  infixes  "  or  sounds  introduced  into 
the  body  of  a  word.  So  in  con-ject-ure,  con  is 
a  prefix,  ure  is  a  suffix  :  in  the  L.atin  verb  iac-i-o, 
from  the  root  iac,  i  is  an  infix,  and  we  could 
show  that  this  infix  once  had  a  specific  mean- 
ing ;  but  this,  for  the  present,  would  carry  us 
too  far.  These  affixes  (we  call  by  this  name  all 
such  formative  elements)  are  also  divided  into 
primary  and  secondary,  nominal  and  verbal ; 
but  for  our  purpose,  classification  according  to 
collocation  is  enough.  What  remains  after 
having  taken  away  all  the  additions  in  form  of 
prefixes,  infixes,  and  suffixes,  is  the  "  root  "  of 
the  word.  The  "root"  is  the  all-essential  in 
words.  //  is  useless,  it  is  absurd,  to  try  to  find 
out  the  etymology  of  a  word,  if  we  do  not  know 
its  root. 

But  how  are  we  to  get  at  the  root  of  a  word  ? 
By  analysis  and  comparison  ;  by  resolving  the 
word  into  its  elements,  and  by  comparing  those 
elements  with  the  forms  they  assume  in  the 
same  language,  and  in  kindred  langu 
We  must  analyze  and  compare.  Trust  no 
sounds — sounds  are  treacherous  and  misleading. 
The  etymologist  of  old  was  led  merely  by 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  31 


affinity  of  sounds ;  he  would  not  have  found  it 
difficult  to  connect,  for  instance,  spelling  and 
dispelling.  But  spelling  belongs  to  a  Gothic 
root  whose  fundamental  meaning  has  not  been 
yet  ascertained,  while  dispelling  is  the  present 
participle  of  the  verb  dispel,  Latin  dispello. 
Dispello  is  a  compound  of  the  prefix  dis,  atvvo,  in 
two  directions,  hither  and  thither  ;  and  the  verb 
pello,  to  push ;  hence  dispcllere,  to  dispel,  to 
push  hither  and  thither,  to  disperse. 

Again,  how  many  would  be  ready  to  believe 
that  there  is  a  connection  bet  ween  sect  and  insect! 
But  these  words  have  nothing  in  common.  Sect 
is  from  the  root  secu,  which  means  to  "follow  "/ 
we  have  it  in  "  persecute,"  "  consequence,"  (that 
which  follows),  "  pur-sue,"  "sui-tor,"  etc.  A  pro- 
posof  these  two  last  words,  we  must  notice  that 
there  is  a  phonetic  law  in  the  French  language, 
according  to  which  a  c  or  a  g  which  in  a  Latin 
word  stands  between  two  vowels,  disappears  in 
the  evolution  of  that  word  from  Latin  into 
French;  so  regina,  queen,  becomes  in  French 
"reive"  ;  securus,  French  stir,  sure;  magistcr, 
French  maistre,  and  afterward  maitre,  teacher ; 
amicus,  French  ami,  friend,  etc.  In  the  same  way 


32  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS, 

Latin  sequ-i,  Low  Latin  seqnire  (for  sccu-irc] 
becomes  in  French  suivrc.  In  the  same  way 
we  have  "pur-sue"  and  the  word  suitor  from 
"  secu-tor"  This  tor  is  a  very  common  suffix,  in 
order  to  designate  him  who  performs  an  action  : 
protec-tor;  inven-tor  ;  collec-tor,  etc.  Sect  then, 
from  the  root  "  seen  "  to  follow,  and  its  deriva- 
tives "  sectarian,"  "  sectarianism,"  etc.,  refer  to 
those  who  follow  the  same  tenets,  whether  in 
politics  or  theology,  or  any  other  pursuit.  Sect 
and  sectarian,  like  party  and  partisan,  have  no 
bad  meaning  in  themselves  ;  but  on  account  of 
the  effects  that  absolute  devotion  to  one  set  of 
ideas  and  persons  has  upon  us,  sectarian,  par- 
tisan, and  fanatic  soon  became  synonymous. 
"Insect"  is  a  compound  word,  from  the  prepo- 
sition in  and  the  root  sec  which  means  to  cut ; 
the  same  root  that  we  have  in  section,  seg- 
ment (for  sec-ment),  dis-sect,  etc.  Insects  were 
so  called  on  account  of  the  conformation  of 
their  bodies,  which  are,  as  it  were,  divided  into 
many  sections,  into  many  little  rings. 

Who  would  not  readily  assume  that  the 
Latin  and  the  Greek  word  for  God,  dens  and 
thcos,  are  the  same  word  slightly  changed  from 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  33 


one  to  the  other  language  ?  Still,  comparative 
philology,  which  has  no  doubt  that  consequence 
and  suitor  belong  to  the  same  root,  does  not 
admit  that  deus  and  theos  belong  to  the  same 
root.  To  believe  this,  we  should  suppose  that 
many  of  the  phonetic  laws  of  the  Latin  and 
Greek  languages  have  been  violated  in  the 
formation  of  those  two  words.  But  laws  which 
can  be  violated  thus,  are  not  laws ;  a  science, 
the  laws  of  which  admit  of  such  unaccountable 
exceptions,  is  not  a  science. 

We  must  then  mistrust  sounds  utterly. 

We  must  deal  with  words  as  the  botanist 
deals  with  plants.  To  the  layman  many  flowers 
look  almost  alike,  and  he  would  readily  refer 
them  to  the  same  class ;  but  if  he  turns  to  the 
classifications  made  by  the  botanist,  he  will  see 
that  those  flowers  belong  to  quite  different 
families ;  while  others  which  look  so  different 
one  from  the  other,  are  classed  together  in  the 
same  family  and  species.  Why  ?  because  the 
botanist  does  not  trust  colors,  or  other  showy 
appearances :  he  looks  at  more  fundamental 
characters,  and  on  those  he  founds  his  classi- 
fications. 


34  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

And  as  it  is  useless  to  try  to  classify  herbs 
and  flowers  without  having  devoted  a  respect- 
able amount  of  time  to  the  study  of  botany, 
without  having  acquired  the  skill  to  distin- 
guish between  secondary  and  primary  char- 
acters, it  is  equally  useless  to  try  to  classify 
words,  to  group  them  together  according  to 
their  derivation  —  which  is  properly  what 
etymology  means — if  one  has  not  devoted 
some  time  to  the  study  of  the  science  of  lan- 
guage. 

Besides  the  necessity  of  decomposing  words 
into  roots  and  secondary  elements,  we  have 
seen  that  both  their  sounds  and  their  meanings 
undergo  some  changes  which  we  must  follow 
step  by  step.  Of  these  two  evolutions  of  sounds 
and  meanings,  that  of  sounds  is  regulated  by 
ascertained  laws,  and  it  is  by  far  the  more  im- 
portant. It  may  be  that  sometimes  we  can  not 
explain  satisfactorily  the  transition  of  a  word 
from  one  meaning  to  another :  meanings  are 
often  so  affected  by  local  and  historical  facts, 
usages,  and  prejudices,  now  lost,  that  it  is  dif- 
ficult, not  infrequently  impossible,  to  follow 
and  explain  their  evolution.  But  no  change  in 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  35 


sound  must  be  accepted  if  we  can  not  show 
that  it  is  in  accordance  with  the  phonetic  laws 
that  obtain  in  the  language  to  which  the  word 
belongs.  The  phonetic  laws  must  be  our  sheet- 
anchor  in  linguistic  researches.  This  is  what 
gives  to  the  new  science  of  language  the  exact- 
ness and  precision  of  the  physical  sciences. 
Once  a  wag  derived  violin  from  Nebuchad- 
nezzar ;  but  this,  which  was  very  clever  when 
applied  to  the  fantastic  etymologist  of  old, 
would  be  a  very  poor  joke  if  aimed  at  the  mod- 
ern science  of  language.  It  would  be  the  same 
as  to  confound  astronomy  with  astrology, 
chemistry  with  alchemy. 

The  evolution  of  meaning,  even  though  it  is 
to  be  subordinate  in  our  researches  to  the  evolu- 
tion of  sound,  has  nevertheless  no  little  impor- 
tance. Thus,  for  instance,  in  the  words  which 
we  have  analyzed,  from  the  "  throwing  "  of  dice 
or  coppers  to  "  conjecture,"  from  "  throwing  " 
to  "  ejaculation,"  from  "  salt "  to  "  saucy,"  from  to 
"  weigh  "  to  to  "  think  "  (pensive),,  from  "  pen  " 
(stilus)  to  " style"  of  writing,  or  dressing,  we 
see  a  constant  ascending  evolution  from  a  mean- 
ing more  or  less  material  to  a  meaning  more 


36  THE  PH1LO SOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

and  more  ideal,  more  and  more  spiritual.  This 
is  a  constant  evolution  which  we  shall  witness 
in  almost  all,  I  might  say  all,  the  words 
we  shall  have  to  examine.  The  process  of 
language  is  a  great  metaphor — (metaphor  is 
a  Greek  word  and  means  transportation). 
Words  first  applied  to  material  things,  we  trans- 
port to  other  things  which  are  not  material  at 
all,  but  still  have  with  those  things  some  point 
or  other  of  connection.  Of  all  evolutions  none 
is  so  interesting  as  this  progressive  idealization, 
because  words  are  the  mirrors  of  our  minds  and 
souls — the  more  interesting  inasmuch  as  words 
are  so  intimately  connected  with  us,  so  "  con- 
natured"  with  us,  that  we  seldom  think  of  the 
possibility  of  looking  at  our  speech  as  some- 
thing separated  from  ourselves. 

It  is  the  same  with  language  as  it  is  with  coal, 
if  I  am  allowed  to  use  so  material  an  image. 
But  what  is  not  material  in  comparison  with  this 
subtile,  aerial,  almost  imperceptible  strength, 
which  yet  belts  the  world  and  sways  it?  The 
piece  of  coal  which  is  dug  out,  hard  and 
dirty,  after  one  process  and  another,  and  still 
another,  is  ground,  becomes  lustrous  and  soft 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  37 

lust,  is  turned  into  bright  gaslight,  or  shines  in 

lectric  light.     The  electric  light  and  a  piece  of 

lirty  coal — what  is  there  in  common  between 

iese  things  ?     Still  a  chemist  can  trace  back, 

tep  by  step,  the  origin  of  that  light,  and  show 

LOW  it  has  sprung  directly  from  that  lump  of 

coal.    In  the  same  way,  words  which  had  merely 

a  material  meaning,  are,  by  a  sort  of  idealizing 

process,    elevated,    sublimated,    into   abstract, 

entirely  ideal  meanings. 

The  evolution  of  the  meanings  of  words,  nay, 
the  very  life  of  language,  I  said,  is  a  great  con- 
tinual metaphor.  Even  the  most  common 
words  which  we  use  every  moment  as  a  matter 
of  course,  without  caring  to  know  where  they 
come  from,  without  even  suspecting  that  they 
may  once  have  meant  something  different 
from  what  they  now  mean,  even  these  words 
have  undergone  the  same  metaphorical  pro- 
cess; and  if  we  analyze  them,  if  we  question 
them  about  their  origin  and  their  primitive 
meaning,  they  will  answer  us,  they  will  show 
what  amount  of  picturesque  power  is  at  the 
bottom  of  our  language. 

You  say,  for  instance,  "  Mr.  So-and-so  was  the 


38  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

supporter  of  this  resolution."  You  do  not  mean, 
of  course,  that  he  actually  "  buttressed  "  it  up 
with  hands  and  shoulders,  that  he  lifted  it  up 
from  the  ground.  Still,  this  is  what  is  meant 
by  supporter,  from  Latin  sub,  upward,  and  the 
root  port,  French  "  porter,"  Latin  and  Italian 
"  portare" — to  carry.  The  same  metaphor  we 
employ  when  we  say:  "  He  is  the  support  of  his 
family." 

We  hear  also  very  often  :  "  He  speaks  French, 
he  speaks  German  fluently."  If  we  take  away 
the  adverbial  suffix  -ly,  we  have  fluent,  which 
is  nothing  else  than  the  present  participle  of 
the  Latin  verb  flucrc,  "  to  flow."  We  mean 
then  that  words  "  flow  "  from  his  lips  steadily 
and  easily  as  water  from  a  fountain.  So  the 
phrase  "fluency  of  speech,"  if  we  just  think 
over  it  a  little,  raises  before  us  the  image  of 
a  stately  river  flowing  through  valleys  and 
plains. 

Another  very  common  phrase  is  :  "  I  intend 
to  do  this,  or  that."  The  root  tend  means 
properly  to  "  stretch, "as  we  have  it  in  the  words 
"  to  tend  a  boiv"  "  To  intend  "  (with  that  in 
intensifying)  means,  as  it  were,  to  tend  the  bow 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF   WORDS.  39 

one's  mind  toward  something,  to  "  aim  "  at 

>mething.  And  when  we  hear :  "  His  inten- 
ion  is  this,"  it  does  not  require  a  great  deal  of 

lagination  to  see  in  the  background  of  the 
rord,  if  I  may  say  so,  a  man  tending  his  bow, 
y  to  shoot  his  arrow.  This  certainly  was 
the  first  meaning  of  the  word,  which,  by  the 
wear  and  tear  of  daily  use,  has  lost  its  primitive 
picturesqueness,  and  retains  only  the  substance, 
the  sinew,  so  to  speak,  of  its  meaning;  like  an 
ancient  Etruscan  vase,  which  has  lost  its  delicate 
outline,  and  has  retained  of  its  original  self  just 
enough  to  remind  us  of  what  it  was. 

Take  the  word  "appetite."  An  etymologist  of 
the  old  school,  for  whom  facts  were  nothing  and 
imagination  was  every  thing,  would  perhaps 
have  seen  some  connection  between  this  word 
and  the  French  petite,  "  small,"  and  said  that 
"  appetite  "  means  a  small  hunger,  or  have  ut- 
tered some  other  nonsense  of  the  kind. 

Let  us  look,  above  all,  into  the  body  of  the 
word  ;  let  us  dissect  it,  and  then  we  may  safely 
say  what  it  is,  and  what  it  comes  from.  Appe- 
tite, French  appctit,  Italian  appetite,  Latin 
dppetitus,  are  all  one  and  the  same  word.  Peti- 


40  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

tus  is  the  past  participle  of  the  verb  pctcrc, 
which  means  to  seek,  to  ask  for  (see  "  peti- 
tion"}. The  preposition  ad  means  "  to," 
"  toward."  So  that  the  real  meaning  of  appetite 
is  a  wishing  or  longing  for  anything,  and  it  has 
come  to  be  applied  especially  to  food,  although 
formerly  it  was  said  of  almost  every  kind  of 
desire,  and  especially  of  the  passions,  of  the 
longings  which  torment  our  poor,  frail  human 
nature. 

Now  let  us  inquire  further  into  the  origin  of 
this  word  pet-ere ;  its  meaning,  "  to  wish"  is 
too  immaterial  to  be  primitive.  There  must  be 
some  other  less  ideal  meaning  at  the  bottom. 
\Ve  find  in  Latin  itself  this  root/*'/,  Greek  pet, 
Sanskrit  pat,  which  means  to  "  fly,"  and  also  to 
run  very  quickly.  We  see  clearly  this  meaning 
in  the  word  "  im-pet-us,"  in  the  Greek  verb 
pct-omai  which  means  "  to  fly,"  and  in  all 
derivatives  from  the  Sanskrit  root  pat.  The 
verb  appctcrc,  then,  means  properly  to  run 
toward  something,  that  is,  to  long  for  it,  to  wish. 

This  Sanskrit  root  pat  is  to  be  found  in  some 
other  English  words.  From  this  root  and  the 
suffix  -tra,  (Latin  -trum,  Greek  -tron),  we  have 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  41 

the  word  pat-tra,  and  then  pa-tra,  which  means 
the  instrument  with  which  one  flies,  that  is  a 
"  feather,"  a  wing.  In  the  Teutonic  languages, 
a  Sanskrit  or  Latin  p  is  generally  represented 
by/"/  for  instance,  Sanskrit  pitar,  Latin  pater, 
German  vater,  English  father.  In  the  same  way 
this  Sanskrit  word/tf/nz,  corresponds  normally 
to  the  Gothic  fadar,  to  the  old  High  German 
fcdara,  and  to  the  English  feather. 

But  from  the  tootpat,  which  in  Latin  is,  as 
we  have  seen,  pet,  we  have  another  word,  pet- 
na,  Latin  "  pen-na,"  which  means,  also,  an  in- 
strument for  flying — a  feather.  But  as  a  feath- 
er was  used  for  writing,  the  word  penna  came 
very  naturally  to  have  the  meaning  of  pen,  and 
pen  is  nothing  else  than  the  Latin  penna.  Ap- 
petite, then,  and/r#  and  feat/ierhave  at  the  bot- 
tom one  and  the  same  root,  and  if  we  have  any 
faith  in  facts,  any  confidence  in  the  power  of 

luman  reason,   we  can  not  entertain  a  doubt 
lat  this  fact  is  true,  just  as  it  is  true  that  sect 

ind  insect,  deus  and  theos,  however  similar,  have 

lothing  in  common. 
We  may  notice  in  passing  that  it  is  not  the 

;urious  and  complicated  words,  but  the  com- 


42  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

mon  and  familiar  ones  which  teach  us  the 
most.  Many  wonder  what  the  etymology  of 
algebra  may  be,  of  alcohol,  odometer,  seismo- 
graph, etc.  But  they  do  not  know,  they  do 
not  even  suspect  that  a  treasure  of  historical 
and  prehistorical  information  lies  hidden  in 
every  one  of  the  words  which  they  use  in  their 
daily  intercourse  with  their  children,  their  wives, 
their  friends.  It  is  always  the  same  old  story  : 
men  dream  about  fabulous  mines  that  will  make 
so  many  Croesuses  of  them,  and  do  not  see  that 
wealth  lies  in  store  for  them  at  their  very  door, 
if  only  they  would  cultivate  their  ground  prop- 
erly and  avail  themselves  of  the  present  oppor- 
tunities. We  all  dream  about  future  probabili- 
ties, but  the  characteristic  of  true  genius  is  to 
make  the  best  of  every  thing  that  lies  near  at 
hand.  Men  had  to  go  to  work  mines  in  Cali- 
fornia to  find  out  what  heaps  of  gold  lay  hidden 
in  all  those  fields  if  only  they  were  tilled  ;  men 
had  to  learn  Sanskrit  to  find  out  what  inex- 
haustible stores  of  information,  linguistic,  his- 
torical, and  philosophical  were  gathered  in  their 
every  day  talking,  in  the  dialects  of  the  hum- 
blest and  most  uneducated  people. 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  43 

Let  us  continue  our  researches,  still  looking 
at  the  most  common  words.  Take  the  word 
application.  We  must  separate  the  well  known 
suffix  tion ;  we  must  take  away  the  prefix  ad, 
whose  d  has  been  assimilated  to  the  following 
consonant,  as  "ad-petitus"  gives  "  a*p-petitus," 
"  appetite  ";  as  "  ad-plause  "  gives  "  ap-plause  "; 
as  "  ad-prove  "  gives  "  approve,"  etc.  Weare  left 
with  the  root //££•.  This  we  find  in  Latin  and 
means  to  fold ;  hence  application  is  the  folding 
of  one  thing  against  another,  \.\\z  applying  it  to 
another  thing.  And  when  we  speak  of  mental 
application,  properly  we  mean  that  our  mind 
"folds  itself  upon,"  "  attaches  itself  to"  some 
subject. 

Likewise  when   we    say  that   a  thing  is  com- 
plicated, properly  we   mean   that   it   has  many 
folds,   it   is   folded   again    and   again,  so    as   to 
lake    it  difficult  to   unravel   it,   to  explain  it. 
'his  root  plic   we    find    again   in   many  Latin 
rords,   and   of    course    in  languages,   such   as 
Vench,    Italian    and    Spanish,    derived    from 
,atin.     We    have    for     instance    the      words 
'uplcx,  triplex,   quadruple*,  etc.,  which  give  in 
Italian  duplice,    triplice,    quadruplice,    etc.    In 


44  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

French,  according  to  the  law  which  we  have 
already  seen,  that  a  consonant  between  two 
vowels  disappears,  we  have  double,  triple,  quad- 
ruple, etc.  These  words  mean  "  tzvo,  three, 
four,  times  as  much"  or  else  "  of  two,  three,  four 
different  kinds  ;"  but  their  primitive  meaning 
was  simply  that  a  thing  was  "folded"  two, 
three,  or  four  times.  In  the  same  way,  and 
with  the  same  evolutions  of  meaning,  we  have 
from  the  root  "  fold,"  twofold,  threefold,  four- 
fold, manifold. 

Let  us  now  take  the  word  experience.  The 
ideas  conveyed  by  this  word  are  so  imma- 
terial, and  so  complex,  that  at  first  it  seems 
hardly  possible  to  unravel  it,  and  reduce 
it  to  a  single  root  with  a  single  material 
meaning.  Still  the  process  is  easy  and  cer- 
tain. Experience  is  the  same  word  as  the  French 
experience,  Latin  expcrientia.  From  this  we 
must  separate  the  whole  suffix  i-cnlia,  which  is 
represented  in  English  and  French  by  i-cncc 
(conf.  aud-ience,  Latin  aud-iciitia,  from  the 
root  aud,  to  hear).  Of  course  it  is  possible  to 
analyze  further  this  suffix  i-cncc,  and  see  how 
it  was  formed.  But  for  the  present  it  will 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  45 

suffice  for  our  purpose  to  recognize  .  the  for- 
mative character  of  this  part  of  the  word,  i-ence. 
From  what  remains,  exper,  we  must  still  take 
away  the  prefix  ex  which  means  out,  and  is 
to  be  met  in  very  many  English  words  of 
Latin  origin.  We  arrive  at  last  at  the 
root/rr.  This  same  root,  which  we  have  in 
Latin  ex-per-ior,  Greek  peir-ao,  means  to  go 
through  ;  hence  ex-per-tus,  expert,  is  the  man 
who  has  "  gone  through  and  has  come  out  "  ; 
experience  is  the  wisdom  of  an  expert,  and  also, 
in  English,  the  act  of  going  through  some 
trial.  This  root  per  is  to  be  connected 
with  the  English  to  "fare"  German  fahren, 
Gothic  far  an,  because,  as  we  have  just  seen, 
we  must  expect  to  find  an  f  in  the  Teutonic 
languages  whenever  we  have  a  /  in  Latin  or 
Greek.  Compare  father  with  Latin  pater. 
Here  we  have  two  words,  which  many  peo- 
ple not  acquainted  with  the  science  of  lan- 
guage, would  fain  group  together :  to  decide  and 
deciduous.  Both  of  them  are  of  Latin  origin, 
but  decide  is  formed  from  the  preposition  de 
and  the  root  eld,  a  weakened  form  of  the  root 
cacd  which  means  to  cut,  and  also  to  kill. 


46  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

Hence  to  decide,  decision,  mean  to  cut  a  ques- 
tion short,  to  separate  wrong  from  right,  The 
same  root  we  have  in  homicide^  to  cut,  to  kill 
a  man  ;  suicide,  the  killing  of  one's  self. 

Deciduous  is  from  the  preposition  de  and  the 
root  cid ;  which  is  in  its  turn  a  weakened  form 
of  the  root  cad  (compare  iic  in  con-iic-io  from 
iac)  which  means  "  to  fall  "  ;  hence  deciduous 
means  "  falling  down,"  "  subject  to  falling 
down."  This  same  root  cad  that  we  have  seen 
already  in  occasion,  recurs  in  its  weakened  form 
cid,  in  Occident,  which  means  properly  "  fall- 
ing down,"  but  came  to  be  applied  to  the 
sunset,  that  is,  to  the  place  or  time  where  the 
sun  falls  down. 

Now  a  reader  with  an  inquisitive  mind 
might  ask  why  in  occasion  we  have  a  (from 
cad]  and  in  accident  we  have  i.  The  reason 
is  that  occasion  is  derived  from  a  form  of 
the  past  of  the  verb  cad-crc,  where  through 
the  accidents  of  the  conjugation,  the  a  of  the 
root  cad  becomes  long,  and  is  also  accented  ; 
which  two  facts,  the  length  and  the  accent, 
work  very  efficiently  in  the  preservation  of  any 
sound.  Occident  on  the  contrary  is  properly 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  47 


tie  present  participle  of  the  verb  occidere, 
here  the  a  not  being  accented  and  not  being 
_  >ng,  dwindles  very  easily  into  i.  This  same 
fact  of  accented  syllables  preserved  in  all  or 
almost  all  their  integrity,  and  unaccented  syl- 
lables passing  from  broader  into  more  closed 
and  less  distinct  sounds,  we  can  see  in  the 
evolution  of  almost  every  word. 

The  same  difference  as  that  between  decision 
and  deciduous,  we  have  between  incision  (in  and 
eld,  from  caed,  to  cut  in)  and  incident  (from  in 
and  eld  from  cad\  something  that  falls  in  our 
way.  Casual  is  also  derived  from  the  root  cad 
(cad-sual,  as  occasion  for  occad-sion)  ;  "  that 
happens  to  fall,  to  occur."  So  case,  Latin 
casus,  (from  cad-sus)  is  something  which  has 
happened. 

As  another  instance  of  phonetic  laws,  we  may 
observe,  that  in  Latin,  while  d  before  s  disap- 
pears, d  before  t  is  turned  into  s  ;  for  instance 
the  adjective  catliaros,  from  which  we  have 
seen  Katharine  is  derived,  comes  from  a  root 
"  cadh,"  which  means  to  "  purify."  This  root  is 
in  Latin  cad,  and  to  it  we  must  refer  the  adjec- 
tive cas-tus  (for  cad-tus),  chaste,  pure. 


48  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

But  let  us  hasten  to  conclude  this  too  long 
introductory  chapter.  We  have  seen  that 
words  can  be. dissected  and  analyzed,  like  any 
material  form  ;  that  such  dissections  are  to  be 
carried  on  by  comparative  method  ;  that,  as  a 
result  of  such  dissections,  words  appear  to 
consist  of  roots  and  of  certain  formative  addi- 
tions, which  we  may  comprehend  under  the 
general  name  of  affixes.  All  the  roots  that  we 
have  analyzed,  and  all  those  that  we  shall  ana- 
lyze hereinafter,  have  at  the  bottom  a  mere 
material  meaning,  which  by  and  by,  through 
an  ascending  metaphorical  evolution,  has  been 
turned  to  a  less  and  less  material,  and  finally  to 
an  utterly  immaterial  signification.  We  may 
also  observe  that  all  these  roots  are  monosyl- 
labic ;  in  fact,  such  are  all  roots.  When  by  dis- 
secting a  word  we  arrive  at  a  fragment  with  two 
syllables,  we  may  assume  that  the  fragment  is 
not  a  root.  At  least,  it  is  not  a  primary  root  ; 
it  is  a  secondary  formation  which  can  be  dis- 
sected further  still. 

Moreover,  we  have  caught  a  glimpse  of  the 
existence  of  phonetic  laws.  This  growing  of 
sounds  into  other  sounds,  this  forming  and 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 


49 


tscaying  of  words,  which  seems  so  disorderly 
id  chaotic,  is  not  so  at  all.  Laws  rule  the 
orld  of  sounds  as  well  as  the  world  of  stars. 
The  next  chapter  will  be  devoted  to  a  fur- 
icr  study  of  these  laws,  and  to  a  considera- 
tion of  other  instances  of  their  working. 


II. 

SOUNDS   AND   LANGUAGE. 

What  can  seem  simpler  than  the  ABC,  and  what  is  more 
difficult  when  we  come  to  examine  it  ? — MAX  MiJLLER. 

To  enable  ourselves  to  understand  better  the 
nature  of  the  laws  that  govern  the  changes  in 
the  sounds  of  which  words  consist,  it  is  but 
natural  to  investigate  first  what  these  sounds 
are. 

The  majority  of  the  sounds  which  we  utter 
in  speaking  English  are  represented  by  the  Eng- 
lish alphabet.  There  are  many  little  nuances, 
especially  vowel  sounds,  which  our  alphabet 
fails  to  represent  ;  but,  for  our  purpose,  we 
may  fairly  neglect  such  exceptions,  and  assume 
that  our  alphabet  represents  all  the  sounds  we 
utter  in  our  speech. 

These  sounds,  as  every  school-boy  knows,  are 
divided  into  vowels  and  consonants.  But  what 
is  a  TVAZiv//  What  is  a  consonant  /  These 
things  are  so  elementary  that  every  one  is 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 


presumed  to  know  them  ;  yet  they  involve  such 
difficult  problems,  linguistic  and  physiological 
at  once,  that  thus  far  there  is  not  a  definition 
of  these  two  classes  of  sounds,  which  is  agreed 
upon  by  all  scholars.  The  common  distinc- 
tion, taught  in  schools,  that  vowels  are  sounds 
which  can  be  uttered  alone,  by  themselves, 
while  consonants  can  not  be  uttered  without  the 
accompaniment,  and,  as  it  were,  the  support  of  a 
vowel,  is  evidently  untrue,  for  many  consonants 
(for  instance  t/t,  f,  sh,  and  s,)  can  be  pronounced 
very  easily  without  the  help  of  a  vowel. 

To  this  classification  we  shall  return  presently. 
But  how  are  all  these  sounds  formed?  what  is 
their  nature  and  their  individual  characteristics  ? 

In  answer  I  quote  from  Huxley's  Elements 
of  Physiology,  where  the  physiology  of  vocal 
sounds  is  explained  most  clearly  and  concisely. 

"  Speech  is  voice  modulated  by  the  throat, 
tongue,  and  lips. 

"  The  modulation  of  the  voice  into  speech  is 
effected  by  changing  the  form  of  the  cavity 
of  the  mouth  and  nose  by  the  action  of  the 
muscles  which  move  the  walls  of  those  parts. 

"  The  pure  vowel  sounds  E  (in  he),  A  (in  hay), 


52  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

A  (in  ah  ),  O  (in  o/t),  OO  (in  cool),  may  be 
all  formed  out  of  one  note,  produced  by  a 
continuous  expiration,  the  mouth  being  kept 
open,  but  the  form  of  its  aperture  being 
changed  for  each  vowel.  It  will  be  narrowest, 
with  the  lips  most  drawn  back,  in  E,  widest  in 
A,  and  roundest,  with  the  lips  most  protruded, 
in  OO. 

"  Certain  consonants  also  may  be  pronounced 
without  interrupting  the  current  of  the  expired 
air,  by  modification  of  the  form  of  the  throat 
and  mouth. 

"  Thus  the  aspirate,  H,  is  the  result  of  a  little 
extra  expiratory  force,  a  sort  of  incipient  cough. 

"  S  and  Z,  Sh  and  J  (as  injt4gutar=G  soft  as  in 
gentry),  Th,  L,  R,  F,  V,  may  likewise  all  be 
produced  by  continuous  currents  of  air  forced 
through  the  mouth,  the  shape  of  the  cavity  of 
which  is  peculiarly  modified  by  the  tongue 
and  lips. 

"  All  the  vocal  sounds  hitherto  noted  so  far 
resemble  one  another,  that  their  production 
does  not  involve  the  stoppage  of  the  current  of 
air  which  traverses  either  of  the  modulating 
passages. 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  53 

"  But  the  sounds  of  M  and  N  can  only  be 
formed  by  blocking  the  current  of  air  which 
passes  through  the  mouth,  while  free  passage 
is  left  through  the  nose.  For  M  the  mouth  is 
shut  by  the  lips ;  for  N,  by  application  of  the 
tongue  to  the  palate. 

"Explosive-consonants.  The  other  consonantal 
sounds  of  the  English  language  are  produced 
by  shutting  the  passage  through  both  nose  and 
mouth  ;  and,  as  it  were,  forcing  the  expiratory 
vocal  current  through  the  obstacle  furnished  by 
the  latter,  the  character  of  which  obstacle  gives 
each  consonant  its  peculiarity.  Thus  in  produc- 
ing the  consonants  B  and  P,  the  mouth  is  shut  by 
the  lips,  which  are  then  forced  open  in  this  explo- 
sive manner.  In  T  and  D,  the  mouth  passage  is 
suddenly  barred  by  the  application  of  the  point 
of  the  tongue  to  the  teeth  or  to  the  front  part  of 
the  palate  ;  while  in  K  and  G  (hard  as  \r\go]  the 
middle  and  back  of  the  tongue  are  similarly 
forced  against  the  palate." 

In  order  to  have  a  clear  idea  of  these  words 
and  of  what  we  are  going  to  say,  the  reader 
will  find  it  very  useful  to  pronounce  each  sound 
of  the  alphabet,  and  pay  attention  to  the  posi- 
tion that  his  lips  and  tongue  assume. 


54  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

It  appears  from  this  description,  that  we  can 
in  the  first  place  divide  all  consonants  into  two 
classes : 

1.  Those  in  the  pronunciation  of  which  the 
current  of  air  is  continuous ;  H,  S,  Z,  Sh,  J,  G 
soft,  Th,  L,  R,  F,  V.     These  are  called  continu- 
ous consonants. 

2.  Those    in    the    pronunciation     of    which 
the  current   of  air  is  stopped,  either   through 
the  mouth  (M,  N,)  or  through  both  mouth  and 
nose  (B,  P,  T,  D,  K,  C  hard).     These  are  called 
momentaneous  or  explosive  consonants. 

Now  we  must  make  another  classification, 
more  important  still,  according  to  the  organs, 
(lips,  teeth,  and  back  palate  or  throat  as  the 
case  may  be),  which  play  the  principal  part  in 
their  utterance.  This  classification  is  as 
follows : 

Labial,  P,  B,  M,  F,  V,  (F,  V,  properly  labio- 
dental). 

Dental,  T,  D,  Th,  N,  L,  R,  S,  Z. 

Guttural,  K,  G,  (hard). 

Palatal,  Ch,  J. 

Besides,  we  have  a  classification,  not  entirely 
justifiable,  but  very  common,  of  soft  and  hard 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  55 

:onsonants.  P,  T,  C,  (as  in  cost)  are  called 
ird,  and  B,  D,  G,  (as  in  go)  are  called  soft, 
>ecause  with  the  former  the  current  of  air  is 
:hecked  with  some  greater  strength.  H,  Ph 
7),  Th  are  called  aspirates. 

As  to  the  distinction  between  vowels  and 
consonants,  that  given  by  Professor  Whitney 
(Oriental  and  Linguistic  Studies,  1 1  Series,  p. 
281)  seems  to  me  the  most  satisfactory. 

"  The  organs  of  the  lungs  and  throat  furnish 
ic  column  of  air,  the  breath  or  tone ;  the 
>rgans  of  the  mouth  modify  this  breath  or  tone 
ind  give  it  various  individuality. 

Those  sounds,  in  which  the  material,  the 
element  of  tone,  predominates,  are  vowels ; 
lose  in  which  the  other  element,  the  oral  mod- 
ication,  predominates,  are  consonants ;  but 
lere  is  no  absolute  line  of  division  between 
:he  two  great  classes ;  each  has  its  degrees 
whereby  it  approaches  the  other  ;  there  is  a 
continuous  line  of  progression  from  the  open- 
est  and  purest  vowel  to  the  closest  and  most 
absolute  consonant,  and  a  border  territory 
between,  where  the  sounds  are  of  doubtful  or 
double  character." 


56  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

Conformably  to  this  principle,  we  have  sounds 
which  are  classified  as  semi-vowels,  (L  and  R). 

The  classification  of  the  consonants,  which 
we  have  just  given,  is  very  imperfect.  This 
study  of  sounds  in  human  speech  is  one  of  the 
most  delicate  branches  of  science,  no  less  inter- 
esting to  the  anatomist,  the  physiologist,  and 
the  ethnologist,  than  to  the  philologist.  Hence 
the  distinctions  in  sounds  are  carried  to  a 
degree  of  subtlety  which  seems  impossible  to 
one  who  is  not  familiar  with  phonetic  studies. 
And  it  is  very  interesting  to  investigate  the 
nature  of  all  the  shades  of  sounds  which  are  to 
be  heard  in  all  human  languages.  But  this 
would  far  exceed  the  limits,  and  alter  entirely 
the  nature,  of  this  work.  We  must  confine 
ourselves  to  the  simplest  and  most  elementary 
notions,  happy  if  some  reader  will  hereafter 
feel  inclined  to  look  more  closely  into  the  sub- 
ject. His  praiseworthy  curiosity  will  be  satis- 
fied, then,  by  special  works,  of  which  there  is 
no  dearth. 

I'rom  a  glance  at  the  classification  given 
above,  we  may  infer  that  a  close  connection 
exists  between  all  these  sounds  :  a  slight  altera- 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  57 

tion  in  the  position  of  the  lips,  or  tongue,  or 
teeth,  produces  quite  a  different  sound.  Thus, 
if  we  apply  the  tip  of  our  tongue  to  the  front 
of  the  palate,  we  utter  the  sound  d ;  if  we  fold 
our  tongue  a  little  more  backward,  we  have  the 
sound  r.  A  little  more  backward  still,  and  we 
have  the  sound  /.  If  we  check  with  our 
lips  the  current  of  air,  we  have  the  sound  b; 
if  we  do  the  same  thing  with  a  little  more 
strength,  we  have  the  sound/.  We  can  thus 
understand  how  easy  it  is  to  pass  from  one 
sound  to  another.  It  is  this  physiological 
affinity  of  sounds  that  makes  the  changes 
which  we  see  in  words  possible.  That  such 
changes  are  not  only  possible  but  actual,  every 
language  bears  witness.  To  see  how  such 
changes  happen,  to  discover  what  principles,  if 
any,  govern  such  changes,  is  one  of  the  main 
objects  of  the  science  of  language. 

No  two  persons  pronounce  in  the  same  man- 
ner. As  there  are  not  two  faces  alike,  so  no 
word  is  pronounced  exactly,  mathematically,  in 
the  same  way  by  two  different  men.  Of  course 
we  do  not  notice  such  differences  unless  they 
are  strongly  marked.  The  pronunciation  of 


58  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

children,  for  instance,  is  quite  peculiar,  because 
their  organs  of  speech  are  not  educated ;  we 
hear  children  saying  tiss  for  kiss,  tat  for  cat,  fink 
[or  think,  thor  tor  for.  Such  differences  are 
more  marked  and  noticeable  with  people  of 
different  nations.  So  a  Frenchman  does  not 
say  the  but  ze ;  his  organs  can  not  be  taught  to 
pronounce  th,  just  as  the  hardened  muscles  of 
the  fingers  of  an  old  man  can  not,  certainly  not 
without  great  difficulty,  be  taught  to  play 
rapidly  on  the  piano.  A  German  says  vat  for 
what,  chutche  for  judge ;  a  negro  derc  for  there. 
It  is  true  that  a  French  child,  brought  up 
among  English-speaking  people,  would  learn 
English  just  as  well  as  the  children  born  of 
English  parents,  and  English  would  be  just  as 
natural  to  him  as  French  was  to  his  father. 
But  it  is  true,  also,  that  if  he  is  brought  up 
among  French-speaking  people,  his  vocal 
organs  will  be  educated  so  as  to  pronounce 
French  sounds,  and,  when  he  is  fully  grown  up, 
they  will  be  unable  to  pronounce  easily  and 
correctly  many  sounds  which  are  foreign  to 
the  French  language. 

And  as  an  individual  can  learn  a  foreign  Ian- 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  59 


i 


guage,  so  a  family,  a  community,  an  entire 
people  may  learn  and  adopt  a  language  entirely 
different  from  that  of  their  forefathers.  But  it 
is  natural  that  in  the  process  of  adoption  the 
language  adopted  should  undergo  many 
changes,  so  as  to  adapt  itself  to  differently 
educated  vocal  organs.  This  is  not  merely  an 
hypothesis,  but  has  really  happened,  and  is 
happening  even  to-day.  Of  course,  such 
changes  do  not  take  place  in  one  day  ;  they 
are  brought  about  slowly,  steadily,  by  causes 
which  work,  not  only  on  individuals,  but  on 
generations.  And,  what  is  most  important, 
the  changes  are  not  disorderly  and  chaotic,  as 
might  be  expected,  but  they  obey  certain  laws, 
which  it  is  the  work  of  the  linguist  to  investi- 
gate. 

We  know  that  French,  Italian  and  Spanish 
are  languages  connected  by  ties  of  brotherhood, 
and  that  they  all  spring  from  Latin.  In  other 
words,  where  now  French,  Italian  and  Spanish 
are  spoken,  once  Latin  was  spoken.  To  the 
same  family  belong  Provencal,  Walachian, 
Portuguese  and  Rumansch. 

Now,  if  we  look  at  French,  Italian  and  Span- 


60  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

ish  words,  it  seems  impossible  that  any  law 
should  govern  their  changes  from  Latin.  Still 
all  these  changes,  however  confusing  at  first 
sight,  were  wrought  in  obedience  to  certain 
laws  which  comparative  philology  has  dis- 
covered. 

For  instance,  in  the  evolution  of  words  from 
Latin  into  French,  we  find  three  general  princi- 
ples: 1st.  The  accent  is  preserved  on  the 
same  syllable  as  in  Latin  :  although  the  last 
part  of  the  word  is  suppressed  either  in  pro- 
nunciation, or  both  in  pronunciation  and  spell- 
ing. 2nd.  The  short  vowel  between  two  con- 
sonants is  very  often  suppressed  ;  for  instance 
bonitatcin  gives  bontd,  English  bounty;  count  cm, 
French  comte,  English  count ;  feritatcui,  French 
ficrtt!.  3rd.  The  consonant  (whether  dental  or 
guttural  or  labial)  between  two  vowels  is  very 
often  suppressed.  This  is  a  very  important 
principle,  and  striking  changes  are  effected  by 
it.  We  have  referred  already  to  maistrc  and 
maitrc  from  magister.  "Securus"  gives  sur  ; 
crude/is  gives  cruel ;  pacare,  which  means  to 
calm,  to  satisfy,  gives  payer,  to  pay  ;  regent 
gives  roi,  king;  Icgem  gives  loi,  law;  maturus 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  61 

gives  mur,  ripe ;  imperator  gives  empereur, 
emperor ;  frigidus  gives  froid,  cold  ;  iocus, 
gives  jeu,  play  ;  focus  gives  feu,  fire ;  paucuni 
gives  peu,  few. 

The  Italian  language  does  not  truncate  the 
Latin  words  at  the  end  so  much  as  the  French 
does  ;  besides  Italian  preserves  with  more  faith- 
fulness the  consonant  between  two  vowels. 
Spanish  preserves  the  ending  of  words  better 
than  French,  sometimes  better  even  than  Ital- 
ian ;  as  for  the  consonant  between  two  vowels, 
it  does  not  suppress  it  but  changes  it ;  c  be- 
comes £•/  p  becomes  b,  and  then  sometimes  v, 
/  becomes  d,  ^disappears.  So  that  in  the  main, 
Spanish  holds  a  position  intermediate  between 
Italian  and  French,  in  respect  to  the  changes 
made  in  Latin  words.  For  instance,  Latin  scn- 
titus,  felt,  Italian  sentita,  Spanish  sentido,  French 
wnti  ;  Latin  focus,  fire,  Italian  fuoco,  Spanish 
fuego,  French  feu ;  Latin  salutare,  to  salute, 
Italian  salutare,  Spanish  saludar,  French  saluer  ; 
Latin  amicus,  friend,  Italian  amico,  Spanish 
amigo,  French  ami ;  inimicus,  enemy,  Italian 
inimico  (or  ncmico),  Spanish  inimigo,  French 
cnneini  ;  securus,  sure,  Italian  sicuro,  Spanish  se- 


62  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

gnro,  French  sur ;  lupus,  wolf,  Italian  lupo, 
Spanish  lobo  (pronounced  lovo],  French  loup, 
in  which  the/  is  no  longer  sounded. 

Of  course,  from  these  principles  there  are 
many  divergences,  which,  however,  can,  for  the 
most  part,  be  classified  and  accounted  for ;  for 
instance,  in  many  cases  the  dental  (t  or  d] 
between  two  vowels  disappears  in  Italian  also, 
thus  removing  Italian  further  from  the  Latin 
than  Spanish  itself.  All  the  abstracts  in  -at em, 
-utem,  in  Spanish  end  in  -ad,  -ud,  thus  preserv- 
ing the  /  changed  into  d,  while  in  Italian  no 
trace  is  left  of  the  dental,  these  words  ending  in 
d,  u ;  so  from  Latin  veritatcm,  truth ;  boni- 
tatcin,  bounty ;  virtutcm,  virtue,  we  have  in 
Italian  vcritd,  bontd,  virtii ;  in  French  vfrite' 
bontd,  vcrtu  ;  in  Spanish  verdad,  bout  ad,  virtud. 

It  is  interesting  to  trace  comparatively,  in 
Italian,  French  and  Spanish  the  changes  un- 
dergone by  certain  Latin  consonantal  groups. 
Take  for  instance  the  group  ct,  which  is  very 
frequent  in  Latin.  In  Italian  the  c  has  been 
assimilated  to  the  /,  so  that  ct  becomes  //. 
Thus  factum,  fact,  becomes  fatto ;  noctcm, 
night,  jiottc  ;  lactc,  milk,  lattc ;  octo,  eight,  otto. 


:; 

m 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  63 

In  French  ct  becomes// and  then  it ;  faitt  nuit, 
it,  huit.  In  Spanish  ct  becomes  ch;  noche, 
night,  ocho,  eight.  Besides,  through  a  phenom- 
enon which  can  be  satisfactorily  explained,  the 
a  before  such  ch  is  changed  into  e ;  leche,  milk, 
instead  vilache.  As  tot  factum,  it  should  then 
-  become  fec/w.  But  here  we  must  notice  another 
law  which  prevails  in  Spanish  phonology  :  a 
Latin  f  at  the  beginning  of  a  word  has  gener- 
ally become  h  in  Spanish  ;  faccre,  to  do,  Span- 
ish haccr  ;  fatum,  fate,  hado ;  farina,  flour, 
harina  ;  ferire,  to  strike,  herir ;  filius,  son,  hijo  ; 
filuui,  thread,  hilo,  etc.  So  that  we  must  expect 
iromfactum  not  fee  ho,  but  hecho;  and  such  is 
really  the  Spanish  word  for  Latin  factum,  done. 
Summing  up,  then,  fait,  fatto  and  hecho  are 
exactly  one  and  the  same  Latin  word,  re- 
flected, as  it  were,  in  the  mirror  of  three  differ- 
ent languages.  This  example  adds  strength 
to  the  warning  not  to  trust  sounds  in  etymolo- 
gies, but  to  follow  rigorously  the  phonetic  laws 
which  prevail  in  the  language  to  which  the 
words  in  question  belong. 

The  Latin  group  //    is  changed  into  pi  in 
Italian,  into  //  in  Spanish  ;    it   is  preserved   in 


64  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

French.  Latin  plaga,  blow,  wound  ;  French 
plaie,  Italian  piaga,  Spanish  llaga.  Latin 
planum,  plain ;  French  plan,  Italian  piano, 
Spanish  llano.  Latin  plenum,  full  ;  French 
plein,  Italian  pieno,  Spanish  lleno.  Exactly 
the  same  thing  happens  for  the  group  fl.  Lat- 
in famma,  flame ;  French  flamme,  Italian 
fiamma,  Spanish  llama.  Sufflare,  to  blow  ; 
French  souffler,  Italian  soffiare,  Spanish  sollar. 
The  group  cl  is  preserved  in  French,  becomes 
chi  in  Italian,  //  in  Spanish :  clavis,  key  ; 
French  clef,  Italian  chiave,  Spanish  Have ;  da- 
mar  e,  to  call ;  French,  darner  (re'clamer),  Italian 
chiamare,  Spanish  llamar. 

Al  followed  by  a  consonant  is  preserved  in 
Italian  ;  in  French  it  becomes  au,.  as  we  have 
seen,  and  in  Spanish  o.  The  evolution  is  the 
same  in  French  and  Spanish,  only  the  spelling 
is  different.  Latin  alter,  other;  Italian  a/fro, 
French  autrc,  Spanish  otro.  Latin  alba, 
dawn  ;  Italian  alba,  French  aube,  Spanish  oba. 
Such  symmetrical  evolutions  of  sounds,  how- 
ever important?  and  striking,  are  not  the  only 
points  on  which  the  philologist  rests  in  assert- 
ing that  French,  Italian  and  Spanish  are  Ian- 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  65 


S 

I 


guages  derived  from  one  and  the  same  source, 
f  we  proceed  to  investigate  their  grammar, 
their  kinship  stands  forth  even  with  greater 
evidence.  They  have  exactly  the  same  way  of 
conjugating  their  verbs,  of  using  their  adjec- 
tives, their  pronouns,  their  prepositions.  Not 
only  their  vocabulary,  but  their  grammar,  which 
is  the  real  skeleton  of  a  language,  is  essentially 
the  same.  The  same  holds  good  for  the  other 
Neo-Latin  languages — Portuguese,  Walachian, 
Proven£al  and  Rumansch. 

The  Latin  language  now  is  dead  :  it  sur- 
vives itself,  so  to  speak,  in  the  monu- 
ments of  Roman  literature,  and  in  the 
rites  of  the  Catholic  church.  But  suppose  even 
such  remains  had  disappeared  ;  suppose  that 
through  some  great  calamity,  not  even  a 
fragment  of  a  Latin  book,  not  even  an  inscrip- 
tion, had  been  left  to  us  ;  even  then  the  phi- 
lologist, holding  the  so-called  Neo-Latin  lan- 
guages under  his  linguistic  microscope,  dissect- 
ing their  grammar  and  their  vocabulary,  would 
be  able  to  assert,  with  no  less  convincing  evi- 
dence, that  these  languages  must  have  sprung 
from  one  language,  the  existence  of  which  we 


66  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

can  not  doubt.  And  as  the  paleontologist,  with 
a  fragment  of  a  fossil  bone,  can  reconstruct  the 
skeleton  of  the  animal  to  which  it  belonged 
thousands  of  years  ago,  in  the  same  way  the 
philologist  could  not  only  give  convincing 
proofs  of  the  existence  of  a  common  mother- 
language  for  French  and  Italian  and  Spanish, 
but  would  also  reconstruct  in  their  most  essen- 
tial characters,  both  the  grammar  and  vocabu- 
lary of  the  said  mother-language. 

Such  a  reconstruction  is  in  this  case  useless, 
since  we  have  preserved  in  glorious  monuments 
almost  the  whole  body  of  the  Latin  language. 

But  there  is  another  family  of  languages, 
in  which  the  case  we  have  supposed  for 
Latin  has  actually  occurred.  This  family  is 
known  under  the  name  of  Indo-European  or 
Aryan  family.  The  primitive  Indo-European 
language  has  disappeared.  Still  the  philologist 
can  show,  with  no  less  evidence  than  for  the 
Neo-Latin  languages,  that  the  Indo-European 
languages  belong  to  the  same  family,  that  there 
must  have  been  once  a  language  from  which 
they  all  sprung,  and  he  can,  tip  to  a  certain 
point,  rebuild  the  grammatical  organism  of  that 
language,  and  a  part  of  its  vocabulary. 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 


67 


This  family  comprehends  the   languages  of 

ie  peoples  who  are  now  at  the  head  of  civiliza- 

lon ;    languages  which  are  spoken  in  a  great 

irt  of  Asia,  and  all  over  Europe  and  America. 

It  is  divided  into  seven  great  branches — 

(  Vedic  Sanskrit, 
I.  Indie,  •<  Modern  Sanskrit, 

(  Pali  and  Prakrit  (spoken  in  India). 

(  Zend, 

II.  Iranic,  •<  Cuneiform  Inscriptions, 

/  Persian. 


III.  Celtic, 


IV.   Italic, 


V.  Hellenic, 


VI.  Letto-Slavic, 


(  Cymric, 
(  Gaelic. 


"Italian, 

French, 

Oscan, 
Latin  — 
Umbrian. 

j  Neo-Latin 
(  Languages.  " 

Spanish, 
Portuguese, 
Provenfal, 
Walachian, 

Rumansch. 

Greek  (four  dialects). 
Modern  Greek. 

VII.  Teutonic, 


Old  Prussian, 
Ecclesiastical  Slavonic, 
Russian  Language. 

(  Old  High  German, 
High  German,  s  Middle  High  German, 
(  Modern  High  German. 


f  Gothic, 
j  Anglo-Saxon 

Low  German,  \  Old  Dutch, 
I  Old  Frisian, 
I  Old  Saxon. 


Scandinavian. 

Indie  and  Iranic  constitute  the  Asiatic  divis- 


68  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

ion,  the  other  five  groups  constitute  the  Euro- 
pean division  of  the  Indo-European  languages. 

From  the  table  it  appears  that  English  is  a 
Teutonic  language,  belonging  to  the  Low- 
German  group. 

If  we  analyze  all  these  languages  in  their 
grammar  and  their  vocabulary,  their  kinship  is 
not  less  evident  than  the  brotherhood  of  French, 
Spanish  and  Italian.  Moreover,  although  the 
language  from  which  they  spring  is  dead,  we  can 
show  that  not  only  these  languages,  but  the 
peoples  who  speak  these  languages,  belong  to 
the  same  family.  They  all  come  from  one 
common  stock,  which  once  lived  in  the  high 
plains  of  Central  Asia  ;  thence  they  separated, 
and  as  a  magnificent  tree  that  splits  itself  into 
two  trunks,  each  one  of  which  puts  forth 
branches  and  twigs  and  boughs  in  every  direc- 
tion, from  that  common  stock  a  branch  went 
forth  eastward,  others  found  their  way  west- 
ward, and  one  after  the  other  went  so  far  that 
all  the  western  part  of  the  world,  Europe,  and 
America  itself,  has  been  covered  by  them. 

This  identity  of  race  of  the  peoples  speaking 
one  of  the  Indo-European  languages  rests  on 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  69 


more  arguments  than  those  which  comparative 
philology  can  give  ;  and  needs  further  illustra- 
tion. Suffice  it,  for  the  present,  to  know  that 
the  Indo-European  languages  constitute  one 
family,  and  are  derived  from  one  common 
mother ;  and  that  the  proofs  of  this  assertion 
rest  on  the  comparison  of  their  vocabularies, 
especially  of  the  most  familiar  and  indispensa- 
ble words  ;  but,  above  all,  on  the  comparison 
of  their  grammar.  They  have  essentially  a 
common  grammar,  and  entirely  distinct  from 
that  of  all  other  languages. 

In  making  such  comparisons  the  philologists 
discovered  that  here  too  every  change  of  sound 
obeys  some  definite  law,  and  that  each  language 
reflects  certain  sounds,  whether  vowels  or  con- 
sonants, according  to  laws  peculiar  to  itself, 
but  in  strict  connection  with  the  laws  ruling 
the  cognate  languages.  One  of  the  most  im- 
portant of  these  laws  is  that  which  rules  the 
changes  of  the  consonants  from  one  Indo-Euro- 
pean language  to  another.  This  law  is  known 
by  the  name  of  its  discoverer,  as  Grimm  s  law. 
Grimm  made  the  important  discovery  that  if 
we  put  Sanskrit,  Greek  and  Latin  on  one  side, 


70  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

Low  German  (from  which  Gothic  and  Anglo- 
Saxon  and  English)  in  the  middle,  and  Old 
High  German  on  the  other  side,  we  see  that  an 
aspirate  of  the  first  group  is  represented  by  a 
soft  in  the  middle  group,  and  by  a  hard  in  the 
other  group  ;  a  soft  in  the  first  group  is  repre- 
sented by  a  hard  in  the  middle,  by  an  aspirate 
in  the  other ;  a  hard  in  the  first  group  is  repre- 
sented by  ^n  aspirate  in  the  middle,  by  a  soft  in 
the  last  group.  We  have  a  rotation  of  conson- 
ants. The  simplest  form  into  which  Grimm's 
law  can  be  put  is  the  following  table  (J.  Peile, 
Introd.  to  Greek  and  Lat.  Etymol.),  in  which 
A  stands  for  aspirate,  S  for  soft,  H  for  hard. 
The  word  ASH  may  serve  as  a  mcmoria  tccJi- 
nica  for  the  whole  : — 

Sanskrit,          Low  German,  Gothic,       Old  High 
Greek,  Latin.      Anglo-Saxon,  English.       German. 
ASH 
S  H  A 

HAS 

Thus,  if  we  have  an  h  in  Latin,  we  must 
expect  to  have  ^ g  in  English,  a  k  in  Old  High 
German  :  Latin  haiiscr,  English  goose,  Old  High 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  71 


German  kans  (Modern  High  German  gans). 
The  following  are  a  few  examples  of  Grimm's 
law  : — 

Greek  chortos,  Latin  hortus,  Old  High  German 
karto,  English  garden  (connected  with  gird). 

Sanskrit  bhu,  Greek  phuo,  L&tmfu-i(fu4vre), 
English  be,  Old  High  German //w  (I  am). 

Sanskrit  bhrdtar,  Grzokphratria,  Latin/rater, 
Gothic  brdthar  (English  brother],  Old  High 
German  pruodar. 

Sanskrit  dasan,  Greek  deka,  Latin  decem, 
Gothic  taihun  (English  ten),  Old  High  German 
zehan. 

Sanskrit  dva,  Greek  and  Latin  duo,  Gothic 
twai  (English  two),  German  zwei. 

Sanskrit  trl,  Greek  trtfs,  Latin  tres,  Gothic 
threis  (English  three],  Old  High  German 
dri. 

Sanskrit  pat,  to  fly,  Greek  pet-omai,  Latin 
pet-o,  pen-na  (from  pet-no),  Old  High  German 
fedara  (a  wing),  English  feather. 

Sanskrit  tan  (to  stretch),  Greek  tein-o,  Latin 
ten-d-o,ten-u-is,  English  thin,  Old  High  German 
dunai. 

Sanskrit  par,    to    bring   over,    to     go    over, 


72  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

Greek  peir-ao,  Gothic  faran,  (English  fare) 
German  erfahrcn. 

Sanskrit  pri,  to  please,  Greek/r«//^,  English 
friend. 

For  German  and  English  in  particular,  we 
may  add  the  following  instances  : 

I.  II.  III. 

Drei,  three  ;         Zehn,  ten  ;      Tag,  day  ; 

Du,  thou  ;  Zahn,  tooth;  Trommel,  drum  ; 

Denn,  then  ;        Zinn,  tin  ;        Traum,  dream  ; 

Durch,  through;  Zerren,  tear ;  Taube,  dove. 

Denken,  think;  Zange,  tong  ; 

Danken,  thank  ; 

Durst,  thirst ; 

We  could  go  further,  and  add  many 
other  evidences  of  the  reality  of  Grimm's 
law.  But  I  think  the  instances  produced  are 
enough  to  convince  even  the  most  skeptical 
readers.  One  observation,  however,  is  of  the 
greatest  importance  about  the  meaning  of  this 
law.  Ours  would  be  a  serious  mistake  if  we 
should  so  understand  Grimm's  law  as  to  believe, 
for  instance,  that  a  soft  Greek-Latin  becomes  a 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  73 


hard  consonant  in  Low  German  ;  that  is  to  say, 
the  d  of  Greek-Latin  duo  becomes  /  in  Gothic 
twai ;  and  the  Greek  and  Latin  t  of  treis  and  tres 
becomes  th  in  Gothic  threis.  The  consequence 
of  this  would  be  that  Gothic  has  taken  its 
words  from  Latin  or  Greek.  -But  it  is  nothing 
of  the  kind.  The  Gothic  twai  and  threis  are 
not  derived  from  Latin  and  Greek  duo,  tres,  (or 
treis)  any  more  than  the  Spanish  amigo  and  the 
Frence  ami  are  derived  from  the  Italian  amico. 
As  amico,  amigo  and  ami  are  all  three  independ- 
_ent  reflections,  according  to  specific  laws,  of 
the  Latin  amicus,  so  the  Low  German  and  the 
Old  High  German  and  Greek  and  Latin  words 
are  independent  reproductions  of  the  words  of 
that  primitive  Indo-European  speech  from 
which  all  of  them  are  derived.  For  this  reason, 
in  expounding  Grimm's  law,  I  do  not  say 
that  a  Greek  and  Latin  aspirate  becomes 
soft  in  Low  German,  and  hard  in  Old  High 
German,  but  that  it  is  represented  by  a  soft 
in  Latin,  by  a  hard  in  Old  High  German,  and 
so  on. 

Now  that  we  have  seen  how  words  grow  into 
ther  words,  and  changes  are  wrought  in  their 


74  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

constitution  in  obedience  to  certain  laws,  the 
important  question  arises,  at  which  we  have 
hinted  already  :  "  zvhy  do  such  changes  arise  ?" 
If  Latin  was  the  language  once  spoken  in 
France,  Italy  and  Spain,  why  do  they  say  ami 
in  French,  amigo  in  Spanish,  amico  in  Italian  ? 
Why  did  they  not  preserve  the  Latin  word 
amicusJ  or,  if  a  change  had  to-^come,  why  was 
not  the  result  the  same  with  the  three  peoples? 
And  in  the  Indo-European  field  at  large,  if  the 
ancestors  of  these  peoples  spoke  at  one  time  one 
and  the  same  language,  'why  was  not  that  lan- 
guage preserved  ?  and  if  it  had  to  change,  why 
did  it  not  change  in  the  same  way  with  all 
their  descendants  ?  Why  should  we  have  pitar 
in  Sanskrit,  pater  in  Latin,  paftr  in  Greek, 
father  in  English  ? 

These  questions,  which  are  to  the  point,  con- 
tain two  parts  ;  1st.  Why  changes  in  languages 
happen?  2nd.  Why  such  changes  arc  different 
and  bring  about  different  results  with  different 
peoples  ? 

Let  us  begin  by  the  first  question.  To  ask 
why  languages  change  is,  in  other  words,  to 
ask  "why  languages  live  and  die?"  and  by 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 


75 


erely  putting  the  question,  we  recognize  that 
nguages    have    life,  and    decay,    and    death. 
Nor    are     we   wrong.     Languages   are     truly 
living    organisms.     The  comparison  is  old,  of 
words  with  leaves,  which    fade   when  autumn 
pproaches  and  fall  to  the  ground,  to   make 
lace  for  other  leaves  that  will  bud  forth  when 
pring   arrives.     So  that    the    question    "  why 
nguages  change  ?  "  implies  first  of  all  a  great 
etaphysical   problem  :     it  is    the   same   as  to 
k    why  trees    die,  why  every   thing    in    this 
orld  that     is  born   is  subject   to  decay  and 
eath.    We  can  point  out  how  such  decay  hap- 
ns,  but  we  can  not  give  an  ultimate  cause  for 
.     We   should  first  be   able  to    unravel    the 
ystery  pf  our  own  existence,  of  all  existence, 
nd  to  answer  satisfactorily  the  query  :  "  What 
is  life  ?  "  The  stately  oaks   under  whose   shade 
Virgil  used  to  meditate   his    charming   poems, 
are   dead ;    so    is   the    language    in   which   his 
beautiful  imaginings    are    clad.     Wherefore  ? 
Who  can  tell  ? 

But  if  this  last  wherefore  escapes  our  knowl- 
edge, we  can  at  least  point  out  some  of  the 
forces  which  bring  out  from  one  language  other 


76  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

languages.  And  this,  of  course,  overlaps  the 
other  part  of  the  question,  why  one  word  can 
originate  many  different  words  in  different 
languages. 

Before  all  we  have  what  is  called  phonetic 
decay,  that  is,  words  lose  by  and  by  some  of  their 
elements  ;  especially  their  endings  are  subject 
to  continuous  wear,  as,  for  instance,  from 
Latin  virtutem,  we  come  to  the  Italian  virtutc, 
then  virtude,  then  virtue,  then  virtii.  But  this 
phonetic  decay,  remember,  is  not  a  reason  of 
the  change  of  languages  ;  it  is  simply  the  state- 
ment of  a  fact.  We  say  that  words  are  consumed 
by  phonetic  decay,  as  stones  are  consumed 
by  wear  and  tear,  by  being  rolled  and  rubbed 
together  by  the  unceasing  stream.  Still,  the 
question  remains :  why  such  phonetic  decay 
brings  about  such  different  results  with  different 
peoples  ? 

Once  they  used  to  explain  the  change  of 
one  word  into  another  as  an  effect  of  the  love 
of  euphony.  Euphony  is  a  very  elastic  word. 
What  is  euphonic  for  one  people,  is  not  for 
others. 

Greek  bears  the  reputation  of  being  one   of 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  77 


the  most  euphonic  languages  in  the  world. 
Still,  I  remember  one  evening  I  heard  a  Greek 
declaim  before  an  audience,  who  knew  no 
Greek,  a  scene  from  Sophocles,  the  most  grace- 
ful of  the  Attic  writers,  and  the  audience,  so 
far  from  finding  it  euphonious,  could  hardly 
frain  from  laughing  when  they  heard  "  id,  moi 
oi,  e  e,  ioio  papai,  ton  agathbn,  chrusbn"  etc. 
Eupliony  can  not  explain,  satisfactorily,  any 
f  the  phonetic  laws  that  govern  the  transfor- 
ation  of  languages.  Another  explanation 
rst  given  by  Max  Muller  is  almost  univer- 
lly  accepted.  Max  Muller  says  that  every  man 
ries  to  avoid,  as  much  as  he  can,  muscular  exer- 
ion  in  speaking,  not  less  than  in  any  other  of 
is  doings.  Hence  a  tendency  to  simplify 
ords,  to  suppress  their  parts  which  are  of  less 
mportance,  to  suppress  or'modify  those  sounds 
hat  are  harsh  and  therefore  call  out  from  our 
rgans  of  speech  a  great  effort.  Thus,  he  says, 
ziness  is  the  general  principle  that  explains  the 
anges  of  languages.  This  theory  is  scarcely 
uite  satisfactory.  That  a  tendency  to  econo- 
ize  force  and  time  (if  not  real  laziness)  exists 
n  language  as  in  every  human  calling,  no  one 


78  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

will  deny.  But  this  will  not  account  for  a 
great  many  facts  which  still  are  undeniable.  If 
the  French  say  ami,  bontc,  vertu,  sur,  lait,  fait, 
instead  of  amigo,  bontad,  virtud,  seguro,  lec/ic, 
hecJio,  must  we  conclude  that  French  shows 
more  laziness  than  Spanish  ?  When  a  primitive 
p  (compare pater  in  Latin)  is  reflected  in  English 
by/,  {father),  can  we  say  that  this  is  brought 
about  by  laziness  ?  There  are  thousands  of 
instances,  such  as  these,  where  the  theory  of 
laziness  can  not  account  for  the  change. 

How,  then,  do  we  explain  these  changes  ? 
Let  us  look  at  some  facts  that  happen  every 
day  around  us.  Very  often,  we  hear  Frenchmen 
who  try  to  say  the,  but  don't  succeed  ;  they 
simply  say  ze  or  de,  and  it  is  no  matter  of  lazi- 
ness generally ;  the  harder  they  try,  the  worse 
the  result.  Likewise,  it  is  not  the  effect  of  lazi- 
ness, if  a  German,  instead  oijttdgc,  says  chntchc. 
What  do  these  facts  mean?  They  mean,  if  any 
thing,  that  French  and  Germans  have  a  diffi- 
culty in  pronouncing  certain  sounds,  which  to 
Knglish  speaking  people  are  natural  and  easy  ; 
and  they  exert  themselves,  in  their  pronuncia- 
tion, to  adapt  those  sounds  to  the  particular 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  79 

disposition  or  nature  of  their  organs  of  speech. 
There  is,  as  we  have  observed  already,  a  real, 
although  almost  imperceptible  difference,  in 
the  pronunciation  of  any  two  men  who  speak 
the  same  language  even  from  their  childhood. 
Such  differences  grow  more  distinct  if  we  go 
from  one  province  to  another;  very  remarkable 
if  we  go  from  one  people  to  another.  Now 
as  the  Roman  dialect  was  brought  to  bear  upon 
and  really  to  crush  out  of  Spain  and  France 
and  Italy  the  languages  formerly  there  spoken, 
suppose  the  English  language  were  brought 
in  the  same  way  into  some  province  of  France. 
What  would  happen  ?  If  it  had  power  enough 
and  were  upheld  by  favorable  circumstances, 
as  Latin  was,  very  likely  the  English  language 
would  supplant  the  dialect  that  is  spoken  in 
that  province  at  present.  But  what  kind  of 
English  ?  The  people,  in  accepting  the  new 
language,  would  react  upon  it,  would  adapt  its 
sounds  to  the  capabilities  of  their  organs  of 
speech  (capabilities  mainly  resulting  from  edu- 
cation and  hereditary  tendencies)  and  its  phrases 
to  their  particular  genius.  For  instance  th  would 
become  d  or  z ;  many  an  ;/  would  become 


8o  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

strongly  nasal  ;  many  sounds,  especially  of 
vowels,  which  in  English  are  quite  indistinct, 
would  become  broader  and  more  distinct.  In 
fact,  by  and  by,  English  in  that  province 
would  undergo  a  change  not  less  noticeable 
than  that  which  Latin  has  undergone. 

Suppose  the  same  English  language  should, 
in  some  way,  come  to  be  spoken  by  some 
Spanish  province ;  for  instance  in  South 
America.  Analogous  changes  would  be 
wrought  in  the  English  there  spoken,  and  the 
result  would  not  be  a  language  identical  with 
that  brought  about  in  the  French  province,  but 
another,  peculiarly  moulded  according  to  the 
nature  of  the  vocal  organs  and  the  genius  of 
the  Spanish  people. 

Now  suppose  another  case.  A  tribe,  for 
instance,  of  Swedes,  emigrate  and  go  far,  far 
away  to  some  little  island  in  the  other  hemi- 
sphere. Suppose  that  for  centuries  they  are 
cut  off  from  any  communication  with  either 
Europe  or  America.  What  would  happen  ? 
Of  course,  these  people,  especially  if  they  find 
in  the  island  some  other  people  and 
mingle  \vith  them,  will  change  their  way  of 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 


81 


living,  of  eating  and  of  drinking ;  even  their  phy- 
sical features  will  be  strongly  modified.  But 
:ogether  with  these,  no  less  important  changes 
d  take  place  in  their  language.  If  they 
lave  no  writing,  no  press — which  are  the 
greatest  help  to  check  the  continual  mutability 
)f  languages — it  is  obvious  that  after  a  few 
generations,  their  language  will  have  under- 
gone modifications  so  deep  as  to  be  no 
longer  intelligible  to  the  people  they  left  in  the 
>ld  country. 

Now,  in  all  the  cases  considered,  whether  a 
lew  language  is,  so  to  speak,  imported  among  a 
>eople,  or  is  brought  about  by  the  people 
itself,  the  changes  of  the  language  are 
lue  either  to  differences  already  existing, 
>r  to  changes  which  the  people  have  under- 
me.  In  other  words,  we  may  say  that  changes 
in  language  are  due  to  ethnological  adaptation, 
iking  the  term  ethnological  in  its  widest 
meaning  as  referring  not  only  to  differences  of 
race,  but  to  all  the  geographical,  historical  and 
climatic  modifications  which,  in  the  end, 
through  the  action  of  heredity,  bring  about  also 
a  difference  in  the  race. 


82  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

Ethnological  adaptation,  in  my  opinion, 
explains  the  changes  of  languages  better  than  the 
theory  of  laziness.  Of  course,  I  repeat,  I  don't 
mean  to  say  that  laziness,  or  rather  economy  of 
time  and  strength,  has  nothing  to  do  with  the 
changing  of  languages.  It  lias  a  great  deal  to  do 
therewith.  But  I  think  that  this  principle  is  not 
sufficient  to  explain  entirely  such  changes,  and 
that  even  where  the  principle  of  laziness  is 
evidently  in  action,  still  its  working  is  subject 
to  the  other  and  broader  principle  of  ethnologi- 
cal adaptation.  It  happens  with  language  as  it 
happens  with  the  flora  and  fauna  of  a  vast 
country ;  in  each  province  they  undergo 
some  changes  according  to  the  position,  the 
configuration,  and  the  climatic  conditions  of 
that  province.  Again,  it  happens  with  language 
as  it  happens  with  political  institutions,  with 
mythology,  with  religion,  with  music.  The 
same  religion,  with  a  people  naturally  sensual 
and  worldly,  will  fall  very  soon  into  a  mere 
system  of  superstitious  believings  and  a  certain 
routine  of  mechanical  performances;  while 
with  a  people  naturally  austere  and  earnest,  it 
will  long  retain  its  whole  purity  and  sanctity. 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  83 

Mythology,  which  is  brilliant,  gay  and  poetic 
with  one  branch  of  people,  becomes  gloomy, 
fierce  and  stern  with  another  branch  of  the 
same  family. 

Look  at  music,  which  is  so  near  to  language  ; 
how  it  is  altered,  how  it  changes  from  people 
to  people.  The  traveler  who  crosses  the 
Alps  in  Italy  listens  there  to  many  a  song 
which  he  has  heard  before  in  Naples  ;  but  how 
changed  !  In  Naples,  they  were,  if  I  may  say  so, 
like  fireworks  of  notes  and  trills,  gay,  viva- 
cious, sparkling  as  champagne,  brilliant  as  the 
Neapolitan  sky.  In  the  Alps,  among  the  dark 
valleys,  beneath  the  majestic  peaks,  those 
songs  have  become  long,  drawling  canti- 

cSj  whence  the  old  brilliancy  has  disap- 
peared, but  where  there  is  a  deep  solemn  mel- 
ancholy charm,  quite  in  keeping  with  the  sur- 
rounding scenery.  The  same  influences  which 
bear  upon  the  religion,  the  mythology,  the 
social  customs,  the  music  of  a  people,  bear  also 
on  their  language. 

Nowadays  great  changes  in  languages  are 
very  slow  and  one  might  wonder  why  in 
the  past  they  have  been  more  rapid  and 


84  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

of  greater  significance.  We  must  take  into 
consideration  the  great  forces  which  now 
are  working  for  the  preservation  of  language, 
which  of  old  were  not  even  dreamed  of.  To- 
day peoples  are  in  close  communication,  even 
when  their  countries  lie  at  wide  distances  from 
each  other.  It  is  easier  to-day  to  go  from 
America  to  any  part  of  Europe  and  come  back, 
than  it  was,  during  the  middle  ages,  to  go  half 
way  from  Paris  to  Rome.  And  naturally  the 
frequent  intercourse  of  peoples  who  speak  the 
same  language  does  much  for  its  maintenance. 
But  the  most  important  agents  for  the 
preservation  of  language  are  writing  and 
the  press,  aided  by  a  diffusion  of  common 
education.  All  our  tendencies  to  depart  in 
conversation  from  the  standard  language  are 
held  in  check  by  our  writing,  and  by  the  lan- 
guage we  read  every  day  in  papers  and  books. 
The  cow  boy,  who,  left  alone  for  years  and 
years,  would  develop  God  knows  what  kind 
of  dialect,  can  learn  to  spell  and  pronounce  as 
correctly  as  any  child  in  Boston  or  London,  if 
he  has  books  and  a  school  within  his  reach. 
It  is  just  the  same  as  with  music.  Tf  a  son<; 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  85 

is  not  printed,  its  air  will  soon  change  remark- 
ably in  passing  from  country  to  country  ;  but 
once  its  notes  are  printed,  you  may  be  sure  it 
will  be  sung  all  over  the  world  with  more  or 
less  elegance,  but  with  the  same  air. 

The  art  of  printing  has  received  much 
praise,  and  doubtless  deserves  it  well.  But 
few  have  observed  the  great  service  that 
the  press  renders  to  language.  Without  the 
press  the  changes  in  language  would  have 
gone  so  far  that  the  modern  dialects  of 
Europe  would  be,  even  in  the  same  nation, 
more  different  one  from  the  other,  than  French 
is  from  English,  or  German  from  Italian. 
In  other  words,  the  intercourse  of  men 
would  have  become  more  and  more  a 
difficulty;  civilization  would  have  met  in  its 
way  a  great  and  terrible  barrier.  Without  a 
press  very  likely  America  and  England  to-day 
would  not  understand  each  other. 


III. 

THE  ENGLISH  LANGUAGE. 

WE  have  seen  in  the  last  chapter  what  the 
Indo-European  family  of  languages  is. 
Two  of  its  seven  branches  are  the  Germanic,  or 
Teutonic,  and  the  Latin.  The  English  language 
belongs  properly  to  the  Teutonic  branch,  but, 
through  historical  circumstances,  so  much 
Latin  blood,  as  it  were,  has  been  infused  into 
its  body,  that  it  is  impossible  to  study  it  with 
a  view  only  to  its  Teutonic  elements.  It  is 
indispensable  to  take  into  consideration  the 
Latin  branch  also. 

In  the  English  language  we  find  German 
words,  Italian,  French,  Greek,  Spanish,  Latin, 
Portuguese,  Chinese,  Turkish,  Arabic,  and,  in 
fact,  words  from  almost  all  the  most  important 
languages  of  the  world.  But,  while  the  others 
may  be  considered  as  merely  adventitious  ele- 
ments, Anglo-Saxon  and  Latin  constitute  the 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  87 

real  body  of  the  language.  Of  these  two, 
Anglo-Saxon  is  by  far  the  stronger  and  the 
more  important.  The  grammar  (that  little  of 
it  which  has  been  preserved  in  the  English 
language)  is  pure  Anglo-Saxon  ;  of  the  vocabu- 
lary, the  most  familiar  terms,  the  most  import- 
ant, those,  in  short,  without  which  no  language 
can  subsist,  are  Anglo-Saxon.  Still  a  great 
treasure  of  words  has  been  poured  into  the 
English  language  from  Latin.  About  five- 
sevenths  of  the  English  vocabulary,  compre- 
hending almost  all  terms  connected  with  litera- 
ture, art,  science  and  in  general  all  the  intel- 
lectual and  political  life  of  English  speaking 
>eoples,  are  Latin.  Of  these  Latin  words,  some 
have  been  derived  directly  from  Latin,  but  the 
large  majority  through  a  French  channel  by 
means  of  the  Normans.  Sometimes  a  Latin 
word  was,  or  still  is,  used  side  by  side  with  the 
corresponding  Anglo-Saxon  word.  Sometimes 
from  Latin  words  other  words  are  formed  by 
means  of  Anglo-Saxon  suffixes  ;  sometimes  an 
Anglo-Saxon  word  has  been  modified  and  prop- 
agated with  formative  elements  taken  from 
the  Latin  language. 


88  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

-  Y,  -fy,  -ness,  -ful,  -less,  -ship,  -hood,  are  among 
the  most  important  Anglo-Saxon  suffixes  ;  -able, 
-ible,  -ous,  -He,  -ance,  -encc,  -tion,  are  Latin  suf- 
fixes. Honor,  honorable  ^  honorablencss ;  love, 
lovable,  lovcableness ;  use,  useful,  usefulness; 
cJiarity,  charitable,  charitableness ;  plenty,  plen- 
tiful;  sober,  sobriety,  soberness ;  niotion,  motion- 
less ;  direct,  direction,  directly ;  amiable,  amia- 
bility, are  a  few  specimens  of  the  way  in  which 
Anglo-Saxon  and  Latin  are  interwoven  in  the 
English  language. 

J.  R.  Lowell  said  that  we  lay  Latin  bricks 
with  the  strong  mortar  of  the  Anglo-Saxon 
language.  The  simile  is  at  once  witty  and 
true ;  and  the  result  of  such  building  is 
this  marvelous  structure  which  we  call  the 
English  language.  If  we  analyze  the  na- 
ture of  the  bulk  of  English  language,  we 
find  either:  1st,  a  pure  Anglo-Saxon  word, 
both  in  its  root  and  affixes  ;  for  instance,  love-ly, 
love-li-ncss,  trust-worthy^  trust-ful ; — 2d,  or 
an  Anglo-Saxon  word  with  Latin  formative 
elements :  lov-able,  read-able ;  —  3d,  or  a 
Latin  word  with  Latin  formative  elements : 
ami-able,  correspondence ^  confid-ence,  con- 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  89 

sider-able,  etc.  ;  4th,  or  of  Latin  words  with 
Anglo-Saxon  formative  elements,  sauc-y, 
sauc-i-ly,  plenti-ful,  honorable-ness,  etc.  It  must 
also  be  noticed  that  many  times  we  have  a 
Latin  word  side  by  side  with  its  Anglo-Saxon 
correspondent  '.prison  and  jail;  convention  and 
meeting ;  congregation  and  flock ;  pastor  and 
shepherd ;  country  and  land  ;  strength  and  force; 
etc. 

Very  often  we  have  some  formations 
from  an  Anglo-Saxon  root,  and  then  other 
formations  from  the  corresponding  Latin  root 
— corresponding  in  the  meaning,  of  course. 
From  trust,  we  have  trust,  to  trust,  trusty,  trust- 
worthy, trustful,  trustfulness,  untrustful,  un- 
trustfulncss,  trustworthiness^  etc.  Moreover, 
we  have  many  words  formed  from  the  Latin 
root  fid,  which  means  also  to  trust — con- 
fident, confidence,  to  confide,  diffident,  diffi- 
dence, perfidy,  perfidious,  perfidiousness.  The 
same  thing  happens  with  the  verb  pour 
and  the  Latin  root  fud,  which  has  the  same 
meaning:  to  pour,  pouring;  infuse,  infusion; 
effusion,  effusive,  effusiveness,  confusion,  etc. 

This  interweaving  of  Latin  and  Anglo-Saxon 


90  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF   WORDS. 

elements  is  the  most  striking  peculiarity  of  the 
English  language.  It  is  this  which  makes  of 
English  the  greatest,  the  strongest,  the  richest 
language  in  the  world,  at  once  adapted  to  a 
swift,  lucid  expression  of  the  homeliest  concep- 
tions, as  well  as  to  the  clear,  forcible  convey- 
ance of  the  highest  scientific  thought  and  of 
social  and  political  speculations  ;  of  poetic  feel- 
ing as  well  as  of  commercial  and  industrial 
ideas. 

From  this  brief  review  of  the  constitution  of 
the  English  language,  the  great  advantage 
appears  of  a  knowledge,  at  least  elementary, 
of  Anglo-Saxon  and  Latin.  Not  that  he  who 
knows  Anglo-Saxon  and  Latin,  will  be,  simply 
because  of  that,  a  powerful  writer  or  an  elegant 
speaker.  That  depends  on  so  many  mental  and 
moral  qualities  that  to  ascribe  it  to  the  knowl- 
edge of  some  dead  languages  would  be  simply 
ridiculous.  But  he  who  knows  Anglo-Saxon  and 
Latin  may  be  sure  to  have  a  great  advantage 
in  mastering  the  English  language  ;  which  is  no 
little  reward  to  his  fatigue. 

When  then  we  come  to  look  for  the  etymol- 
ogy of  an  English  word,  in  nine  cases  out  of 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  91 

ten  we  must  look  either  to  Anglo-Saxon  or 
,atin.  Some  sounds  point  more  toward  one  lan- 
guage than  toward  the  other — th  for  instance, 
indicates  the  Teutonic  origin  of  the  word — but 
only  a  considerable  amount  of  Anglo-Saxon 
and  Latin  lore  will  lead  us  with  some  certainty 
in  our  researches.  When  we  have  reached  a 
Latin  or  an  Anglo-Saxon  word,  then  we  can 
follow  it  further  back,  even  to  its  Indo-Euro- 
pean root,  which  is  the  furthest  point  we  can 
hope  to  reach. 

As  for  words  derived  from  Latin,  we  must 
take  notice  of  a  very  important  fact.  The 
majority  of  English  words  of  Latin  origin  came 
into  English  through  a  French  channel ; 
therefore  they  have  undergone  those  changes 
which  Latin  words  undergo  when  they  become 
French.  On  the  other  hand  some  Latin  words, 
generally  literary,  ecclesiastical,  or  scientific 
have  been  transplanted  directly  from  Latin 
into  English,  without  any  Gallic  modifica- 
tion. In  looking,  then,  into  the  structure 
of  words  of  Latin  origin  we  must  always  bear 
in  mind  the  phonetic  laws  prevailing  in  the 
French  language,  and  especially  the  fact  that  a 


92  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

Latin  consonant  between  two  vowels,  tends, 
in  French,  to  disappear.  We  have,  for  instance, 
the  words  sure,  and  secure,  with  their  deriva- 
tives surety,  and  security,  to  assure,  to  insure,  etc. 
Both  these  words  are  from  Latin  securus,  but 
sure  came  through  the  French  channel,  where 
the  consonant  between  the  two  vowels  (c)  has 
disappeared,  ivhile  secure  came  directly  from 
Latin,  without  any  French  influence. 

Latin  securus  is  a  compound  word  ;  the  pre- 
fix se  means  out,  apart ;  cura  means  care, 
trouble  ;  hence  secure  or  sure,  "  out  of  trouble." 
This  same  se  we  have,  for  instance,  in  se-lection, 
from  the  root  leg,  and  the  suffix  tion.  Leg 
means  to  pick,  to  gather ;  hence  selection, 
to  select,  to  pick  out.  In  the  same  way 
secession  from  the  verb  ced,  to  go,  and  se,  to  go 
apart.  This  same  verb  ced,  we  have  in  the 
compounds,  to  recede,  to  secede,  to  precede,  to 
go  before  (prce,  before,)  to  succeed,  to  "  go 
under,"  "  in  the  place  of"  another,  to  proceed, 
and  all  the  derivatives  :  recession,  reccdcnt,  pre- 
cedent, precedence,  procession,  intercedcnt,  success, 
etc. 

Let   us  take   the   words   rule  and  regulation. 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  93 

Their  meaning  is  very  akin.  Both  were  from 
the  Latin  root  reg,  to  direct.  From  reg\ve  have 
regula,  and  the  Latin  regulatio.  Regula,  through 
loss  of  the  middle  consonant,  gives  normally 
rule.  In  modern  French  the  form  regie,  with 
the  guttural  (g)  preserved,  came  to  be  only  used, 
but  in  old  French  we  meet  such  forms  as  riule 
and  reule.  Regulation  came  to  English  directly 
and  its  middle  consonant  was  preserved,  because 
it  was  not  submitted,  so  to  speak,  to  the  French 
grinding  mill. 

The  words  "decree"  and  "decretal"  are 
both  to  be  referred  to  a  Latin  decrctum, 
decree.  Decretum  is  composed  from  the  prefix 
de,  the  root  ere,  and  the  suffix  of  the  past, 
turn.  Cre  means  to  sift ;  we  have  it  in  the 
form  cri,  in  the  noun  cri-brum,  sieve  ;  -brunt  is 
very  often  employed  to  denote  an  instrument 
or  a  place  (for  instance  delu-brum,  a  place  of 
purification,  a  sanctuary ;  candela-brum,  a  candle- 
stick). We  have  the  same  root  in  Greek,  kri. 
Both  in  Latin  and  Greek  from  its  primitive  ma- 
terial meaning  of  sifting,  it  came  to  mean,  very 
naturally,  to  select,  to  examine.  From  this 
root,  we  have  the  words  cri-tic,  criticism,  etc. 


94  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

Critic  then  is  properly  "  he  who  sifts,"  he  who 
examines.  This  root,  with  the  prefix  de, 
which  means  out,  about,  means  "  to  sift  out," 
to  pick  out  after  examination.  Hence  decrctnm 
is  that  which  has  been  "  sifted  out,"  the  con- 
clusion which  has  been  reached.  Dccretum, 
with  the  usual  disappearance  of  the  consonant 
between  two  vowels,  has  given  in  Yrcnchdccret 
where  the  /  is  not  pronounced  ;  and  in  English 
decree.  But  other  words,  less  common,  as 
decretal,  decretory,  came  straight  from  Latin, 
with  their  middle  consonant  preserved.  This 
is  very  often  the  case  with  literary  or 
scientific  words,  which  in  the  main  are  taken 
from  Latin  or  Greek  with  a  slight  modification 
of  their  ending,  and  without  undergoing  those 
changes  which  we  find  in  words  that  are 
thoroughly  popular.  When  the  people  accept 
foreign  words,  they  apply  to  them,  as  by 
instinct,  those  phonetic  laws  that  govern  their 
own  language.  In  a  certain  sense  they 
nationalize  them. 

In  the  same  way,  from  Latin,  obccdirc,  which 
properly  meant,  to  "  listen  to,"  we  have 
French  obtir  and  English  "obey,"  in 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  95 

which  the  d,  already  wanting  in  French,  has 
left  no  trace,  and  the  ending  has  been  fashioned 
according  to  the  genius  of  the  English  language, 
or  to  be  more  exact,  in  analogy  with  the  end- 
ing of  many  other  English  verbs.  But  in 
French,  we  have  obe'issance,  obe'issant,  while  the 
Latin  ^/has  been  preserved  in  the  correspond- 
ing English,  obedience,  obedient. 

We  would  not  be  correct,  however,  were  we 
to  assume  that  all  the  English  words  which  pre- 
serve certain  consonants  that  in  the  corre- 
sponding French  words  have  disappeared,  came 
directly  into  English  from  Latin.  Not  a  few 
of  them  came  through  the  French  channel,  but 
at  a  time  when  the  Latin  consonant  was  still 
preserved  in  French.  This  consonant  remained 
afterward  in  English,  while  in  French  it  subse- 
quently disappeared.  Thus,  we  know,  for 
instance,  that  obe'issance  was  once  in  French 
obtdissanct. 

This  fact,  that  Latin  words  sometimes  do  not 
undergo  all  the  changes  that  generally  are 
observed  in  the  evolutions  of  Latin  words 
into  French  or  English,  gives  rise  to  the 
so-called  doublets.  Doublets  are  words  which, 


96  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

although  clad  in  a  different  garment,  so  to 
speak,  are  etymologically  one  and  the  same 
word.  Thus,  for  instance,  the  Latin  amicabilis 
gives  rise  to  the  doublets  amiable  and  amicable, 
which  are  properly  the  same  word,  with  this 
difference,  that  in  amiable  we  have  the  usual 
loss  of  the  consonant  between  two  vowels,  (c) , 
while  this  consonant  is  preserved  in  amicable. 
Aptitude  is  the  doublet  of  attitude,  from  Latin 
aptitude. 

The  Latin  sound  ca  is  generally  represented 
by  cha  in  French,  and  in  the  English  words 
derived  from  Latin  through  French ;  for 
instance  calorem  gives  chaleur,  heat ;  calidns, 
caldus  (through  the  usual  change  of  al  into  aii) 
gives  chaud,  warm ;  campus  gives  champ,  field. 
But  sometimes  this  ca  is  preserved ;  which 
explains  such  doublets  as  cavalry  &&&  chivalry  ; 
channel  HhA.  canal ;  chariot  and  cart ;  chateau  and 
castle  (Latin  castellnni) ;  to  chant  and  cant,  etc. 

Other  instances  of  doublets  are:  envious 
and  invidious;  due  and  debt:  fact  and  feat; 
fragile  and  frail ;  guard  and  ward  ;  major  and 
mayor;  mister  and  master;  naive  and  native; 
pause  and  pose;  poor  and  pauper;  preach  and 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  97 

predicate ;  prosecute  and  pursue ;  regal  and 
royal ;  supplicant  and  suppliant ;  vocal  and 
vowel. 

Let  us  end  this  chapter  with  some  other 
etymological  researches.  I  hope  they  will  not 
prove  very  dull,  and  will  help  us  to  see  more 
into  the  nature  of  this  organ  without  which 
man  and  all  man's  faculties  would  be  powerless. 
Let  us  resume  the  same  root  ere  or  cri,  which 
we  have  just  fallen  in  with  above.  This 
root  ere  we  have  also  in  the  form  cer.  This 
phenomenon  of  the  transposition  of  a  vowel,  or 
of  a  consonant,  especially  when  such  consonant 
is  r  or  /,  is  very  common,  and  it  is  called 
metathesis.  From  this  root,  either  in  its  form 
cer  or  ere,  we  have  many  words ;  for  instance, 
ccr-taiu,  Latin  cer-tus,  is  that  which  has  been 
sifted,  that  of  which  we  are  sure  after  careful 
investigation.  Criterion  is  a  Greek  word, 
formed  by  the  aid  of  the  suffix  -tcrion,  that 
is  used  to  denote  a  place  or  an  instrument ; 
it  means  that  by  which  we  judge,  we  "  sift  " 
something  to  find  out  what  it  is  worth.  From 
this  root  cer  with  the  re-enforcement  of  an  n, 
very  common  in  Latin  and  Greek,  we  have  the 


98  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

verb  cer-n-o.  This  n  disappears  in  the  past 
cre-vi,  cre-tuin.  Ccr-n-o  means,  of  course,  "  to 
sift."  From  this  we  have  to  discern,  to  pick  out, 
to  see  among  other  things.  And  from  the  past 
of  discerno  we  have  "discreet"  which  means, 
properly,  "  sifted  out,"  "  selected,"  "  examined  "; 
and  in  an  active  sense,  "  wary,"  "  discriminat- 
ing," "prudent."  From  "discreet"  we  have 
"  discretion." 

The  same  phenomenon  of  re-enforcement 
through  an  n,  and  of  metathesis,  we  have  in 
another  root,  which  is  at  the  basis  of  many 
words.  The  root  star  or  ster  means  to  "  strew." 
This  very  English  verb  is  from  the  same  root. 
From  ster  we  have,  through  a  common  suffix, 
-jf/a,  the  word  ster-nla,  which  through  the  form 
sterla,  has  given  "  Stella"  and  means  "  strewer 
of  light,"  a  star.  The  same  root  gives  the  Latin 
verb  ster -n-o  to  strew,  which  makes  in  the  past 
participle  stra-tum,  plural  stra-ta.  Hence 
the  Italian  stradaz.\\<\  the  English  street,  which 
means  properly  strewn.  From  the  same  root 
we  have pro-stra-tc,  to  throw  down,  to  strew; 
\\\\(\  prostration;  con-stcr-n-atc  and  consternation, 
etc.  So  we  sec  that  one  and  the  same  root 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  99 

gives  rise  to  so  different  words  as  star,  street, 
and  consternation. 

Who  would  say  that  there  is  the  least  con- 
nection between  noun  and  agnosticism  ?  Still, 
beyond  a  doubt,  these  words  are  sisters,  or 
cousins  at  least,  and  they  come  from  the  same 
root.  We  have  an  Indo-European  root  gan  or 
gna,  which  means  to  "  know."  From  this  we 
have  the  Sanskrit  word  na-man  for  gna-man, 
"  na-me  "  ;  the  Greek  gno-sis,  knowledge  ;  the 
Latin  co-gno-sco,  to  know,  no-men  for  gno-mcn, 
noun  ;  the  English  know  and  noun  and  name. 
And  other  words  still ;  for  instance,  noble  is  in 
Latin  no-bilis  for  gno-bilis,  which  meant 
"  worthy  of  being  known,"  "  distinguished."  So 
igno-ble,,  no-table,  no-te,  no-tice,  igno-re,  igno- 
rant, co-gnizance  (Latin  co-noscentia)  recogni- 
zance, etc.,  are  all  to  be  referred  to  that  root  gna. 
Now  as  to  agnosticism,  it  is  a  Greek  word  ; 
from  gno-sis,  knowledge,  we  have  gnostic,  he 
who  knows,  as  from  crisis,  critic.  A  in  Greek 
means  not ;  agnostic,  "he  who  does  not  know"  ; 
agnosticism  is  the  state  of  mind  of  the  agnostic. 

There   is  a    deep  meaning   in  this    common 
descent    of   the  words   noun,    name  and   know 


ioo  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

from  the  same  root.  To  give  a  thing  its  right 
name  is  to  knoiv  it ;  we  can  not  name  it  correctly 
without  knowing  it.  So  in  our  words  we 
treasure  up  all  the  results  of  human  knowledge. 
The  only  trouble  is,  that  we  are  too  often 
satisfied  with  repeating  the  words  we  have 
learned,  in  books  or  heard  from  other  people, 
and  we  are  too  easily  deceived  into  believing 
that  we  know  the  things  when  we  scarcely 
know  the  true  meaning  of  the  words  we  use. 
Just  as  physicians  often  believe  they  know 
what  a  disease  is  because  they  know  its  Greek 
name. 

What  do  we  mean  when  we  say  "  I  have 
not  the  least  idea  of  such  a  thing?"  Idea 
is  really  a  Greek  word,  which  means  an  image. 
The  idea  of  a  thing  is  properly  the  image  we 
have  of  that  thing  in  our  minds.  The  Greek 
word  idea  is  derived  from  a  root  vid,  which 
means  to  sec;  in  the  Greek  v  has  disap- 
peared. We  have  this  same  root  in  Latin : 
vid-ere,  Greek  id-cin,  to  see.  From  this  root 
we  have  in  Greek  eidolon,  an  image,  English 
idol ;  and  cidnllon,  English  idyl,  a  little  picture 
from  life.  We  have  in  Latin  vi-sio,  English, 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  101 

vision,  from  vid-sio ;  as  we  have  seen 
(occa-sion,  etc.)  d  disappears  before  s.  We 
have  also  seen  that  d  before  /  is  changed 
into  s;  thus,  if  to  the  .root  id,  we  add  the  suffix 
tor  (comp.  protec-tor,  progeni-tor,  etc.)  we  shall 
have  is-tor,  he  who  sees,  "  seer,"  and  istoria  is 
the  tale  of  him  who  has  seen.  Istoria  has 
given  in  English,  "  history." 

We  have  some  other  familiar  words,  which, 
in  spite  of  appearances,  are  far  distant  from 
idea,  both  as  to  meaning  and  root  :  the  words 
idiot,  idiotic,  idiotism.  All  these  words  come 
from  the  Greek  word  idios  which  means  "one's 
own,"  private.  Idiotes  in  Greek  designated  a 
citizen  who  did  not  partake  in  the  government 
of  the  city,  a  merely  private  citizen.  Hence 
it  came  to  denote  one  belonging  to  the  lowest 
rank  of  citizens  ;  hence  its  present  meaning. 
Idiom  is  what  is  proper,  particular  to  one 
language. 

A  very  instructive  word  is  age.  Age  was 
in  old  French  cdage,  and  then  through  the 
usual  disappearance  of  the  middle  consonant, 
cage.  Edage  comes  from  Latin  aetaticvm.  (The 
suffix  aticum  gives  usually  age  in  French  :  stage 


102  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

is  to  be  referred  to  a  staticum  ;  voyage,  which 
once  was  viage,  comes  from  viaticum,  and  this 
from  via,  a  way,  a  journey.)  Aetaticum  is  from 
actas  age,  which  is  an  abbreviation  of  acvitas  : 
compare  fo-mentum  from  fovi-mentum,  momen- 
tum from  movimentum,  etc.  Aevitas  is  from 
aevum,  time  ;  from  acvum  we  have  aevitcrnus, 
which,  as  acvitas  to  aetas,  was  reduced  to 
aeternus,  "lasting,"  "eternal."  Thus  age  and 
eternal  descend  from  the  same  word  acvum, 
time. 

Another  very  common  word  is  emphatic  ; — "  I 
deny  it  emphatically"  This  is  a  Greek  word, 
"  emphaticbs"  from  the  root  pha  of  the  verb 
pha-i-HOy  which  means  to  "shine"  Asguosis  from 
gnOj  we  have  phasis,  phase,  from  pha  ;  the 
phases  of  the  moon  are  the  various  succeeding 
ways  in  which  the  moon  seems  to  shine. 
"  Emphaticos"  in  Greek  means  properly 
"shining,"  "conspicuous."  We  have  slightly 
modified  this  meaning:  but  our  modification 
consists  simply  in  this,  that  we  apply  to  the 
mind  what  once  was  applied  to  the  eyes. 

From  this  same  verb  phaino  we  have  the 
word  phenomenon  which  is  properly  the  pres- 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  103 


ent  participle  of  the  verb  phaino,  and  means 
"  that  which  appears"  but  outside  of  scientific 
language  we  reserve  the  word  only  to  things 
which  do  not  appear  usually,  but  are  rather 
uncommon. 

I  have  mentioned  the  word  con-spic-uous. 
Here  we  have  a  root  which  has  a  wonderful 
prolification.  The  root,  spec,  means  properly 
"  to  look."  Hence  we  have  a  great  many 
words,  like  specula,  observatory,  and  speculate, 
properly  to  look  out  from  a  specula,  to  con- 
template. To  prospect,  to  look  forth ;  to 
inspect,  to  look  in,  inspector,  inspection  ;  des- 
pise, through  French  modification,  to  look 
down  ;  despicable,  to  be  looked  down  ;  despite, 
the  act  of  looking  down. 

Now,  to  sum  up,  we  have  seen  many  instances 
of  the  march  of  words,  of  the  development  of 
their  ideal  meanings  from  the  material  meaning  \ 
of  their    roots.     Besides,  we  have  seen  that,  in    \ 
the    classification    of  languages    made   by   the 
comparative  philologist,  there  is  a  great  family, 
the  so-called  Indo-European,  or  Aryan  family, 
to  which   the  greatest  part    of  the    languages 
spoken  by  the  most  civilized  peoples  in  Asia, 


104  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

Europe,  and  America  belong.  The  English 
language  belongs  to  this  family,  and  properly 
to  its  Teutonic  branch,  but  has  also  taken  a  great 
deal  of  sinew  and  blood  from  Latin  source. 
Therefore,  if  we  take  an  English  word,  we  can 
follow  it  backward  to  that  primitive  language 
which  was  spoken  by  our  forefathers  in 
the  high  plains  of  Asia,  before  they 
separated,  and  spread  all  over  Asia,  Europe, 
and  America.  Thus  it  is  that  in  every  word 
we  have  not  only  roots  and  suffixes,  but  im- 
portant fragments  of  the  history  of  our  own 
race. 

And  here  let  us  make  a  little  digression. 
You  know  that  many  people  who  attempt 
etymologies,  without  caring  to  inquire  whether 
there  is  a  science  of  language  or  not,  have 
the  hobby  of  continually  referring  words  to 
Hebrew,  and  pretend  to  find  in  this  language 
the  key  to  explain  not  only  English,  but  many 
other  languages.  Still,  as  you  have  seen,  we 
have  examined  many  words,  and  Hebrew  we 
did  not  even  mention.  There  are  indeed  very 
few  words  in  all  Indo-European  languages 
whose  origin  is  to  be  sought  in  the  Hebrew; 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  105 


and  those  are  mainly  religious  words,  like  Sab- 
bath, Pasch,  etc.  What  do  we  do  then  with 
Hebrew  ?  Must  we  do  away  with  it  entirely  ? 

Hebrew  belongs  to  another  family  of  lan- 
guages, with  which  our  Aryan  tongues  have 
little  to  do.  By  the  same  process  with  which 
the  comparative  philologist  has  classified  the 
Aryan  languages,  he  has  also  established 
another  family,  the  Semitic,  to  which  Hebrew 
belongs.  This  family  is  divided  into  three 
branches : 

1.  Arabic,  or  southern  branch. 

2.  Hebrew,  or  middle  branch. 

3.  Aramaic,  or  northern  branch. 
Jesus  Christ  spoke  an  Aramaic  dialect. 

The  Aryan  and  the  Semitic  family  differ 
widely  both  in  their  grammar  and  dictionary. 
The  attempts  repeatedly  made  by  eminent 
philologists  to  explain  their  discrepancies  and 
show  some  connection  between  them  have  thus 
far  failed. 

Beside  the  Aryan  and  the  Semitic,  there  are 
hundreds  and  hundreds  of  other  languages, 
some  of  which  are  spoken  by  large  nations, 
like  the  Chinese,  some  by  a  single  tribe  in  the 


106  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

lowest  degree  of  humanity.  For  comparative 
philology  these  languages  are  not  less  im- 
portant than  the  Aryan  and  the  Semitic. 
Many  phenomena  of  the  development 
of  language  are  more  easily  discovered  and 
more  clearly  observed  in  rudimentary  languages 
than  in  those  which  have  reached  a  higher 
degree  of  life.  This  study  is  carried  on  most 
actively  by  missionaries  and  scientists :  but 
the  materials  gathered  thus  far  are  not  large 
enough  to  allow  a  satisfactory  classification. 
Some  philologists  divide  the  languages,  out- 
side of  the  Semitic  and  Aryan  families,  into 
about  a  hundred  groups;  some  in  another 
number.  But  it  is  self-evident  that,  for  the 
present,  classification  is  premature. 

Just  to  give  the  reader  a  mere  hint,  we  can 
hardly  say  an  idea,  about  the  classification  of 
such  languages,  we  may  mention  the  follow- 
ing groups : 

A.  The  Scythian     group,      which      compre- 
hends :  i.  Hungarian  ;    2.  Turkish;  3.   Finnish 
and  Lappish ;    4.    The  Samoyed    dialects ;    5- 
Mongolian  dialects  ;  Tungusian  dialects. 

B.  I.  The  Dravidian   or   Tamulic  (including 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  107 

Tamul,  Telegu,  Malabar,  Canaries).  II.  The 
languages  of  North-Eastern  Asia.  III.  Japan- 
ese. IV.  Malay-Polynesian.  V.  The  Cau- 
casian dialects  (Georgian,  etc). 

C.  South  African  dialects. 

D.  I.     Chinese.      II.     The     languages      of 
Farther  India    (the  Siamese,  Burmese,  Annam- 
ese,  etc).     III.    Thibetan. 

E.  I.  Basque.    II.  The  Aboriginal  languages 
of  South  America. 

Before  proceeding  to  examine  other  interest- 
ing results  of  the  Science  of  Language,  especially 
concerning  grammar,  mythology  and  ethnology, 
let  us  analyze  some  more  words  of  the  English 
language,  dividing  them  into  groups  marked 
by  some  connection  of  ideas.  We  may  begin 
with  some  of  the  most  important  household 
words ;  then  we  shall  investigate  into  the  origin 
of  church,  social  and  political  words. 


HOUSEHOLD  WORDS. 

Even  for  these  words  which  we  have  been  so 
accustomed  to  hear  ever  since  the  first  days  of 
our  existence,  and  which  we  are  fain  to  accept 
as  natural  words,  never  fancying  where  they 
may  come  from — even  for  these  words,  we  can 
almost  always  hunt  out  a  remote  origin,  and  the 
reason  of  their  present  meaning. 

Before  all,  house,  German  Jiaus,  Gothic  Jiusa, 
is  to  be  traced  to  a  root  sku,  which  means  to 
"cover,"  to  " shelter,"  (of  the  disappearance  of 
an  initial  s,  we  have  numerous  instan 
The  Romans  and  Greeks  had  the  words  downs 
and  domos,  from  a  root  dam  which  means  to 
build, and.  also  to  "bind"  From  damns  we 
have  domestic,  domesticity. 

The  word  family,  French  famille,  Latin 
familia,  is  from  a  root  dJia  which  means  to 
settle,  to  order.  The  change  from  dh  to  f  is 
according  to  the  phonetic  laws. 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  109 

Father,  German  vater,  Frisian  feder, 
Anglo-Saxon  f aether,  Gothic  fadar,  corresponds 
normally,  according  to  Grimm's  law,  to  Latin 
pater,  Greek  pater,  Sanskrit  pitar.  In  all  these 
words,  we  have,  more  or  less  preserved,  the 
suffix  -ter  which  usually  denotes  the  agent,  and 
the  root  pa  which  means  to  "  guard,"  to  "  pro- 
tect," and  also  to  "  support."  Father,  "  he  who 
supports,"  who  "  protects."  Mother,  German 
mutter,  Old  High  German  muotar,  Latin'  mater, 
Greek  meter,  Sanskrit  mdtd,  has  the  same  suffix 
ter,  and  the  root  ma  which  means  "  to  shape," 
"  to  form"  ;  "  she  who  shapes,"  "  who  forms," 
the  family.  This  root  has  also  the  meaning 
of  "  procreating,"  which  is  fit  for  our  case. 

Son  and  Daughter.  Son,  Anglo-Saxon  sunu, 
Sanskrit  sunus,  are  derived  from  the  root  su, 
which  means  to  generate :  hence  son,  "  the 
generated  one."  We  may  observe  in  passing 
that  this  son  helps  to  form  many  family  names : 
Johnson  (the  son  of  John),  Jackson  (the  son  of 
Jack),  Peterson  (Peter),  Dickson  (Dick),  Nelson 
(the  son  of  Nel),  etc. 

In  daughter,  German  tochter,  Greek  thugate'r, 
Anglo-Saxon  dohtor,  Sanskrit  duliitd,  we  have 


HO  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

the  usual  suffix  ter  and  the  root  duh,  which 
means  to  milk.  Very  likely  the  young  girl  was 
called  by  this  name  when  on  the  high  plains 
of  Asia  our  ancient  forefathers,  in  their  pas- 
toral life,  used  to  send  her  to  milk  the  cows. 
Other  philologists  see  in  daughter  (duhita)  the 
meaning  of  "giving  milk,"  of  "sucking." 
Latin  has  for  son  and  daughter  the  words  filius 
andji/ia;  hence  the  French^/j  and _/?//<?,  Italian 
figlio  and  figlia  and  Spanish  hijo,  hija.  (Re- 
member hccho  fromfec/io,  hierro  fromferrum.) 
The  root  in  this  case  is  bhu,  which  means  also 
"to  generate." 

Brother  and  Sister.  Brother,  German  bruder, 
Old  High  German/r«0dfor,  Latin  f rater  >  Greek 
frator,  Sanskrit  bhrdtar,  is  derived  from  the 
root  bhar,  which  means  to  "carry,"  to  "sup- 
port," to  "  guide."  Brother,  the  support,  the 
guide  of  the  sister.  Sister,  German  se/m'cstcr, 
Anglo-Saxon  soustar,  Gothic  svistar,  Sanskrit 
svasar.  This  svasar  has  to  be  reconstructed 
into  svastar  (compare  Gothic  svistar]  from  the 
root  vas%  to  "live,"  to  "inhabit."  Sister,  "the 
woman  who  lives  under  the  same  roof,"  "  our 
companion." 


PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 


Ill 


Husband  and  W/>.  Husband  is  properly  a 
Scandinavian  word,  and  means  the  master  of 
the  home  (Jms  for  house).  The  origin  of  wife 
is  as  yet  obscure. 

The  origin  of  bride,  Anglo-Saxon  bryd,  Old 
High  German. .prut,  German  braut,  like  that  of 
wife,  thus  far  is  not  ascertained.  The  second 
part  of  bridegroom  has  nothing  to  do  with 
groom  ;  it  was  once  written  "bredgome,"  Anglo- 
Saxon  brydguma,  Swedish  brudgumme,  Old 
High  German  brutcgomo,  German  brdutigam. 
The  wordgPfne,  Anglo-Saxon guma,  means  man, 
and  is  cognate  with  Latin  homo.  Bridegroom 
means  the  man  of  the  bride  ;  the  man  newly 
married.  We  may  observe  in  passing  that 
guma  and  homo,  "  man,"  are  to  be  referred,  ac- 
cording to  phonetic  laws  well  established,  to 
gham,  which  means  "  earth,"  (compare  Latin 
humus,  the  soil).  The  word  man,  on  the  con- 
trary, is  from  a  root  which  means  "  to  think." 

Spouse,  Middle  English  spuse,  French  once 
espoux  and  espouse,  now  tpoux  and  Spouse, 
Italian  sposo  and  sposa,  are  from  sponsus, 
pledged,  betrothed,  the  past  participle  of  the 
verb  spondere,  to  promise,  to  pledge.  Wedding 


112  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

is  from  the  Anglo-Saxon  wed,  to  pledge.  Nup- 
tial is  from  Latin  nub-ere,  which  meant  prop- 
erly to  veil ;  the  bride  in  Rome  was  covered 
with  a  yellow  veil. 

Bachelor,  Middle  English  bacheler,  Old 
French  bacheler,  French  bachelicr  is  from 
baccalarius,  a.  farm-servant,  a  cow-herd  :  from 
baccalia,  a  herd  of  cows  ;  this  from  bacca,  a 
cow,  a  Low  Latin  form  for  vacca,  a  cow. 

To  marry,  French  marier,  Italian  mar  it  are, 
is  from  Latin  maritus,  husband.  Maritus  is 
connected  with  mas,  marts,  "  male." 


CHURCH   WORDS. 

hurch  is  in  Middle  English  cJ lire  lie,  chireche, 
clierche ;  Northern  dialects  kirk,  kirke  j  Anglo- 
Saxon  kerika,  kirika.  These  are  to  be  referred 
to  the  Greek  kyriakos,  which  means  "  belonging 
to  the  Lord  "  ;  Kyrios  is  the  Lord.  Church  then 
properly  means  "  the  house  of  the  Lord." 

In  the  Greek  there  is  another  word  for 
church;  ecclesia,  from  the  verb  caleo,  to  call,  to 
summon;  that  is  " the  assembly  of  the  faith- 
ful." From  this  word  we  have  "  ecclesiastic," 
"  ecclesiastical." 

Clergy  is  from  Latin  dericus,  Greek  klericos. 
This  from  cleros,  which  meant  "  a  portion," 
"  an  allotment."  The  pri-ests  were  called 
klericoi,  either  because  they  were,  so  to  speak, 
a  class  apart,  or  rather  because  they  had 
"  a  lot  in  God's  inheritance."  And  when  only 
the  churchmen  knew  how  to  read  and  write, 


114  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

clericus,  clerk,  became  synonymous  with 
scholar.  The  word  "  clerk,"  then,  once  con- 
veyed an  idea  of  dignity,  which  gradually 
disappeared  with  the  increasing  diffusion  of 
education. 

Priest,  Middle  English  preest,  Anglo-Saxon 
preost,  Old  French  prestre,  is  a  contraction 
from  the  Latin  presbyter,  Greek  presbyteros, 
which  means  properly  "  elder."  In  the  early 
days  of  the  church,  the  eldest  were  com- 
monly selected  to  lead  in  the  service  of  the 
church. 

Deacon,  Latin  diaconus,  Greek  diaconos,  means 
"a  servant,"  a  subordinate  of  the  priest. 

Congregation  is  from  the  Latin  word  grcg-cm, 
which  means  flock.  Pastor  means  shepherd. 
So  when  we  speak  of  "  a  pastor  and  his  congre- 
gation," we  use  exactly  the  same  metaphor  as 
when  we  call  him  "  a  shepherd,"  and  we  speak 
of  his  "  flock." 

Preacher,  to  preach,  etc.  (Middle  English, 
prechcn,  Old  French,  precher],  are  from  Latin 
prae,  "before,"  before  men,  in  public;  and 
dicare  to  proclaim,  connected  with  dicere  to  say. 
Praedicarc,  through  the  usual  loss  of  the 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  H5 


dental  between  two  vowels,  gives  praeicare, 
from  which  we  have  normally  the  Old  French 
precher.  Predicate  is  from  the  same  root. 

Rite  is  from  the  Latin  ritus,  a  custom,  espec- 
ially in  religious  matters.  In  Sanskrit  we  have 
riti,  a  "going,"  also  "way,"  "usage";  root  ri, 
"  to  go."  From  ritus  we  have  ritual,  ritualism, 
etc. 

Liturgy  is  from  Greek  leitourgia,  from  leitos, 
public,  ergon,  work,  service  ;  "  the  common  ser- 
vice "  in  church. 

Layman,  laic,  Old  French  lai,  Latin  laicus, 
Greek  laicos,  from  laos,  the  people  ;  "  pertain- 
ing to  the  people;"  "one  of  the  people  at 
large,"  "  who  does  not  belong  to  the  caste  of 
the  priests." 

Profane,  Latin  prof  amis,  Irompro,  before,  and 
fanum,  temple ;  "  he  who  did  not  enter  or  was 
not  admitted  into  the  church." 

To  profess,  is  from  pro,  before,  and  the  past 
fessus  of  the  Latin  verb  fateri,  to  avow,  to  ac- 
knowledge ;  to  "  acknowledge  before  all,"  pub- 
licly. 

Cemetery  is  the  Greek  koimeterion,  from  the 
verb  koimao,  "to  sleep,"  "to  rest,"  and  the 


Ii6  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

suffix  terion,  which  denotes  either  an  instru- 
ment or  a  place.  Hence  cemetery,  "  the  place 
to  rest,  to  sleep."  Koimao  is  allied  with  kcimai ; 
root  keij  from  ki,  "to  repose,"  "to  rest";  and 
this  root  is  connected  with  the  Latin  qjiies,  and 
our  quiet. 

Mortal,  immortal,  etc.,  are  all  to  be  referred 
to  a  root  mar,  to  "grind  down,"  to  "pound," 
to  bruise  to  death. 

Soul,  Anglo-Saxon  sawel  and  saivol,  Gothic 
saiwala  from  saiws,  "  sea,"  from  a  root  su,  to 
"stir,"  to  "toss  about"  It  is  not  unnatural  to 
compare  our  inner  nature,  tossed  by  passions 
and  desires,  with  a  sea  stirred  up  by  the  gales. 

The  Latin  anima,  soul,  from  which  we  have 
"  animal,"  "  animate,"  "  animation,"  etc.,  meant 
properly  "  breath,"  from  a  root  an,  "  to 
breathe."  Anemos  in  Greek  means  wind. 

Spirit  is  also  from  Latin  spirare,  to  "  breathe." 
To  the  primitive  man  "breathing"  was  the 
most  important,  the  most  striking  manifesta- 
tion of  life. 

Paradise  meant,  originally,  a  garden,  a  park, 
a  pleasure  ground  ;  Greek,  parddeisos. 

Hell  is  connected  with  hole,  from   the  Teu- 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  117 


tonic  root  hal,  to  hide,  to  conceal.  Infernal 
(French,  enfer^]  is  a  Latin  word,  connected  with 
inferior,  and  means  properly  low,  "  subterran- 
ean." 

Angel  is  properly  a  "  messenger  "  of  God.  It 
is  from  the  Greek  angelos,  "  a  messenger." 

Gospel  is  in  French  Evangile,  Italian  evangclio 
or  vangelo,  from  Greek  eu,  "well,  good,"  and 
angelion,  "  news."  Gospel  was  once  written 
God-spel,  the  spel,  the  story,  the  narrative  of 
God. 

God  is  not  less  mysterious  in  its  etymology 
than  in  any  other  predicate.  The  connection 
between  God  and  good,  which  has  been  sug- 
gested, has  no  linguistic  argument  in  its  sup- 
port. In  Latin  we  have  Deus,  whence  French 
Dicu,  Italian  Dio.  Dcus  for  devus,  Sanskrit 
de"va,  is  from  the  root  div,  "  to  shine." 

Deity,  divine  and  divinity  belong  to  this  same 
root. 


WORDS    OF  SOCIETY. 

Of  course  it  is  impossible  to  gather  here, 
without  transcending  by  far  the  limits  of 
the  present  work,  all  the  words  which  could  be 
grouped  under  this  heading.  We  shall  select 
only  a  few  of  them.  First,  the  word  society 
itself  has  a  clear  etymology.  We  have  in  Latin 
societas,  in  French  socitte',  which  are  formed  from 
socius,  an  associate.  The  root  is  soc,  which  is 
but  a  doublet  of  sec  or  seen,  from  the  Indo- 
European  sak  "  to  follow."  Socius  is  "  he  who 
follows  another,"  a  "companion."  Society, 
then,  means  "  companionship,"  "  communion  of 
life."  Social,  sociality,  sociable,  socialism,  etc., 
belong,  of  course,  to  the  same  root. 

We  may  divide  the  social  relations  into  two 
great  groups,  relations  of  sympathy  n.\\(\  relations 
oi  antipathy.  Sympathy  and  antipathy  are  both 
Greek  words  from  the  root  path,  to  feel.  Sym- 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  119 

ithy  (sun,  with)  to  feel  with  somebody,  to  feel 
LS  he  does,  to  sympathize  with  him  ;  antipathy 
(anti,  against)  to  feel  against  him,  aversion  to 
lim.  (Aversion,  by  the  way,  is  from  the  Latin 
i,  away,  from,  and  the  root  vert,  of  the  verb 
'jertere,  to  turn.)  Words  of  sympathy :  love, 
friendship,  affection,  amiability,  etc. 

Love,  Anglo-Saxon  lufu,  Sanskrit  lobha,  is 
from  a  root  lubJi  which  means  to  covet,  to  desire. 
This  root  has  in  Latin  the  form  lib,  hence  liber 
which  means  free,  originally  "  acting  at  pleas- 
ure "  ;  and  liberty,  and  liberal.  Amour,  amorous, 
amatory,  amiable,  amiability,  etc.,  come  from 
Latin,  am-or,  love.  So  friend  is  in  Latin  amicus, 
whence  Italian,  amico,  Spanish  amigo,  French 
ami. 

Friend  (friendly,  friendship,  etc.,)  was  in  An- 
glo-Saxon frcond,  which  was  originally  a  present 
participle  of  freon,  freozan,  to  love ;  freond, 
then,  means  "  loving."  The  root  of  freon  cor- 
responds to  Sanskrit  pri,  to  love.  The  /  of  the 
Anglo-Saxon  corresponds,  according  to  Grimm's 
law,  to  Sanskrit  /  .•  compare  pancha,  five ; 
pitar,  father,  etc. 

Affection  is  from  the  preposition  ad,  at,  "  to- 


120  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

ward,"  and  the  root  fac  of  the  verb  facere. 
(Compare  iec  from  iac,  in-jection,  pro-jection, 
etc.)  To  affect,  then,  is  to  act  toward  some- 
thing or  upon  something;  hence  affection,  "the 
being  affected  or  touched  "  ;  the  state  of  hav- 
ing one's  feelings  affected  in  some  way ;  bent 
or  disposition  of  mind  ;  feeling. 

Dear,  Anglo-Saxon  deore,  Ge'fman  theuer, 
whose  root  is  unknown,  but  whose  primitive 
meaning  seems  to  have  been  "  expensive,"  is  in 
Latin,  ca-rus.  From  this  we  have  to  caress, 
French  carcsscr,  to  fondle,  to  cherish.  The 
verb  cherish  itself  is  only  the  English  form  of 
the  French  cJic'rir,  which  comes  from  cams.  We 
have  noticed  already  that  it  is  in  the  nature  of 
the  French  language  to  change  the  Latin  ca 
into  cha  :  Latin  catns,  cat,  French  cJiat ;  camtnus, 
caminata,  hearth,  French  chhnincc,  English 
chimney ;  Latin  cantarc,  to  sing,  French 
chanter.  In  the  same  way  from  cants  we  have 
charity  and  all  its  derivatives.  Now,  if  we  go 
further  back,  we  find  that  Latin  ca-rus  corre- 
sponds to  Sanskrit  kam-ra,  "  charming," 
beautiful,"  from  the  root  kam,  "  to  love." 

The  verb  to  court  has  a  long  story.       Court, 


THE  PHILOSOPH  Y  OF  WORDS.  1 2 1 

Latin  cors  or  coJiors,  was  said  first  of  a 
and  especially  of  a  cattleyard,  and  of  the 
:attle  themselves.  Then  it  came  to  be  applied  to 
:he  yards  of  palaces  and  people  living  therein, 
:o  the  royal  retinue  and  house — hence  the  verb 
"to  court,"  to  practice  arts  in  vogue  at  court, 
to  seek  favor.  Hence  the  words  court-eons, 
court-es-an,  court-i-er,  court-es-y,  etc. 

Words  of  antipathy.  To  hate,  Anglo-Saxon 
lete,  is  very  likely  from  a  Teutonic  root  hat 
rhich  means  to  "pursue." 

To  detest,  French  detester,  is  from  Latin 
Ictest-ari,  which  means  to  execrate,  to  impre- 
ite  evil  by  calling  the  Gods  to  witness ;  de, 
lown,  and  testari,  to  testify,  from  testis,  "  a 
ritness." 

Enemy  and  enmity  are  from  Latin  in-imicus  ; 
which  is  from  amicus,  friend,  and  in,  not. 

Rival  is  a  very  good  specimen  of  the  long 
way  words  go  over  in  their  meaning.  Rival  is 
a  Latin  word,  rivalis,  which  is  formed  from 
rivus,  a  brook.  Rivalis  is  one  who  lives,  who 
has  his  possessions  along  a  brook.  Few  branches 
of  the  law  have  been  so  long  unsettled  as  the  law 
regarding  the  claims  of  the  owners  of  estates 


122  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

when  the  swelling  and  overflowing  of  rivers 
cause  not  slight  alterations  in  their  lands. 
Naturally  enough  rivalis  and  rivalitas  came  to 
have  the  meaning  of  "contestant  "  and  contes- 
tation "  ;  one  step  further,  and  we  have  the 
present  meaning  of  rival  and  rivalry. 

Jealous,  Old  French  jalous,  Italian  geloso, 
Spanish  zeloso,  Low  Latin  zelosus,  are  all  from 
Greek  zelos,  "zeal."  Zelos  meant  properly 
"  heat,"  "  ardor,"  and  it  stands  for  zeslos  from  a 
root  zes,  which  means  "to  boil,"  "to  seethe" 
(zes-is,  boiling).  From  these  meanings,  it  is  easy 
to  see  the  passage  to  the  present  meaning  of  zeal 
and  zealot,  jealous  &n&  jealousy. 

Proceeding  now  to  consider  other  words  of 
society,  we  can  not  omit  such  words  as  fasJi- 
ionable,  elegant,  etc. 

Fashionable,  of  course,  is  from  fashion.  Fash- 
ion, Old  French,  face  on,  fazon,  fas/ton  means 
the  shape,  the  make  of  a  thing.  It  is  from  the 
Latin  factio,  from  the  verb  fac-ere,  to  make. 
Fashion,  then,  meant  properly  nothing  else  than 
the  "  shape  "  in  which  something  was  made ; 
then  it  was  applied  to  dress,  to  manners,  etc. ; 
and  one  thing  or  person  came  to  be  called 


; 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  123 

"ashionable  when    according  to  the    shape    or 
tandard  prevailing  in  society. 

Elegant  and  elegance  are  both  from  the  prefix 
e  and  the  Latin  root  leg,  to  choose,  to  pick  out. 
Elegance  consists  in  "picking  out,"  in  "selecting" 
the  best  things.  It  is  a  sister-word  of  e-lec-tion, 
a  choice,  or  picking  out. 

As  for  society  diversions,  it  would  be  too 
long  to  enumerate  them  all,  but  let  us  devote 
some  lines  to  at  least  one  kind  of  amusement. 
Theatre  is  a  Greek  word  from  the  verb  thedo, 
to  see,"  and  the  suffix  iron,  which  usually  de- 
otes  an  instrument  or  a  place.  Theatre  is  then 
a  "  place  for  a  sight, "for  a  view.  The  same  root 
we  have  in  theory,  properly  a  "  beholding,"  a 
"speculation." 

Drama  means  an  action,  from  the  Greek  root 
dra,  to  act,  to  perform  ;  and  ac-tor  is  he  who 
acts,  who  performs. 

Tragedy  is  from  the  Greek  tragodia,  from 
tragos,  a  he-goat ;  and  odos,  a  song.  In  the 
feasts  of  Dionysus  (Bacchus,  the  god  of  wine) 
a  song  was  sung,  and  then  a  he-goat,  a  beast 
obnoxious  to  the  vine,  was  sacrificed  to  Diony- 
sus. The  song,  which  was  at  first  merely  lyric, 


124  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

was  afterward  divided  into  parts  and  sung  by 
two  men ;  then  other  and  still  other  partakers 
were  added,  so  that  by  and  by  from  that  rude 
beginning  we  came  to  have  what  we  now  call 
tragedy,  whose  first  meaning  was  the  "  song  of 
the  he-goat. " 

Comedy  is  also  a  Greek  word  from  komos,  a 
banquet,  and  ddos,  a  song.  Comedy,  signified 
at  first  songs  sung  at  banquets ;  gay  and 
festive  songs.  Komos  was  a  banquet  at  which 
the  guests  lay  down,  from  the  same  root  that 
we  have  in  the  verb  koimao,  "  to  lie  down,"  "  to 
rest "  ;  so  that  in  comedy  we  have  really  the 
same  root  that  we  have  in  cemetery.  Strange 
fate  of  words ! 

Farce  is  connected  with  the  verb  to  farce, 
Latin  fare-ire,  to  stuff,  to  cram  in.  Farce,  then, 
meant  at  first  "a  stuffing";  and  that  now  it 
does  not  contradict  its  original  meaning,  I 
think  not  few  are  ready  to  admit,  especially 
after  having  been  obliged  to  endure  for  two  or 
three  hours  certain  entertainments  of  the' 
kind. 

The  origin  of  the  word  Vaudeville  seems  to 
be  due  to  the  town  of  Vaudevire  (Val-de-vire) 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  125 


in  Normandy,  where  Olivier  de  Basselin,  a  poet 
of  the  fifteenth  century,  introduced  this  kind 
of  play. 

To  close  this  chapter  on  words  of  society, 
let  us  look  a  moment  into  the  titles  which  we 
prefix  to  our  names.  Mister,  meister,  maister, 
Old  French  maistre,  are  but  varieties  of  mas- 
ter, derived,  through  French,  with  the  usual 
loss  of  the  middle  consonant,  from  Latin  mag- 
ister,  which  meant  properly  "  much  more 
greater";  hence  the  idea  of  superiority,  of 
power,  of  sway. 

Mistress,  Middle  English  maistresse,  is 
formed  from  master  through  the  French  suffix 
-esse  (Latin  -issa,  Italian  -essa;  abb-ess,  autlior-ess, 
doctor-ess].  Miss  is  simply  a  contraction  from 
Missis,  the  common  pronunciation  of  mistress. 
Shakespeare  :  "  This  is  Mistress  Anne  Page  " 
(Merry  Wives,  i.  i.  197)  where  we  now  should  say 
"  Miss  Anne  Page." 

Sir  or  sire,  was  the  despair  of  the  old  ety- 
mologists. They  even  wrote  it  eyre  in  order 
to  make  it  look  like  the  Greek  kyrios,  a 
lord  ! — We  have  the  Latin  word  senior,  the 
comparative  of  senex,  which  means  "  old  "  ; 


126  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

senior,  "older."  Hence  we  have  the  forms 
senhor,  senJicr,  seigneur,  sieur,  sire.  From  the 
French  sire  we  have  the  English  sir,  which  cor- 
responds to  the  French  sieur  in  monsieur  (my- 
sir),  to  the  Italian  signore,  to  the  Spanish  senor 
All  these  titles,  as  their  etymology  indicates, 
were  used  at  first  as  a  mark  of  respect  to  old 
age  ;  afterwards  as  a  mark  of  respect  to  every 
body. 

Madam  is  a  French  word  :  ma-dame,  my  lady. 
"  Dame "  is  from  Latin  domna,  for  domina, 
mistress. 

Damsel,  a  girl,  French  demoiselle,  Italian 
damigella,  is  to  be  carried  back  to  a  Latin  dom- 
inicella,  a  little  mistress. 

Lord,  Middle  English  louerd,  Anglo-Saxon 
Jilaford,  from  Jilaf,  a  loaf;  ord  for  ivcard,  a 
warden,  a  keeper,  a  master  ;  hence  hlaf-ord 
(Jilaf-wcard)  loaf-keeper,  that  is  "  the  master  of 
the  house,"  the  father  of  the  family. 

Duke,  marquis,  count,  baron,  knight,  have  all 
their  origin  in  the  military  institutions  of 
feudalism.  Duke  is  from  Latin  due-ere,  to 
guide,  to  lead  ;  "a  leader."  Marquis,  Middle 
English  markis,  Old  French  markis,  marchis, 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  127 

"  the  governor  of  a  '  marka,  '  "  (mark)  that  is 
a  border  country.  The  border  provinces 
(marks)  had  to  be  strongly  organized,  and  ready 
to  repel  foreign  invasions.  Their  governor  was 
therefore  a  military  man,  and  was  called  a 
"  marquis" 

Count,  French  comte,  is  from  Latin  comitem, 
"  a  companion,"  from  cum,  with,  and  the  verb 
ire,  to  go.  The  "  count  "  was  the  companion, 
the  follower  of  the  prince  in  battle. 

Baron  means  simply  "  man"  In  the  Neo- 
Latin  languages  it  meant  generally  a  man 
strong,  gallant,  noble.  We  find  it  also  in  the 
form  bar ;  for  instance  in  the  old  Provencal; 
"  Le  bar  non  es  creat  per  la  femna,  mas  la 
femna  per  lo  baro,"  "  The  man  was  not  created 
for  the  woman,  but  the  woman  for  the  man." 
Knight  corresponds  to  the  German  knecht ; 
as  night  to  nacht.  It  meant  a  "  servant,"  as 
knecht  does.  But  it  was  applied  especially  to 
soldiers  and  officers  who  helped,  who  followed 
their  captain  in  the  field. 

Gentleman,  the  highest  title  in  a  democratic 
community,  is  not  at  all  a  democratic  word  ; 
it  appeals  especially  to  those  principles 


128  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

of  heredity  with  which  democracies  are  not 
friendly.  Gentle  comes  from  Latin  gens,  which 
means  a  clan.  Gentleman  then  means  properly  a 
man  who  belongs  by  birth  to  a  certain  clan,  to 
a  certain  class  of  society.  With  the  spread  of 
education,  with  the  diminishing  inequality  of 
fortunes  and  rights,  the  etymological  meaning  of 
gentleman  has  given  way  to  its  present  and 
better  meaning.  Nobleman,  on  the  contrary, 
followed  quite  an  opposite  road.  It  meant 
properly,  a  man  well  known,  distinguished  :  but 
by  virtue  of  the  hereditary  principle,  and 
especially  of  hereditary  transmission  of  titles, 
nobleman  was  called  anybody  who  belonged  to 
some  particular  class,  regardless  of  his  personal 
claims  to  be  a  "  distinguished  man." 

Such  is  the  life  of  words  :  some  lose  their 
primitive  nobleness,  and  are,  so  to  speak, 
dethroned  ;  others,  following  luckily  in  the  track 
of  modern  civilization,  are  pushed  along,  and 
exalted  and  ennobled  in  acccordance  with  the 
evolution  of  our  ideas  and  the  progress  of  our 
social  life. 


POLITICAL  WORDS 

Politics,  political,  etc.,  are  to  be  referred  to 
Greek. polites,  a  citizen,  irompolis,  a  city.  "  City" 
is  (through  French  ctti),  from  Latin  citatcm,  an 
abbreviated  form  of  civitatem.  (Compare  aetas 
from  aevitas ;  momentum  from  movimentiim ; 
f amentum  from  fovimentum)  Civitatem  is 
from  civis,  a  citizen  :  in  civis,  we  have  that  root 
ki,  Sanskrit  git  to  rest,  to  live,  which  we  have 
already  ,  met  in  koimao  (whence,  comedy,  ceme- 
tery and  quiet). 

Citizen  is  from  city;  Middle  English  citisien, 
citizein,  citesain.  The  z  (sometimes  turned  into 
s)  is  a  corrupt  rendering  of  the  Middle  English 
symbol  3,  which  properly  means  j/,  when  occur- 
ring before  a  vowel.  The  same  mistake  occurs 
in  the  Scotch  names  Menzies,  Dalziel,  miswrit- 
ten  for  Menyies,  Dalyiel,  as  proved  by  the  fre- 
quent pronunciation  of  them  according  to  the 


130  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

old  spelling.  Hence  citizen  stands  for  Middle 
English  citizen,  citiyen,  Old  French  citeain 
(compare  modern  French  citoyeri)  formed  from 
cite',  or  city,  by  help  of  the  suffix  ain,  Latin  anus. 
From  civis,  a  citizen,  we  have  civil  "  belong- 
ing to  the  city  "  "  polite,"  "  cultivated  ";  and 
from  "civil,"  to  "civilize  "  and  "  civilization  ". 

Town,  Middle  English  toun,  meant  properly, 
inclosurc.  The  Anglo-Saxon  tun  meant  origi- 
nally hedge ;  hence  the  verb,  tynan,  to 
"  inclose."  The  meaning  recalls  to  our  memory 
times  when  every  village  had  to  be  a  kind  of 
fortress,  had  to  be  inclosed,  on  account  of  the 
unsettled  character  of  society  and  the  continual 
wars. 

The  same  meaning  is  at  the  base  of  the  word 
ward,  a  watching,  a  protection. 

County  is  a  feudal  term,  and  it  is  connected 
with  count.  "County"  was  the  district  over 
which  the  count  presided. 

Republic  means  "  common-wealth,"  from  res, 
"  thing,"  "  wealth,"  zn&  public,  "  of  the  people." 
Public,  Old  Latin  poblicus,  is  from  Latin 
populus,  "  people  "  ;  contracted  from  populicus. 

Empire    is    from    Latin    imperium,    "  com- 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  131 

mand,"    "rule";      emperor,    through    French 
empereur,  from  Latin  imperator,  "  commander." 

Confederacy,  confederation,  confederate  are 
from  con,  "with,"  "together,"  and  feeder,  the 
stem  of  the  Latin  word  foedus,  a  league. 
Foedus  is  from  an  Indo-European  root  bhidh, 
which  means  to  bind;  hence  confederate, 
11  bound  together." 

"  Government "  had  once  a  far  humbler 
meaning  than  at  present  ;  it  comes  from  the 
Latin  gnbcrnare,  and  this  from  the  Greek  kuber- 
nao,  which  meant  to  steer.  The  word  was  trans- 
ferred from  a  ship  to  a  political  community, 
and  it  meant  "  to  guide,"  "  to  rule."  Guber- 
nator,  from  which  our  "governor,"  was  the 
pilot  of  a  ship. 

President  is  a  participial  form  of  the  verb 
pr&sidere,  from  prce,  before,  and  sedere,  to  sit  ; 
to  sit  before  or  above,  to  preside  over. 

King,  Anglo-Saxon  cyning,  from  cyn,  a  tribe,  a 
race  ;  and  the  suffix  ing,  which  means  "  belong- 
ing to."  Hence  cyn-ing,  "  the  man  of  the  tribe," 
"  the  chief." 

Queen,  Anglo-Saxon  cwen,  Gothic  kwens, 
Old  High  German  quena,  meant  properly  a 


132  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

woman,  a  wife  ;  Greek  gynt,  Russian  jend, 
Sansksrit  janl,  a  woman,  a  wife.  All  these 
words  are  to  be  referred  to  the  Indo-European 
rootgan,  to  produce,  to  generate. 

Aristocracy  meant  properly  a  government  of 
the  best  men ;  from  the  Greek  aristos,  "  the 
best,"  and  the  root  of  the  verb  kratein,  to  be 
strong,  to  rule,  to  command.  But  with  a 
significant  evolution,  by  "  the  best  "  it  came  to 
be  meant  "  a  privileged  order "  ;  the  richest, 
especially  the  owners  of  the  land. 

Democracy  means  a  popular  government, 
from  the  Greek  demos,  the  people,  and  the 
same  verb  kratein,  to  be  strong,  to  command. 
Demos  properly  meant  a  "country-district," 
from  the  root  da,  to  divide;  demos  was  the 
allotment  of  public  land  given  to  a  part  of  the 
people,  and  demos  also  was  called  the  people 
who  enjoyed  the  property  of  that  allotment. 
This  is  a  significant  word,  as  it  helps  us  to  see 
into  the  condition  of  the  property  of  land  in 
very  remote  times,  where  all  history  is  silent. 

Demagogue  is  from  the  same  word  demos,  and 
agogos,  leader,  which  is  derived  from  ago,  to 
drive.  Demagogue  is  the  man  who  "  drives  the 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  133 

>ple."  In  this  origin  of  the  word  we  have  the 
explanation  of  the  bad  sense  in  which  we  use  it. 
\y  a  demagogue,  people  are  not  led  by  reason, 
>ut  they  allow  themselves  to  be  driven,  like 
:attle.  He  goads  them  on  by  exciting  their 
)assions,  and  flattering  their  prejudices. 

Candidate    is    a    true    Roman    word    from 
:andidus,   "candid,"  "white."      In  Rome,  the 
ispirant  to  a  public  office  had  to  wear  a  white 
robe  ;  hence  he  was  called  candidatus,  "  dressed 
in  white."     The  white  robe  was,  of  old,  symbol 
•f  the  stainless  life  which  was  required  of  the 
spirant ;  but  how  words  change  !     Who  would 
[iscover  now-a-days  any  connection   between 
stainless  and    candidate  ? — The   aspirant,   thus 
Iressed  in  white,  used  to  go  around  and  salute 
his  constituents,  and  solicit  their  votes.     This 
going  around  was   called    amb-ire    from    amb, 
around,  and  ire,  to  go  ;    and  from  the  verb  the 
substantive    amb-ition    was    formed.       Hence 
ambition  came  to  designate  "  seeking  for  pre- 
ferment "  ;    and,    from    politics,    came    to   be 
applied  to  every  branch  of  human  life. 

The   candidates    once    picked    out    (elected, 
e,    out,     leg,    to    choose,)     meet     in     Parlia- 


134  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

ment  (from  French  parler,  to  talk,  to 
discourse),  or  in  Congress  (from  cum,  with, 
together,  and  gressus  a  past  form  of  the  verb 
gradij  to  step,  to  go).  Congress  is  almost  the 
same  word  as  con-vention  (yen-ire,  to  come ;  to 
come  together). 

Senate  is  properly  the  assembly  of  "  the 
elder "  from  Latin  senex,  old.  When  civiliza- 
tion was  in  its  beginning,  when  education, 
travels,  etc.,  were  almost  things  unknown,  the 
highest  ability  depended  on  experience,  and 
this  had  only  to  be  acquired  by  age.  Hence 
"the  elder  "were  intrusted  with  the  greatest 
authority  in  public  matters.  We  have  retained 
the  word,  although  we  have  altered  its  meaning 
not  a  little. 

Congresses  and  Senates  deliberate  (weigh  care- 
fully, from  liberare  [librare]  to  weigh,  from 
libra,  balance).  They  discuss  (that  is  they 
"  shake  apart  "  from  dis,  "  asunder,"  "  apart," 
and  cutcrc,  a  reduced  form  of  quatcrc,  to  shake). 
They  ventilate  (they  air,  they  shake  in  the  air, 
from  vcntus,  wind,  air)  the  matters  under  their 
consideration  ;  they  appoint  committees  (from 
to  commit,  to  intrust),  and  they  charge  them 


("  charge  "  is  a  French  word  from  Low  Latin 
carricare,  and  means  to  load,  to  put  upon 
somebody's  shoulders)  with  the  investigation 
("  hunting  up,"  "  tracking  out  "  from  vestige, 
Latin  vestigium,  "  a  foot-print,"  "  a  trace  ;  ")  of 
some  matter. 

One  of  the  most  important,  nay,  the  most 
important  branch  of  public  administration  is 
law,  which  was  in  Middle  English  laive  and  in 
Anglo-Saxon  lagu,  Swedish  lag,  Danish  lov,  and 
which  means  that  which  "  lies  in  place,"  which 
is  in  due  order,  which  is  as  it  must  be.  The 
same  fundamental  meaning  we  have  in  the  Ger- 
man recht,  "  right,"  "  straight,"  and  in  the 
French  droit,  Italian  diritto,  Spanish  derecho, 
from  Latin  directum,  "  straight,"  "  right." 

Equity  is  from  Latin  aequus,  equal,  that  is, 
"equal  for  all,"  "just." 

Just,  justice,  jurisprudence,  jurisdiction^  and 
also  judge  (and  all  its  derivatives)  judicial, 
judgment,  to  adjudge,  prejudge,  etc.,  are  to  be 
referred  to  the  root  iu,  which  means  "  to  bind." 
From  this  root  we  have  the  Latin  ius,  which 
corresponds  to  our  "  law."  Law  means  prop- 
erly that  which  is  right ;  ius  considers  it  in  its 


136  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

social  effects,  and  means  that  "  which  binds." 
From  ius,  we  have  "just"  and  " justice,"  and 
"jurisprudence,"  "jurisdiction,"  etc.  Judge, 
French  juge,  is  in  Latin  iu-dex,  and  the  stem 
is  iu-dic,  he  who  "  tells,"  who  shows  the  law. 
Die  is  the  same  root  that  we  have  in  Latin  die- 
ere,  properly  "to  show,"  and  then  "  to  tell  "  ; 
in  in-dex,  in-dic-ate,  etc. 

The  word  chattel  which  is  so  common  in  law, 
is  merely  a  doublet  of  the  word  cattle,  (compare 
"  canal  "  and  "channel,"  "  chant  "  and  "  cant," 
etc).  In  Old  French  we  have  catel and  chatel, 
both  from  Low  Latin  capitalc  and  captale, 
"  capital,"  property,  goods.  Capital  is  the  Latin 
form,  and  cattle  and  chattel  are  the  Anglo- 
French  forms  of  the  same  word. 

This  process  by  which  a  word  meaning  per- 
sonal property  in  general,  came  to  be  applied 
to  a  single  kind  of  personal  property,  that  is  to 
that  personal  property  (cattle)  which  in  times 
of  undeveloped  commercial  and  industrial  life 
is  of  the  greatest  importance,  is  also  illus- 
trated by  the  evolution  of  the  meaning  of 
pccunia,  which  means  "money,"  and  which  we 
have  in  such  words  as  pecuniary  and  impccun- 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  137 


ious.  Pccunia  meant  first  "  wealth,"  and  then  the 
representative  of  wealth,  "  money"  ;  and  comes 
from  the  word  pecns,  "  cattle,"  which  is  almost 
the  only  form  of  wealth  with  primitive  peoples. 
Again  we  find  exactly  the  same  evolution  in 
the  meaning  of  the  word  fee.  Fee  is  in  Anglo- 
Saxon  feoh,  in  Gothic  faihu,  in  German^-//, 
and  corresponds  normally,  according  to  Grimm's 
law,  to  Latin  pecus,  Sanskrit/^//.  The  word 
fee,  then,  meant  properly  cattle,  and  then 
"property  "in  general,  and  then  money.  In 
this  sense,  however,  it  is  confined  to  the  money 
paid  to  certain  professions,  as  lawyers,  doctors, 
etc. 

Money,  Middle  English  monneie,  is  a  Latin 
word  from  moneta.  Moneta  was  a  surname  of 
Juno,  in  whose  temple  at  Rome  money  was 
coined.  Moneta  means  to  "warn,"  to  cause  to 
remember,  from  the  verb  monere,  to  warn. 
This  reminds  us  of  the  primeval  orifice  of  money; 

I"rhich  was  to  "  give  a  sign  of,"  to  "  represent  " 
ealth. 


IV. 

COMPARATIVE   GRAMMAR. 

THUS  far  we  have  examined  words  alone, 
each  word  detached  in  its  separate  exist- 
ence, and  have  shown  that  at  the  bottom  of 
every  word  a  root  may  be  found  which  has  a 
general  meaning.  But  now  the  question  arises, 
how  from  such  roots  are  words  formed  ?  For 
instance,  we  have  the  verb  correspond ;  but  from 
such  verb  how  do  we  form  the  noun  correspon- 
dence?  How  do  we  bridge  over  from  roots  to 
verbs,  and  nouns,  and  adjectives,  and  adverbs? 
We  say  that  we  add  to  the  root  certain  suf- 
fixes. What  are  these  suffixes?  whence  do  they 
come  ?  what  is,  if  any,  their  meaning  ?  Why, 
if  we  say  letter,  do  we  understand  one  certain 
object,  and  by  saying  letters,  convey  the  idea 
of  many  objects  of  that  kind  ?  What  myster- 
ious power  is  there  in  that^  to  multiply  objects 
before  our  consciousness  in  that  way? 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  139 

And  then,  what  do  we  mean  by  gender  ?  How 
is  it  that  in  French,  for  instance,  la  table,  "  the 
table,"  is  feminine,  while  le  chapeau,  "  the  hat," 
is  masculine  ?  And  how  can  we  make  a  root 
bend  its  meaning  to  certain  conditions  of  time 
and  mood  ?  I  say  I  love,  and  make  people  un- 
derstand I  speak  of  a  certain  state  of  my  heart 
at  this  present  instant ;  I  say  /  loved,  and  by 
addition  of  this  mere  d,  I  make  all  people,  who 
know  English,  understand  that  I  do  so  no  more, 
that  now  the  state  of  my  heart  is  changed.  In 
short,  we  have  thus  far  considered  roots  separ- 
ately, in  their  own  general  meaning,  but  it  re- 
mains for  us  to  study  how  they  are  so  changed 
as  to  express  all  those  relations  which  are  con- 
veyed by  our  speech. 

This  is  the  task  of  Grammar  rightly  under- 
stood. Many  people  have  an  imperfect  idea  of 
what  grammar  is.  They  speak  of  the  rules  of 
the  grammar  of  a  language  just  as  they 
would  of  the  laws  that  rule  the  country  where 
that  language  is  spoken.  They  have  a  vague 
idea  that  somebody  has  fixed  those  grammati- 
cal laws,  just  as  a  Congress  or  a  Parliament 
makes  other  laws,  and  they  look  upon  grammar 


140  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

as  a  fixed,  invariable  code,  from  which  none 
can  depart  under  penalty  of  being  taxed  with 
ignorance  and  held  up  to  ridicule. 

But  rules  of  grammar  are  dictated  by  nobody, 
or  at  least  by  no  particular  body.  Grammar  is 
simply  an  objective  science,  like  medicine, 
statistics  and  political  economy.  It  has  been 
treasured  up  by  the  long,  unremitting  observa- 
tions of  succeeding  generations.  Grammarians, 
or  rather,  before  such  name  was  made  possible, 
learned  men  of  any  kind  looked  at  the  phe- 
nomena of  the  language  they  were  speaking, 
observed  many  facts,  and  further  noticed  that 
many  of  these  facts  could  be  classified,  so  to 
say,  under  the  same  heading,  and  they  formu- 
lated the  results  of  their  observations  in  those 
principles  which  constitute  what  we  call  the 
grammar  of  a  language.  Thus,  for  instance,  if 
one  makes  the  English  language  the  object  of 
his  studies,  he  sees  that  to  constitute  an  En 
sentence,  many  words  are  required,  and  that  of 
those  words  some  are  constantly  employed  to 
indicate  an  object,  some  to  mean  a  quality, 
some  others  an  action,  and  in  this  way  by  and 
by  he  finds  that  he  can  classify  all  English 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  I41 

words  as  nouns,  adjectives,  verbs,  pronouns, 
adverbs,  articles,  etc. 

Further  on  he  sees  that  nouns,  like  dog,  letter, 
feather,  ivalker,  etc.,  mean  only  one  object  of  one 
kind  ;  but  dogs,  letters,  feathers,  walkers,  mean 
many  objects  of  that  same  kind.  Therefore  he 
formulates  his  rule  that,  in  the  English  lan- 
guage, to  form  a  plural  one  must  add  an  s 
to  the  singular.  He  finds,  however,  that  the 
plural  of  foot  is  not  foots,  but  feet ;  and  he 
records  this  as  an  exception. 

When  he  comes  to  the  verbs,  he  sees  that 
lovest,  for  instance,  is  referred  to  the  second 
person,  loves  to  the  third,  and  loved  refers  to 
the  past.  In  this  way  he  draws  a  paradigm  of 
English  conjugation.  Here,  too,  he  finds  verbs 
whose  conjugation  does  not  follow  the  major- 
ity, and  he  puts  them  aside  under  the  heading 
"  irregular  verbs." 

In  this  way  he  can  form  a  grammar  of  the 
English  language.  In  the  same  way  any  body 
could  compose  a  grammar  of  any  language,  by 
studying,  analyzing,  comparing  and  classifying 
diligently  all  the  modifications  which  the  words 
of  that  language  undergo. 


142  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

Step  out  of  your  door,  take  the  most  humble, 
unknown  dialect  that  is  spoken  in  your  neigh- 
borhood, and  you  can  draw  a  grammar  of  it 
just  as  good  as  the  grammar  of  the  most  noble 
language  in  the  world. 

But  it  is  self-evident  that  we  put  nothing  of 
our  own  into  the  language,  while  we  write  its 
grammar.  We  simply  observe  and  classify 
facts.  If,  instead  of  following  the  facts  dili- 
gently, we  try  to  make  them  bend  to  some  pre- 
conceived theory  of  our  own,  then  we  may  be 
sure  that  we  are  wrong,  and  the  results  of  our 
labor  will  be,  at  the  best,  useless. 

Where  are  to  be  sought  the  materials  neces- 
sary in  order  to  write  the  grammar  of  a  lan- 
guage ?  Of  course  we  must  look  at  the  lan- 
guage as  it  is  spoken  and  written  (when  it  is 
written)  by  the  majority  of  those  who  know  it 
best ;  or  by  those  who,  by  their  education  and 
social  opportunities,  are  presumed  to  know  it 
best.  Because  in  language,  as  in  many  other 
things,  best  is  simply  that  which  is  used  by  the 
best  people  ;  that  is,  by  the  people  best  edu- 
cated. We  have  no  other  criterion  to  test  the 
excellence  of  language  than  this. 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  143 

Thus,  when  we  say  that  this  or  that  is  a  rule  of 
English  grammar,  we  mean  simply  that  such  is 
the  use  of  the  people  who  know  English  best; 
and  a  violation  of  a  grammatical  rule  consists 
in  departing  from  such  use. 

And  as  use  changes  in  language  as  well  as  in 
every  thing  else,  it  follows  that  grammars 
change.  When  we  speak  of  English  grammar 
we  do  not  mean  the  English  grammar  of  two  or 
three  centuries  ago,  but  the  present  grammar — 
the  grammar  according  to  the  best  usage  of 
nowadays.  The  language  of  -Shakespeare  is 
English :  still  its  grammar  is  not  exactly  the 
grammar  which  we  now  follow.  Even  more 
different  is  the  grammar  of  Chaucer,  who  still 
wrote  in  English. 

Use,  then,  changes,  and  grammar,  which  is  a 
mere  record  of  it,  must  follow  it  and  change 
accordingly. 

Hence  the  idea  follows  that  we  can  have  two 
kinds  of  grammar:  for  instance,  we  can  take 
the  English  language  as  it  is  spoken  at  a  given 
period  of  time  (to-day,  for  example),  and 
formulate  its  grammar.  This  is  the  kind  of 
grammar  that  we  study  at  school  ;  that  is, 


144  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

the  grammar  of  our  own  language  as  it  is  best 
spoken  and  written  in  our  own  days.  But  we 
can  also  take  the  English  language  at  its  begin- 
ning, for  instance,  when  it  is  developed  far 
enough  from  Anglo-Saxon  to  be  entirely  dis- 
tinguished from  that  language,  and  study 
what  its  grammar  was  then,  and  follow  its 
changes,  step  by  step,  from  century  to  century, 
recording  every  change  in  the  declension,  in  the 
conjugation,  in  the  syntax,  down  to  the  pres- 
ent day.  This  would  be  a  historical  grammar. 
Thus  one  who  is  given  to  political  studies, 
can  undertake  the  study  of  the  English  consti- 
tution as  it  is  now ;  what  are  the  rights  of  the 
Commons,  what  those  of  the  House  of  Lords; 
how  both  houses  are  constituted,  assembled  and 
dissolved ;  who  appoints  the  ministers,  what 
are  the  powers  of  the  queen,  etc.  Or  other- 
wise he  may  choose  to  go  back  as  far  as  possi- 
ble in  the  history  of  the  English  people,  and 
follow,  step  by  step,  that  long  series  of  mag- 
nanimous struggles,  of  waverings,  compromises, 
wars  and  revolutions,  debates  and  legislation, 
out  of  which  the  present  constitution  of  England 
has  risen. 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  145 


Naturally  enough  this  second  course  will 
afford  a  far  deeper,  far  more  philosophical 
knowledge  of  the  English  constitution  than  the 
former. 

In  the  same  way  historical  grammar  affords 
a  far  deeper  insight  into  the  nature  of  a 
language  than  the  grammar  which  is  com- 
monly studied,  and  which  we  may  call 
the  empirical  grammar.  This  tells  us  sim- 
ply the  fact  that  in  order  to  denote 
many  things  we  must  add  to  a  noun  an 
s,  and  in  order  to  make  a  verb  mean  a  past 
tense  we  must  add  to  its  root  a  d.  But  histor- 
ical grammar  shows  us  whence  that  s  and  that 
d  come,  what  was  their  primitive  form  and 
meaning,  and  the  successive  changes  by  which 
they  were  reduced  to  their  present  form.  In 
this  way  the  study  of  grammar  from  a  merely 
material  statement  of  facts,  and  oftentimes  a 
tiresome  drudgery  to  be  gone  through  by  dint 
of  mechanical  memory,  is  raised  to  the  dignity 
of  a  scientific  study  of  the  utmost  interest  and 
importance. 

But,  in  fact,  it  is  impossible  to    follow   out 
this   historical    method    of     grammatical     re- 


146  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF   WORDS. 

searches,  without  resorting  to  comparisons  ;  thus 
many  times  it  is  impossible  to  step  from  one 
French  form  to  the  following  one  without 
bringing  in  as  a  term  of  comparison  a  form  of 
Provencal,  or  Italian,  or  Spanish,  or  other  kin- 
dred language.  Generally  we  can  not  make  a 
complete  study  of  the  grammar  of  a  dialect 
without  keeping  our  eyes  also  upon  the 
cognate  dialects.  Thus  the  historical  method 
is  linked  with  the  comparative  method  ;  his- 
torical grammar  with  comparative  grammar. 
And  fortunately  it  is  so,  as  we  are  thereby 
obliged  to  call  in  to  our  help  time  and  space, 
to  look  back  into  the  records  of  the  past  and 
widely  around  us  among  neighboring  languages, 
as  far  as  directions  of  logic  and  kinship  of  lan- 
guages permit. 

In  this  way  we  come  to  the  idea  of  historico- 
comparative  grammar,  which  is  one  of  the  glor- 
ies of  this  century,  and  the  main  branch  of 
the  science  of  language. 

We  may  now  inquire  what  constitutes  prop- 
erly the  subject  of  grammar  in  general.  Gram- 
mar deals  with  :  I,  the  formation  of  words;  2, 
accidences  of  words  ;  3,  syntax  of  words  ; — that 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  147 

is,  roots  being  given,  grammar  studies  :  I,  how 
from  those  roots  we  make  nouns,  adjectives, 
verbs,  and  the  other  so  called  parts  of  speech  ; 
2,  when  such  words  are  formed,  grammar 
studies  their  accidences  or  modifications,  that  is 
how,  for  instance,  a  noun  meaning  one  object 
is  made  to  signify  many ;  how  one  verb 
comes  to  express  the  different  relations  of 
time  and  mood ;  3,  when  all  this  is  done, 
grammar  has  to  study  how  such  words  are  com- 
bined in  order  to  convey  our  ideas  clearly  and 
fully. 

We  may  for  the  present  leave  out  this  third 
part  and  bring  our  considerations  to  bear  on 
the  first  two,  the  making  of  words  and  their 
accidences. 

The  ways  of  attaining  these  two  results 
differ  widely  in  different  languages.  In  some 
languages  the  proceedings  are  very  simple  : 
they  have  no  accidence,  no  inflection  whatever. 
The  Chinese  language,  for  instance,  nevercauses 
its  roots  to  undergo  the  slightest  modification. 
We  may  say  that  in  Chinese  roots  have  been 
petrified  in  their  primitive  form,  and  no  further 
change  has  been  wrought  in  them.  In  Chinese 


148  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

all  the  relations  which  we  express  by  declension 
and  conjugation,  are  signified  by  the  collocation 
of  words.  Thus  ngb  ta  n\  means  "  I  beat  thee  "  ; 
but  nl  ta  ngb  means  "  thou  beatest  me."  Ngb 
gin  means  "  a  bad  man  "  ;  gin  ngb  means  "the 
man  is  bad."  (M.  Miiller,  i.  p.  333.)  In  these 
languages,  of  which  Chinese  is  the  prototype, 
every  word  is  at  the  same  time  a  root,  a  noun, 
an  adjective,  a  verb  ;  and  their  words  being  all 
of  one  syllable,  they  are  called  the  monosyllabic 
languages.  It  is  self-evident  that  in  such 
languages  there  is  no  trace  of  what  we  would 
properly  call  a  grammar ;  no  declension,  no 
conjugation.  Still  they  are  able  to  express  all 
the  relations  of  tense,  of  mood,  etc.,  which  we 
express  with  our  own  languages. 

Next  to  these  languages  there  come  the 
agglutinative  languages.  In  these  we  find 
already  two  or  more  roots  grouped  together, 
but  in  such  a  way  that  one  of  them,  the  princi- 
pal one,  is  never  modified  ;  we  can  see  it  in  the 
composition  of  the  word  as  clearly  as  if  it  were 
isolated.  One  of  the  best  and  most  important 
specimens  of  this  class  is  the  Turkish  langui 

In  Turkish,  the  root  which  contains  the  fun- 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  149 

damental  meaning  of  the  word,  is  never 
changed,  never  broken  in  any  way. 

Thus  sev,  in  Turkish,  conveys  the  idea  of 
"  love  "  in  its  most  general  sense.  From  sev  we 
have  the  verb  sev  mek,  "  to  love,"  and  the  sub- 
stantive sev-gu,  "love."  Sev-er  means  "  lover." 
Sen  is  "  thou,"  and  siz  is  "  you  " ;  "  thou  lovest  " 
is  in  Turkish  sev-er-scn  (lover-thou) ;  "  you 
love  "  is  sev-er-siz  (lover-you). 

From  sev-mek  "  to  love,"  by  addition  of  in,  we 
make  a  reflexive  verb :  sev-in-mek  "  to  love 
oneself,"  to  rejoice,  to  be  happy.  If  we  add  ish, 
we  have  a  reciprocal  verb :  sev-ish-mck,  "  to 
love  one  another."  Now  each  one  of  these 
verbs  can  be  made  passive  by  the  addition  of 
il:  sev-mek,  "  to  love";  sev-il-mek,  "to  be 
loved  "  ;  sev-in-mek,  "  to  rejoice  "  ;  sev-in-il-mek, 
"to  be  rejoiced  at  "  ;  scv-ish-mck,  sev-ish-il-viek, 
which  can  not  be  translated. 

Many  other  verbs  can  be  formed,  but  the 
root  sev  remains  throughout  unaltered  and 
evident. 

These  languages  are  called  agglutinative 
because  their  roots  are  not  kept  separated  as 
in  Chinese,  nor  fused  together  as  in  the  Indo- 


150  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF   WORDS. 

European  languages,  but  they  are,  as  it  were, 
glued  together,  so  that  we  can  see  clearly  their 
links  and  joints. 

Finally  we  have  those  languages  in  which 
both  roots  are  so  intimately  united  as  to  make 
it  very  difficult  to  separate  them,  without  long 
and  scientific  preparation  and  diligent  analysis. 
These  are  called  inflectional  languages,  and 
comprehend  the  Indo-European  and  the  Semi- 
tic family.  We  call  them  inflectional  languages 
because  of  the  inflections  to  which  they  submit 
their  roots. 

When  we  reduce  these  languages  to  their 
lowest  terms,  so  to  speak,  we  find  in  them  two 
kinds  of  roots: 

1st,  the  predicative  roots,  which  convey  a 
general  idea,  which  predicate  something.  Of 
this  kind  are  the  largest  number  of  roots.  All 
the  roots  we  came  across  in  our  etymological 
researches,  belong  to  this  category  ;  2nd,  the 
other  kind  of  roots  are  demonstrative  roots ;  and 
are  used  in  conjunction  with  the  predicative 
roots  in  order  to  modify  their  meaning,  so  as 
to  adapt  it  to  all  the  relations  which  we  want  to 
express.  For  instance,  in  the  Indo-European  Ian- 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  151 

guageswehave  a  root  as  which  has  the  general 
meaning  of  "  be,"  but  when  our  forefathers 
wanted  to  modify  that  general  meaning  so  as  to 
refer  it  to  the  first  person,  and  make  it  mean  "  I 
am,"  what  could  they  do  ?  They  resorted  to  a  de- 
monstrative root  which  is  applied  to  denote  the 
first  person,  and  they  said,  in  Sanskrit,  for  in- 
stance, as-mi,  which  means  properly  "  be  I."  In 
the  same  way  they  added  to  the  root  as  the 
demonstrative  roots  denoting  the  second  or 
third  person,  to  make  out  the  meaning  "  thou 
art,"  "he  is."  They  did  the  same  with  any 
other  verb.  They  did  this  also  in  order  to  make 
nouns  express  those  different  relations  which 
in  some  languages  are  expressed  by  cases  and 
which  we  represent  by  "prepositions."  The  desin- 
ences of  the  cases  are  nothing  but  demonstrative 
roots  ;  roots  whose  primitive  form  it  is  now  very 
difficult  to  restore,  but  whose  existence  we  have 
no  reason  to  doubt.  The  only  difference  be- 
tween our  prepositions  and  the  desinences  of 
cases  is  this,  that  the  former  go  before  the  noun, 
the  latter  after.  In  Sanskrit,  for  instance,  we 
have  a  locative  case,  and  there  are  traces  of  it  in 
Latin  and  Greek.  The  desinence  of  this  case  is  /, 


152  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

very  likely  the  root  from  which  we  have  the  Latin 
preposition  in.  So  hrid  means  "  the  heart  "  ; 
hrid-i  means  "in  the  heart."  Now,  what  differ- 
ence  is  there  between  these  two  expressions,  but 
the  collocation  of  the  determining  element  ? 

In  the  same  way  all  cases  were  formed.  Cer- 
tain demonstrative  roots  were  added  to  the 
predicative  roots.  In  this  conjunction  both 
roots  lost  their  identity  ;  their  sound  underwent 
great  changes  ;  but,  thanks  to  the  comparative 
method,  we  have  been  enabled  to  separate 
them,  to  see  how  they  were  put  together,  and 
what  is  the  function  of  either  of  them. 

This,  if  we  consider  a  moment,  is  indeed  a 
great  result.  Grammar,  which  to  the  looker-on 
seems  such  an  unsolvable  problem,  such  a  mys- 
tery, is  by  these  scientific  researches  laid  bare 
before  us  ;  we  see  into  its  features,  just  as  we 
examine  animal  and  vegetable  tissues  through 
the  microscope.  We  see  that  this  marvelous 
concretion  of  cases  and  numbers,  tenses  and 
moods,  has  been  worked  out  laboriously  and  ela- 
borately for  centuries  and  centuries,  in  a  very 
simple  way,  by  addition.  A  demonstrative 
element  was  added  to  a  predicative  cle- 


w< 

: 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  15 3 

ment.  At  first,  as  in  Chinese,  both  ele- 
ments retained  clearly  their  identity,  their  own 
personality,  so  to  speak  ;  afterwards,  as  in  Turk- 
ish, only  the  first  element,  the  most  important, 
remained  unchanged,  while  the  others  under- 
went some  slight  alterations.  Finally,  in  the 
languages  of  the  superior  races,  both  elements 
were  cast  together,  both  losing  in  the  new 
suiting  word  their  primitive  form  and  iden- 
ity. 

We  make  now,  with  the  utmost  facility,  num- 
bers of  thousands  of  millions  of  billions,  and 
our  mind  can  grasp  such  numbers  easily,  if  not 
with  absolute  precision,  as  soon  as  they  are 
enunciated,  or  written,  before  us.  Still  we 
know  that  every  system  of  numeration  grew 
out  of  very  humble  beginnings  ;  men  began 
to  count  by  their  fingers,  and  it  took  cen- 
turies before  they  were  able  to  compre- 
hend a  number  as  large  as  ten.  Even  to-day 
there  are  tribes  who  can  not  count  further  than 
two,  three  or  four  ;  after  these  numbers  they 
say  "  many  "  or  countless.  But  by  and  by,  with 
the  progress  of  civilization,  with  the  develop- 
ment of  the  human  mind,  a  system  of  counting 


154  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

wasdeveloped  which  the  poor  uncultivated  mind 
of  the  savage  is  not  even  able  to  understand. 

In  the  same  way,  by  slow  but  steady  improve- 
ments, through  the  simplest  means,  were  devel- 
oped the  complexities  of  language  of  which 
our  grammars  are  the  exponents. 

As  an  instance  from  our  own  language  how 
the  most  complex  relations  are  expressed  by 
the  simple  addition  of  one  root  to  another,  take 
the  English  future  :  I  shall  love.  Here  the  com- 
position, or  rather  the  use  of  two  roots,  is  self- 
evident.  The  same  we  have  in  German  :  "Ich 
werde  lieben."  In  French  the  puzzle  be- 
gins :  we  have  only  one  word  :  aimcrai.  But 
historical  and  comparative  researches  show  us 
that  also  in  ainierai  we  have  two  words,  which 
were  once  written  separately.  In  French  as  well 
as  in  Italian  and  Spanish,  the  future  is  made  of 
the  infinitive  of  the  verb  and  the  present  of  "  to 
have."  We  say  "  I  shall  love  "  ;  the  new  Latin 
languages  say:  "  I  -have  to  love."  Aimcr-ai,  T 
shall  love :  aimcr-as,  thou  shalt  love ;  ai- 
nicr-a,  he  shall  love,  (aimer  to  love  ;  <?/,  I  have  ; 
as,  thou  hast  ;  a,  he  has).  Even  an  elementary 
study  of  French  will  show  that,  however  irrcgu- 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 


155 


lar  a  verb  may  be,  its  future  is  always  ending 
in  at,  as,  a ;  because  the  second  element  is 
always  the  present  of  avoir,  "  to  have." 

In  Italian  the  singular  of  the  present  of  "  to 
have,"  avere,  is  b,  ai,  a  (written  also  Iwjiai,  /ia), 
and  all  the  Italian  verbs,  whether  regular  or 
not,  end  in  the  future  in  b,  ai,  a  ;  for  instance, 
udire,  to  hear ;  udir-b,  I  shall  hear,  udir-ai,  udir-a, 
tc. 

In  Spanish  we  have  he,  has,  ha,  (I  have,  thou 
hast,  he  has)  where  the  h  is  not  pronounced  ; 
amar,  to  love,  makes  in  the  future :  amar-d,  amar- 
r,  amar-d,  etc  ;  and  so  all  the  Spanish  verbs. 

In  Latin  we  have  ama-bo,  "  I  shall  love,"  which 
through  comparative  analysis,  can  be  shown  to 
be  a  compound  of  the  root  am,  of  the  verb  aw- 
are, to  love,  and  the  root  bhu  which  means 
"  to  be  "  ;  so  that  amabo  is  properly  a  compound 
word  and  means  "  I  am  to  love." 

We  could  push  this  investigation  further  in 
other  languages,  always  with  the  same  result. 
We  would  always  find  the  idea  of  the  future 
expressed  by  the  addition  of  one  root  to 
another. 

Let    us  now  turn  to  the   idea  of  the  past. 


I56  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF   WORDS. 

We  have  in  English,  /  loved.  Where  does  this 
mysterious  d  come  from,  which  works  so  great 
a  change  in  the  meaning  of  our  root  ?  Of 
course  we  can  not  make  any  thing  out  of  it,  as 
long  as  we  consider  this  word  alone.  It  would 
be  just  as  bewildering  as  to  attempt  to  find  the 
meaning  of  "  Kittie  "  without  looking  at  the 
other  forms  of  the  word.  We  must  inquire, 
we  must  look  back  and  around.  We  must  ac- 
cumulate facts  upon  facts,  in  order  to  make  our 
observations  trustworthy. 

In  order  to  give  reasonable  width  to  our  re- 
searches, we  must  recall  the  classification  of 
the  Indo-European  languages,  and  the  position 
of  English  therein.  We  have  seen  that  one  of 
the  most  important  branches  of  that  family  is 
the  Teutonic,  which  is  divided  into  three  other 
branches:  I.  Scandinavian;  II.  High  Ger- 
man; III.  Low  German. 

I.  To  the  Scandinavian   division  belong  the 
following  tongues :  I.  Icelandic  ;  2.  Norwegian  ; 
3.  Swedish  ;  4.  Danish.     The   old  Norwegian, 
sometimes  also  the  old  Icelandic,  is  called  Old 
Norse. 

II.  To  the  High  German  division  belong: 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  157 

1.  Old  High  German  (comprising  the  Thur- 
ingian,   Franconian,   Swabian,  Alsacian,  Swiss 
and  Bavarian  dialects)  spoken  from  the  begin- 
ning of  the  eighth  to  the  middle  of  the  eleventh 
century. 

2.  The  Middle  High  German,  spoken  in  upper 
Germany  from   the  twelfth  to  the  end  of  the 
fifteenth  century. 

3.  Modern  High  German,   spoken  from  the 
end    of  the  fifteenth   century    to   the    present 
time. 

III.    The    Low    German    division    compre- 
hends : 

a.  Gothic,  the  oldest  of  the  Teutonic  dialects. 
Its  oldest  record  is  found  in  the   translation  of 
the  Bible  by  Bishop  Ulphilas  (born  318,  died 
388),  a  great  part  of  which,  however,  has  per- 
ished. 

b.  Frisian,  preserved  in  some  documents  of 
the  twelfth  and  thirteenth  centuries,  and  still 
spoken    in    Friesland,  along  the  coasts   of  the 
North  Sea,  between  the  Weser  and  the  Elbe, 
and  in  Holstein  and  Sleswick. 

c.  Dutch. 

d.  Flemish. 


1 58  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

e.  Old  Saxon. 

f.  English. 

It  follows  from  such  classification,  that 
in  our  inquiries  into  English  grammar,  we 
must  first  trace  back  the  English  words  to 
their  oldest  forms  in  the  English  language, 
then  compare  them  with  the  corresponding 
forms  in  the  other  Low  German  languages, 
then  in  the  Scandinavian  and  High  German, 
then  in  the  whole  Indo-European  field.  In 
order  to  understand  the  form  I  loved,  we  must, 
first  of  all,  take  notice  of  a  discovery  of  com- 
parative grammar,  that  we  have  so-called  strong 
verbs  and^ueak  verbs. 

All  strong  verbs  (to  which  category  belong 
the  generality  of  the  so-called  irregular  verbs 
in  English)  originally  formed  their  past  tense 
simply  by  repeating  t\\tir  root.  We  see  that  here, 
too,  the  process  is  very  simple.  Thus,  from 
the  root  bhug,  to  "  bend,"  we  had  the  root  of 
the  past,  bhug-bkug  ;  then  by  shortening  the 
first  part,  bhn-bhng  ;  to  this,  the  personal  end- 
ing being  added,  we  have  the  Sanskrit  bhu- 
bJiog~a,  which  is  the  past  of  the  root  bhug  in 
Sanskrit,  and  means,  "  I  bent."  In  the  same 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  159 

way  in  Latin  from  the  root  fall,  "cheat,"  we 
have,  with  slight  and  normal  change  of  vowel, 
the  past  fe-felU  (from  fel-fell-i).  But  in  the 
course  of  time  these  forms  were  worn  out 
more  and  more ;  and  it  became,  by  analogy,  a 
rule  that  the  middle  consonant  disappeared; 
fug,  to  escape,  gave  "  fug-fug-i  ;  "  "  fu-fug-i ;  " 
"  fu-ug-i ;  "  "fiigi;"  lescaped  \fac,  to  make,  gave 
"  fac-fac-i  ;  "  "  fa-fac-i  ;  "  fa-ic-i ;  "  fc-ci  "  I  made. 

This  same  process  we  can  follow  in  English. 
The  past  of  to  hold  is  in  Gothic  hai-hald  ;  then 
we  come  to  ha-hald,  ha-hild,  hailed,  held ;  Old 
High  German,  hei-halt,  Jii-alt,  Modern  Ger- 
man hielt.  The  Gothic  hait-an,  to  call, 
makes  in  the  past  hai-hait.  The  English  /light, 
"  was  called,"  is  the  past  of  the  Old  English 
hat-an,  and  corresponds  to  the  Gothic  hai-hait. 

Gothic  lct-an,  to  let,  past  lai-lot.  Gothic 
laik-an  to  leap,  past  lai-laik.  The  English  did 
is  the  past  made  in  the  same  way  of  the  verb 
do.  Did  was  in  Old  English  di-de ;  in  Old 
Saxon  de-da;  it  corresponds  to  Latin  "de-dt," 
from  "  do." 

The  weak  verbs  form  their  past  by  adding  to 
their  roots  the  past  of  the  verb  "  to  do."  Thus 


160  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

in  Gothic  from  the  verb  uasi-an,  to  save,  we 
have  the  past  nasi-da  \\l\\c\\  stands  for  the  more 
complete  form  nasi-deda,  (I  did  save);  in  fact, 
in  plural  we  find  the  full  form  nasi-dedum,  we 
did  save.  In  Old  English  this  verb  is  ncri-an 
and  its  past  is  nere-de  for  ncrc-didc.  We  have 
also  luf-o-de,  loved.  Loved  stands  for  the 
full  form,  I  love-dide,  that  is,  "  I  did  love." 

Thus  we  see  that  the  way  of  forming  the 
past  of  a  verb,  however  mysterious  it  may 
seem  now,  was  at  its  beginning  quite  simple. 
Either  the  root  was  repeated,  or  the  verb  do 
(in  its  reduplicate  form)  was  added  thereto. 

With  regard  to  the  change  of  the  meaning  of 
a  word  from  singular  to  plural,  the  evolution  has 
also  been  simple  and  slow;  first  we  had  a  number, 
called  dual,  to  mean  two  objects ;  then  we  find 
traces  in  some  languages  of  a  number  denoting 
three  objects  ;  finally  we  reach  the  plural. 
nifying  an  indefinite  quantity  of  objects.  Wo 
can  see  that  the  suffixes  for  the  formation  of 
the  plural  were  more  substantial,  so  to  speak, 
than  they  are  at  present ;  even  in  English  we 
find  suffixes  like  as,  us,  instead  of  a  simple  s ; 
but  what  those  suffixes  were  properly  and  what 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  161 


• 


they  meant,  thus  far,  unluckily,  has  not  been 

certained. 

More  satisfactory  are  the  explanations  of  the 
origin  of  genders.  The  primitive  man  could 
not  obtain  any  notion  of  gender  save  from 
man  and  woman,  male  and  female;  and  by  the 
process  which  is  common  to  uncivilized  people 
and  to  children  of  transferring  to  every  thing 
in  the  world  their  own  conceptions  and  their 
own  life,  men  came  to  represent  to  themselves 
ven  inanimate  objects  as  clad  with  a  certain 

rsonality,  and  accordingly  these  objects  were 
istinguished  in  gender,  whether  they  were 
conceived  as  male  or  female  beings.  This 
process  applied  at  first  only  to  some  inanimate 
objects,  to  those  that  were  nearest,  or  in  any 
way  most  important.  By  and  by,  through 
analogy,  it  was  applied  to  all  things  in  the 
world.  Analogy  rested  on  the  meaning  of 
words  or,  especially,  on  their  endings ;  but 
when,  in  the  wear  and  tear  of  language,  the 
termination  was  worn  out  wholly  or  partly, 
even  this  thread  to  distinction  of  genders 
became  lost,  and  we  arrive  at  such  a  state  of 
things  as  we  find  w^ith  German  genders, 


1 6  2  THE  PHILOSOPH  Y  OF  WORDS. 

where,  to  say  the  least,  confusion  reigns. 
In  this  respect  English  is  far  more  advanced 
and  logical  than  any  other  of  the  leading 
languages.  In  English  the  grammatical  dis- 
tinction of  gender  has  been  almost  entirely 
suppressed  ;  the  idea  of  gender  is  conveyed 
simply  by  the  meaning  of  the  word  itself. 
Only  this  process  has  perhaps  been  carried  too 
far,  and  sometimes  we  are  obliged  to  resort  to 
that  clumsy//*  and  s/ie("  he-goat,"  "  she-goat  "). 
"  It  is  an  idiom,"  Marsh  says,  "  common  to  the 
Scandinavians  and  the  English,  which  in 
awkwardness  surpasses  any  thing  to  be  met 
with  in  any  other  speech." 

It  remains  now  to  look  at  those  various 
suffixes  which  enter  into  the  formation  of 
nouns  and  adjectives  and  adverbs. 

We  have  already  had  occasion  to  see  that 
it  is  a  particular  advantage  of  the  English 
language  to  be  able  to  draw  suffixes  from  two 
main  sources :  from  the  Teutonic  and  from 
the  Latin  branch  of  the  Indo-European  fam- 
ily. 

Suffixes  were  once  independent  words,  which 
by  being  added  to  principal  roots  to  modify 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 


their  meaning,  gradually  lost  their  inde- 
pendence and  became  mere  signs  of  relation, 
and  were  employed  as  formative  elements. 
Unluckily  this  process  of  disintegration  began 
so  long  ago  that  in  many  cases  it  is,  for  the 
present  at  least,  impossible  to  find  out  what 
their  original  meaning  was.  Some  of  them, 
however,  we  can  easily  trace  back  to  inde- 
pendent words  with  a  specific  meaning.  The 
suffix  fy,  for  instance,  was  in  Old  English  lie, 
Gothic leiks,  and  meant  properly /*&v — strong-ly 
(strong-like),  man-ly  (man-like).  In  many  cases 
we  have  the  full  form  like  (war-like,  dove-like). 
The  suffix  wise  is  identical  with  the  substantive 
wise ;  otherwise  (in  another  wise,  mode), 
nowise,  likewise. 

Dom,  Old  English  dom,  German  thiim, 
means  authority,  judgment,  dominion  : — thral- 
dom, wisdom,  dukedom,  kingdom. 

Fare  means  way,  course  : — thorough-fere, 
welfare. 

Hood,  head  (Old  English  hdd,  state,  rank, 
character) ;  manhood,  childhood,  godhead, 
maidenhead. 

Rick  (Old    English   rice,    power,   dominion), 


1 64  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

bishoprick ;  Old  English  kinerick=kine-riche, 
kine=royal. 

Ship  (Old  English  scipe,  j-^/,?=shape,  man- 
ner, quality),  friendship,  lordship,  hardship. 

Wright  (Old  English  ivyrtha,  wrihtc,  work- 
man), wheelwright,  playwright. 

Fold  (Old  English  feald,  fold);  twofold, 
manifold. 

Fid  (Old  English  ful,  full),  hateful,  wilful 
(Old  English  willesful). 

Less  (Old  English  teas,  Gothic  laus],  "  loose 
from  "  ;  it  has  no  connection  with  less,  the 
comparative  of  little  : — fearless,  joyless,  guilt- 
less. 

Some  (Old  English  sum,  Old  High  German 
sam,  same,  like),  fulsome,  irksome,  wholesome, 
etc. 

For  the  suffixes  derived  from  the  Romance 
languages,  generally  we  can  do  nothing  more 
than  retrace  them  to  their  Latin  form,  and  in 
many  cases  to  Sanskrit,  Greek,  and  other 
languages  akin.  But  very  seldom  can  we  show 
what  their  primitive  form  was  and  wli.it  their 
meaning.  A  satisfactory  enumeration  and 
analysis  of  these  suffixes  can  be  found  in 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  165 

Morris's     "  Historical     Outlines    of      English 

Lccidence,"  to  which  the  reader  is  referred. 
Thus,  to  sum  up  this  chapter,  we  have  seen 
:hat  the  idea  of  grammar,  which  we  owe  to  the 
science  of  language,  is  by  far  larger  and  higher 
;han  that  which  is  commonly  accepted.  Gram- 
mar is  the  study  of  the  means  by  which  sounds 

rith  a  merely  general  meaning  (commonly 
called  roots)  are  brought  to  express  all  the 
relations  and  peculiarities  of  our  thoughts. 

'hese  means  are  not  the  same  all  over  the 
world  :  they  differ  widely  in  all  languages.  In 

•me  languages  (the  monosyllabic)  the  roots 
are  simply  put  one  after  the  other,  their  general 

leaning  being  modified  by  their  collocation. 
In  other  languages  (the  agglutinative)  two 
or  more  roots  are  put  together,  but  in  such  a 
way  as  to  preserve  the  principal  root  unaltered. 
Other  and  more  complicated  languages  (the 
inflectional)  mould  together  in  one  body  their 
predicative  and  demonstrative  roots. 

This  distinction  however  is  not  so  absolute 
and  iron-bound  in  nature  as  we  might  imagine. 
There  is  a  gradual  ascendance  from  the  first  to 
the  last  type  of  languages,  and  as  our  researches 


1 66  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS, 

in  the  field  of  monosyllabic  and  agglutinative 
languages  make  headway,  every  thing  seems  to 
point  out  that  new  links  will  be  found  which 
will  show  unmistakably  a  continuous  con- 
catenation in  the  development  of  the  various 
human  languages  ;  we  have  traces  of  agglu- 
tination in  the  monosyllabic  languages  ;  traces 
of  monosyllabism  and  inflection  in  the  agglu- 
tinative ;  and  traces  of  agglutination  in  the 
inflectional  languages.  In  fact,  in  nowise  is  it 
possible  to  explain  the  complex  constitution 
of  the  inflectional  languages,  save  by  admitting 
that  they  have  developed  slowly,  through  secular 
improvements  and  the  experience  of  genera- 
tions, from  the  humblest  stages  of  speech.  All 
analogies  point  to  the  same  gradual  develop- 
ment in  language,  as  we  find  in  the  fauna,  the 
flora,  the  suns,  and  all  things  in  the  universe. 

The  formation  of  dual  and  plural  numbers, 
the  distinction  of  persons  and  genders,  the 
formation  of  the  past  and  future  tenses,  appear 
to  be  the  result  of  very  simple  processes,  and 
quite  analogous  with  those  going  on  under  our 
own  eyes  in  the  most  imperfect  and  rude 
tongues  of  men.  The  progress  of  language,  it 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 


167 


iay  be  useful  to  repeat  it,  has  been  similar  to 
te   development  of    mathematics.      It  began 
from  the  humblest   origin.     That  day,  when  a 
lan  pointing  out  one  finger,  and  then  another, 
lined  the  conception  of  both  fingers  together, 
witnessed    a    great  step.      When   the   human 
lind   became    able   to    have  the    conception 
if    the    number    two,    an  abyss   was    bridged 
over.     It  was  then  made   possible  to  go  to  the 
:onception  of  three,  and  then  of   four,   and  so 
>n,   until,  by  and    by,  with    the    accumulated 
:perience  of  centuries,  a  system  of  numeration 
wrought  out,  and  arithmetic  and  algebra, 
ind  the  wonders  of  abstract  calculations  which 
reigh  the  stars  and  measure  the  unseen.     The 
larvelous  speculations  of  Kepler  and  Newton, 
not  less  than  the  winged  words  of  Homer  and 
:he  language  which  clothes  the  fiery  thoughts 
>f  Shakespeare  and  Dante,  were  developed  by 
degrees,  slowly,  through  the  course  of  centuries, 
from  such  imperfect  and  rudimentary  elements 
of  speech  as  fall  now-a-days  from  the  uncouth 
lips  of  the  savage. 

Such   is  the   idea  of  language  for  which  we 
are  indebted  to  the  linguistic  science. 


1 68  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

I  suppose  that  now  the  reader  may  feel 
somewhat  interested  to  know  how  this  science 
began,  and  how  it  has  been  developed.  A  brief 
sketch  of  its  history  follows,  which  has  been 
purposely  delayed. 


V. 

OUTLINES   OF   THE   HISTORY  OF  THE   SCIENCE 
OF   LANGUAGE.      ' 


science  of    language   is   one    of    the 
youngest    sciences.       It    is    hardly    one 
century    old.       Before     that    a     considerable 

tnount  of  speculation,  rather  than  of  investiga- 
on,  had  been  devoted  to  language.     But  those 
andering    and    fragmentary    pursuits    could 
ardly  deserve  the  name  of  science. 
In  the  history  of  European  culture,  the  first 
oteworthy  observations  on  language  we  meet 
ith     in     the     Greek     philosophers.      Greek 
hilosophy,  which  turned  its  powerful  eye  on 
every  thing  in  the  world,  could  not  let  such  an 
important   part  of  our  life  as  language  go  un- 
observed.     The   attainments,   however,    were 
not  very  great.     Plato  and  Aristotle  knew  the 
distinction  of  nouns  and  verbs,  of  conjunctions 
and  articles.     But   their  analysis    of  language 
did  not  go  further  than  that.     The  great  work- 


1 70  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

•  shop  in  which  language  was  studied  and 
analyzed,  and  grammar  was  made  as  complete, 
in  the  main,  as  that  which  we  study  in  our  day, 
was  the  school  of  the  Alexandrian  critics. 

Alexandria,  in  Egypt,  as  it  is  well  known, 
was  for  some,  time  a  great  centre  of  learning. 
Eastern  and  western  knowledge  met  there,  and 
were  submitted  to  searching  criticism.  One  of 
the  most  prominent  works  of  the  Alexandrian 
savants  was  the  diligent  study  and  editing  of 
the  great  masterpieces  of  Greek  literature,  and 
especially  of  the  Homeric  poems.  Such  work, 
of  course,  could  not  be  done  without  a  good 
deal  of  philological  investigations.  They  were 
the  first  to  divide  language  into  those  parts 
(nouns,  pronouns,  verbs,  adjectives,  etc.)  which 
we  now  study  in  our  grammars.  But  although 
they  worked  out  all  the  materials  of  a  grammar, 
still  they  did  not  give  us  a  complete  and 
systematic  grammar  of  the  Greek  language. 
The  first  Greek  grammar  is  due  to  Dionysius 
Thrax,  formerly  a  pupil  in  Alexandria,  and 
afterward  a  teacher  of  Greek  in  Rome.  In 
order  to  help  his  pupils,  he  wrote  out  in  a 
systematic  way  those  elements  of  philological 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  171 

knowledge  which  the  Alexandrian  critics  had 
elaborated.  His  grammar  is  still  in  existence, 
and  the  grammars  which  we  study  in  our 
schools  differ  from  that  only  in  some  acces- 
sories ;  in  the  main  they  are  merely  repetitions 
of  the  work  of  Dionysius  Thrax.  The  grammar 
of  Dionysius,  as  well  as  our  scholastic  grammars, 
was  merely  practical  and  empirical.  It  had 
nothing  to  do  with  the  historico-comparative 
grammar  of  which  we  have  spoken  in  the  pre- 
ceding chapter.  But  poor  as  that  grammar 
was,  it  is  sad  to  think  that  it  has  been  handed 
down  for  nearly  two  thousand  years  and 
whipped  into  millions  of  poor  boys,  without 
receiving  a  single  improvement  ;  rather,  with 
the  addition  of  occasional  blunders,  arising  out 
of  misinterpretation  of  the  original.  It  is  a 
fact  which  shows  what  a  difficult  subject 
language  is  to  deal  with,  and  at  the  same  time 
teaches  us  some  moderation  in  the  appreciation 
of  our  mental  powers. 

In  time  an  event  occurred  which  helped,  or 
at  least  should  have  fostered  in  a  great  measure, 
a  scientific  knowledge  of  language  ;  I  mean  the 
advent  of  Christianity.  In  the  first  place, 


172  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF   WORDS. 

Christianity,  by  teaching  that  all  men  are 
brethren,  induced  civilized  peoples,  such  as 
Greeks  and  Romans,  to  pay  more  attention  to 
the  life  and  also  to  the  language  of  their  neigh- 
bors, whom  they  had  thus  far  despised  as  bar- 
barians. Besides,  the  missionary  work  under- 
taken by  Christianity  made  the  study  of  a  great 
many  languages  necessary.  A  knowledge  of 
different  languages,  and  an  implied  assumption 
that  the  language  of  a  poor,  uncultivated 
people  is  just  as  worthy  of  attention  as  that  of 
the  peoples  most  cultivated — these  two  facts 
are  at  the  bottom  of  a  true  science  of  lan- 
guage. 

It  is  to  be  lamented,  however,  that  such 
favorable  tendencies  were  marred  by  a  singular 
prejudice.  People,  in  their  zeal  for  the  new 
religion,  easily  overshot  the  mark :  they  were 
prone  to  deny  Roman  and  Greek  civilization 
entirely,  and  to  attribute  to  the  Jewish  nation 
an  importance  which  facts  by  no  means 
justified.  Deeply  impressed  by  the  connection 
of  Semitic  civilization  with  Christianity,  they 
saw  nothing  in  the  world  but  offshoots  of  that 
civilization,  no  important  fact  or  legend  but  what 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  173 


was  connected  with  Hebrew,  and  in  the  same  way 
in  every  language  an  offspring  of  the  Hebrew 
tongue.  Now  that  we  have  seen  how  linguistic 
researches  are  pursued,  and  what  is  the  true 
position  of  Hebrew  in  respect  to  the  other 
languages,  we  can  easily  understand  how 
absurd  and  misleading  such  opinions  were. 
Still  they  held  on  for  centuries,  and  years  and 
years  of  painful  work  and  an  immense  amount 
of  ingenuity  were  spent  in  useless  endeavors  to 
prove  that  Latin,  Greek  and  all  languages 
known  were  derived  from  Hebrew.  St.  Ger- 
ome  (quoted  by  M.  Mtiller)  says :  "  The  whole 
of  antiquity  affirms  that  Hebrew,  in  which  the 
Old  Testament  is  written,  was  the  beginning  of 
all  human  speech."  They  started  from  the  fact 
that  the  Old  Testament  was  the  most  ancient 
book,  and  was  written  in  Hebrew;  as  language 
had  been  revealed  directly  to  man  by  God, 
and  the  Old  Testament  is  a  book  divinely 
inspired,  its  language,  Hebrew,  must  necessarily 
be  the  revealed  language,  the  primitive  language 
of  mankind.  In  the  sixteenth  century  an  Ital- 
ian scholar  P.  J.  Giambullari,  one  of  the  most 
learned  men  of  his  age  (and  a  very  cultivated 


174  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

age  it  was),  wrote  a  book  to  prove  that  Italian 
is  to  be  derived  from  Hebrew.  Some  people 
who  had  good  sense  enough  to  see  the  absurd- 
ity of  such  theories,  revolted  against  them, 
but  it  was  only  to  alight  upon  others  not  less 
wild  and  fantastic.  They  denied,  for  instance, 
that  Italian  or  French  could  be  derived  from 
Hebrew,  but  instead  of  setting  to  work  to 
find  out  from  what  language  they  had  really 
come, they  simply  argued  that  Italian  and  French 
not  being  derived  from  Hebrew,  Hebrew  could 
not  have  been  the  primitive  language  of  man- 
kind. Therefore  they  looked  around  to  find  out 
which  language  had  been  the  primitive  one  ; 
being  convinced  that  this  question  once  settled, 
the  origin  of  all  languages  would  be  explained 
by  itself. 

Of  course  it  was  understood  that  the 
primitive  language  was  the  language  spoken  by 
Adam.  A  Spanish  gentleman  claimed  that 
Basque  was  the  language  spoken  by  Adam. 
Goropius,  in  a  work  published  at  Antwerp  in 
1580,  proved  that  Dutch  was  the  langi; 
spoken  in  Paradise!  Andre"  Kcmpc  maintains 
that  God  spoke  to  Adam  in  Swedish,  Adam 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  175 

answered  in  Danish,  and  the  serpent  spoke  to 
Eve  in  French. 

It  is  indeed  a  good  lesson  to  all  of  us  to  see 
men  of  great  learning,  animated  by  the  best 
intentions,  wandering  unconsciously  so  far 
away  from  truth. 

We  must  come  down  to  the  last  century  in 
order  to  find  a  ray  of  light  that  promises  to  dis- 
perse the  darkness  which  still  involves  lan- 
guage in  an  impenetrable  mystery. 

Leibnitz,  the  great  philosopher,  mathemati- 
cian and  scholar,  was  the  first  to  perceive  the 
necessity  of  studying  languages  as  any  other 
branch  of  science,  that  is,  the  necessity  of  start- 
ing from  facts  and  observations.  He  was  the 
first  to  suggest  that  missionaries  and  students 
were  supplied  with  a  list  of  the  most  common  and 
most  important  words,  and  invited  to  write  the 
translation  of  those  words  in  every  language 
they  came  across.  This  was  the  first  rational 
step  toward  the  foundation  of  a  science  of  lan- 
guage. 

Katherine,  the  Empress  of  Russia,  deserves 
not  a  little  credit  for  the  help  she  brought  to 
this  science,  then  in  its  cradle.  Russian  ambas- 


I  76  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

sadors  were  charged  with  gathering  linguistic 
materials  from  all  the  world.  She  sent  to  them 
a  list  of  words  which  had  to  be  translated  into 
the  languages  of  the  peoples  to  whom  they 
were  accredited.  Washington  himself,  in  order 
to  please  the  empress,  sent  her  list  of  words  to 
all  governors  and  generals  of  the  United  States 
enjoining  them  to  supply  the  equivalents  from 
the  American  dialects.  She  worked  herself 
personally  at  the  compilation  of  a  comparative 
dictionary,  whose  first  volume  was  published  in 
1787,  containing  a  list  of  285  words  translated 
into  fifty-one  European  and  one  hundred  and 
forty-nine  Asiatic  languages. 

Hervas  y  Pandura,  a  Jesuit  of  immense 
learning,  collected  specimens  of  more  than  three 
hundred  languages,  and  wrote  more  than  forty 
grammars.  He  was  the  first  to  notice  that,  in 
linguistic  comparisons,  grammars  are  to  be 
more  looked  at  and  thought  of  than  diction- 
aries. He  saw  that  Hebrew,  Chaldean,  Syriac 
and  Arabic  are  only  dialects  of  the  same  family 
—the  Semitic.  He  classified  the  Malaic  and 
Polynesian  languages,  and  discovered  many 
analogies  between  Sanskrit  and  Greek. 


7 'HE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  177 

These  were  good  beginnings  indeed  ;  still, 
amidst  the  confusion  which  seemed  to  be 
brought  about  by  the  increasing  collections  of 
materials,  it  is  hard  to  tell  what  could  have 
come  out  of  such  researches,  but  for  a 
fact,  to  which  really  the  beginning  of 
the  science  of  language  is  to  be  referred. 
This  fact  is  the  discovery  of  Sanskrit. 
Sanskrit  was  the  language  of  ancient  India. 
The  modern  dialects  of  India  stand  in  the  same 
relation  to  it  as  Italian  and  French  to  Latin. 
And  as  Latin  has  been  for  a  long  time  the  lan- 
guage of  the  Church,  so  Sanskrit  remained  the 
language  of  the  Brahmins,  even  after  it  had 
ceased  to  be  a  living  language. 

That  there  was  in  the  far  east  a  language  of 
an  admirable  grammatical  structure,  and  that 
many  of  its  words  were  not  much  different  from 
the  corresponding  words  in  Latin  and  Greek, 
had  often  been  reported  by  travelers. 

Filippo  Sassetti,  an  Italian  scholar  and  mer- 
chant, had  lived  in  Goa  from  1581  to  1588.  In 
a  series  of  letters  where  he  describes  his  eastern 
travels  and  the  wonderful  things  he  had  seen, 
he  tells  us  that  there  was  in  India  a  literary  Ian- 


178  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

guage,  called  "  lingua  Sanscruta,"  which  was 
learned  by  children  just  as  we  do  Latin  and 
Greek.  That  language,  he  says,  has  many 
words  and  particularly  some  numerals,  like  6, 
7,  8,  9,  quite  similar  to  the  Italian. 

Twenty  years  later  (1606)  another  Italian, 
the  Jesuit  Roberto  de'  Nobili,  went  to  India, 
and  in  order  to  preach  more  successfully  the 
Christian  faith,  he  devised  to  present  himself 
as  a  Brahmin  among  the  Brahmins.  To 
that  effect,  he  shut  up  himself  for  years  and 
succeeded  in  mastering  Sanskrit  and  some 
of  the  spoken  dialects  of  India.  He  sent  to 
Rome  detailed  relations  of  the  language  and 
civilization  he  had  discovered  ;  but  Roman 
scholars  and  theologians  failed  to  appreciate 
the  importance  of  this  information. 

No  great  step  was  made  toward  a  better  know- 
ledge of  Indian  lore  until  more  than  a  century 
and  a  half  afterward.  In  1/68  t lie  Pe re  Cceur- 
doux,  who  was  a  missionary  in  India,  wrote  to 
the  French  Academy  "de  Belles-lettres  et  In- 
scriptions" :  "  Where  docs  it  come  from  that  in 
Sanskrit  there  arc  many  words  that  are  common 
with  Latin  and  Greek,  particularly  with  Greek  ?  " 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  179 

He  goes  on  quoting  many  instances  of  such 
affinities  as  deva  and  deus,  God  ;  ganitam  and 
genitum,  generated  ;  ganu  and  genu,  knee  ;  vi- 
dliava  (from  vt,  without,  and  dhava,  man)  and 
vidua,  widow ;  na  and  non,  not  ;  maddliyas 
and  medius,  middle  ;  dattam  and  datum,  given  ; 
danam  and  donum,  gift ;  etc.  He  compares  the 
present  indicative  and  subjunctive  of  the  verb 
"  to  be  "  in  Sanskrit  and  Latin. 


Sanskrit. 

Latin. 

Sanskrit. 

Latin. 

asmi 

sum 

syam 

sim 

asi 

es 

syas 

sis 

asti 

est 

syat 

sit 

smas 

sumus 

syama 

simus 

stha 

estis 

syata 

sitis 

santi 

sunt 

santu 

sint. 

The  letter  of  the  Pere  Coeurdoux  is  indeed  a 
remarkable  monument  of  scientific  penetration, 
especially  when  we  consider  that  it  was  writ- 
ten more  than  one  hundred  years  ago  (1768). 

In  1783  Sir  William  Jones  founded  in  Cal- 
cutta the  "  Society  for  inquiring  into  the  his- 
tory and  antiquities,  the  arts,  sciences  and  lit- 


i8o  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

erature  of  Asia,"  and  in  a  speech  before  this 
society,  in  1786,  he  declared  that,  "  Whatever 
its  antiquity,  Sanskrit  was  a  language  of  most 
wonderful  structure,  more  perfect  than  the 
Greek,  more  copious  than  the  Latin,  and  more 
exquisitely  refined  than  either,  yet  bearing  to 
both  of  them  a  strong  affinity.  No  philologist 
would  examine  the  Sanskrit,  Greek,  and  Latin 
without  believing  them  to  have  .sprung  from 
some  common  source,  which,  perhaps,  no  longer 
exists.  There  is  a  similar  reason,  though  not 
quite  so  forcible,  for  supposing  that  both  the 
Gothic  and  Celtic  had  the  same  origin  with 
Sanskrit.  The  Old  Persian  may  be  added  to 
the  same  family." 

These  were  very  pregnant  words.  The  atten- 
tion of  the  scholars  was  turned  to  the  east, 
whence  a  new  light  seemed  to  be  rising.  En- 
glish officers  and  merchants  with  a  scientific 
tendency,  as  well  as  European  scholars,  began  to 
study  Sanskrit  and  other  oriental  languages 
with  a  new  vigor  and  a  critical  mind. 

The  great  philological  importance  of  San- 
skrit lies  in  this  fact,  that  it  affords  a  new  term 
of  comparison  for  Latin  and  Greek.  Once  it 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 


181 


customary  to  explain   Greek  words  with 
,atin  words,  and  vice  versa ;  but,  as  Greek  is 
lot  derived  from  Latin  more  than  Latin  is  de- 
•ived    from  Greek,    there    was    no  firm,    solid 
round  for  such  comparisons.    It  was  impossible 
to  tell  when  they  were  right  or  when  they  were 
Tong.     Sanskrit   gave   a  third    term  of   com- 
>arison;    the    table,    to    put    it  in   a   material 
received   a   new   leg   and   was   made    to 
ind. 

Besides,  the  structure  of  Sanskrit  is  such  that 
is  far  easier  to  look  into  the  nature  and  com- 
>sition  of  its  words  than  into  those  of  Latin  and 
rreek.  Again,  such  analysis  had  already  been 
irried  to  a  great  minuteness  by  Indian  gram- 
larians,  so  that  the  way  lay  open  before  Euro- 
>ean  scholars. 

In  1808  Frederic  Schlegel,  the  German  poet 
ind  scholar,  published  his  little   book,  "  Ueber 
lie  Sprache  und  Weisheit  der  Indien'"  (on  the 
inguage  and  wisdom  of  the   Indies),  where  he 
)ldly  faced  the  conclusions  that  had  to  be  de- 
•ived  from  the  study  of  Sanskrit,  and  was  the 
irst  to  see  that  the  languages  of  India,  Persia, 
Greece,  Italy,  and  Germany  belonged  to  one 


1 82  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

and  the  same  family,  which  he  called  the  Indo- 
Germanic  family  of  languages. 

The  work  of  Schlegel  marks  a  revolution  in 
the  study  of  the  science  of  language.  Since 
its  publication  the  life  and  success  of  this 
science  have  been  assured. 

The  ideas  brought  forth  by  Schlegel  were 
taken  up  by  the  scholars  of  all  the  world,  par- 
ticularly in  Germany  ;  and  laborious  investiga- 
tions were  begun  and  carried  on  which  con- 
verted the  almost  prophetic  divination  of 
Schlegel  into  absolute  certainty,  and  his 
glimpse  of  a  new  horizon  into  broad  daylight. 

The  work  of  Schlegel,  M.  M Ciller  says,  "  was 
like  the  wand  of  a  magician.  It  pointed  out 
the  place  where  a  mine  should  be  opened  ;  and 
it  was  not  long  before  some  of  the  most  distin- 
guished scholars  of  the  day  began  to  sink  their 
shafts  and  raise  the  ore." 

The  first  great  product  of  minute  and  strictly 
scientific  researches  was  the  work  of  Francis 
Bopp. 

Francis  Bopp  was  born  in  Mayence  the  I4th 
day  of  September,  1791.  He  studied  the  clas- 
sical languages  in  Aschaftenburg,  and,  led  by  a 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  183 

strong  desire  of  mastering  the  Eastern  lan- 
guages, went  to  Paris,  where  he  remained  from 
1812  to  1816.  For  four  years  the  quiet  Ger- 
man shut  himself  up  to  study  Sanskrit,  Persian, 
Arabic,  and  Hebrew.  The  war  that  was  raging 
all  around  him,  throwing  all  Europe  into  con- 
fusion and  convulsion,  did  not  touch  this  ex- 
traordinary youth  in  the  least.  At  the  end 
of  four  years  he  published  a  comparison  of 
the  Sanskrit  system  of  conjugation  with  that  of 
Latin,  Greek,  Persian,  and  German.  He  went 
afterwards  to  London,  and  in  1822  to  Berlin  to 
teach  oriental  languages  in  that  famous  univer- 
sity. 

From  1826  to  1833  he  toiled  on  unremit- 
tingly with  his  studies  of  comparative  gram- 
mar, and  in  1833  he  began  the  publication  of 
his  '  Comparative  grammar  of  Sanskrit, 
Zend,  Greek,  Latin,  Lithuanian,  Gothic  and 
German." 

This  work  which  was  finished  only  twenty 
years  after  in  1852,  is  a  monument  in  the  his- 
tory of  the  science  of  language.  The  brother- 
hood of  the  Indo-European  languages,  which 
by  Schlegel  had  been  divined,  here  stands  clear 


184  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

and  undoubtable  before  our  eyes.  The  pur- 
pose of  this  work  is  clearly  stated  by  the 
author  in  his  preface :  "  I  contemplate  in 
this  work  a  description  of  the  comparative 
organization  of  the  Indo-European  languages, 
comprehending  all  the  features  of  their 
relationship,  and  an  inquiry  into  their 
physical  and  mechanical  laws,  and  the  origin 
of  the  forms  which  distinguished  their  gram- 
matical relations.  One  point  alone  I  shall  leave 
untouched — the  secret  of  the  roots,  or  the 
foundation  of  the  nomenclature  of  the  primary 
ideas.  I  shall  not  investigate,  for  example,  why 
the  root  '  i  '  signifies  '  go  '  and  not '  stand  ;  '  why 
the  combination  of  sounds  '  sta  '  or  '  stha '  signi- 
fies 'stand  '  and  not  '  go.'  ' 

In  the  work  of  Bopp  we  have  not  only  an 
immense  amount  of  linguistic  researches,  but, 
what  is  even  more  important,  we  have  a  great 
model  of  the  method  by  which  such  researches 
are  to  be  pursued.  All  the  work  which  has 
been  done  afterwards  in  the  field  of  the  science 
of  language,  has  been  mainly  in  the  foot-steps 
of  Bopp  and  in  the  light  of  his  method,  which 
is  at  once  comparative  and  historical.  Bopp 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  185 

ras  fortunate  enough  to  live  to  see  the  results 
his  own  work ;  to  see  hosts  of  disciples 
undertake  with  youthful  ardor  and  unremit- 
ting diligence  the  cultivation  of  that  field  in 
which  he  had  been  so  great  a  pioneer.  He 
was  called  the  father  of  the  science  of  language, 
and  he  fully  deserved  the  title.  He  died  the 
23d  of  October,  1866,  beloved  by  all  who  knew 
him,  honored  by  the  scholars  of  the  whole 
world. 

It  would  transcend  the  limits  and  the  inten- 
tions of  this  chapter,  if  I  had  even  to  mention 
here  the  most  important  works  which  we  owe 
to  the  successors  of  Bopp.  The  amount  of 
lore  accumulated  is  enormous  ;  the  greatest 
nations,  England,  France,  Germany,  Italy,  and 
America  took  up  the  new  science  with  admira- 
ble enthusiasm  ;  but  it  is  only  fair  to  admit  that 
Germany  is  the  leader.  Germany  may  be  called 
the  fatherland  of  linguistic  lore. 

What  Bopp  did  for  the   Indo-European  lan- 
guages in  general,  Jacob  Grimm  did   especially 
for  the  German  branch,  with  his  great  German 
grammar    (Deutsche    Grammatik,  1819-1837.) 
Other  scholars,  conspicuous  among  them  Eu- 


1 86  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

gene  Burnouf,  founded  the  Zend  philology,  while 
Frederick  Diez,  with  his  "  Komparative  Gram- 
mar "  (1836),  and  his  "  Comparative  dictionary  " 
(1853),  created  the  comparative  philology  of 
the  new  Latin  or  Romance  languages. 

Prichard,  Zeuss  and  Stokes  did  the  same  for 
the  Celtic  dialects  ;  Miklosich  and  Schleicher 
for  the  Slavonic  tongues ;  Curtius,  Corssen  and 
a  phalanx  of  others  for  the  classical  languages  ; 
Gesenius,  Ewald,  Olshausen,  Renan  for  the 
Semitic  family. 

With  the  same  enthusiasm  and  scientific 
vigor  other  scholars  are  working  at  less  perfect 
but  not  less  important  languages  which  belong 
to  the  agglutinative  and  monosyllabic  families. 

Those  who  talk  on  glibly  about  words  and 
their  origin,  should  at  least  take  the  trouble  to 
know  that  there  is  a  science  which  has  made  of 
that  subject  a  speoial  study.  Those  who  talk 
about  diseases  and  pretend  to  cure  them  with- 
out caring  to  know  what  the  science  of  medi- 
cine has  to  say  about  them,  are  called  quacks. 
Is  it  unjust  if  manipulators  of  lunatic  etymolo- 
gies are  dealt  with  in  the  same  way  ? 

Strange  as  it  is,  this  science,  which  already 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  187 


ts  attained  such  great  results  and  changed 
tirely  our  views  about  language,  has  not 
as  yet  a  name  agreed  upon  by  all  scholars. 
Some  call  it  '*  linguistic,"  and  some  "  compara- 
tive philology,"  some  "  glottology,"  some  the 
"  science  of  language."  The  last  two  names 
are  the  best,  as  linguistic  and  comparative 
philology  are  rather  misleading.  In  the  course 
of  this  book  we  have  sometimes  adopted  the 
term  "  comparative  philology,"  because  it  seems 
more  popular  in  England  and  America.  We 
must  not,  however,  confuse  the  science  of  lan- 
guage with  philology.  "  Philology "  is  now 
applied  in  a  very  wide  meaning :  we  call 
Roman,  Greek,  Indian  philology  the  study  of 
the  "life,"  of  the  Romans,  the  Greeks,  and  the 
Indians ;  the  study  of  their  language,  their 
literature,  their  religion,  their  art,  their  phil- 
osophy. The  object  of  the  science  of  language, 
on  the  contrary,  is  only  language.  This  is  its 
ultimate  aim,  while,  for  the  philologist,  lan- 
guage is  only  a  means  in  order  to  understand 
literature,  and  the  other  manifestations  of  civil- 
ized life.  The  linguist  studies  the  most 
humble  dialects,  with  the  same  care  as  the  most 


1 88  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

noble  tongues — the  philologist  studies  only 
those  languages  whose  literature  is  most  emi- 
nent and  artistic.  Philology  is  an  aristocratic 
science,  while  before  the  science  of  language 
every  language  is  entitled  to  be  studied  as  care- 
fully as  any  other.  Schleicher  compares  the 
linguist  to  a  botanist,  the  philologist  to  a 
gardener.  The  botanist  must  be  acquainted 
with  all  vegetable  organisms,  with  their  struc- 
ture and  the  laws  of  their  development ;  but 
the  use  of  the  plants,  their  practical  or  aesthetic 
value  is  nothing  to  him  ;  the  most  beautiful 
roses,  the  most  gorgeous  Japan  lilies  interest 
him  no  more  than  the  most  obscure  weeds. 
The  gardener  cares,  above  all,  for  the  useful- 
ness, the  beauty,  the  color,  the  perfume  of 
plants.  He  disdains  the  plants  which  have  no 
practical  or  aesthetic  value.  If  he  cares  to  be 
acquainted  with  their  structure  and  develop- 
ment, it  is  only  for  practical  reasons.  The 
same  does  the  philologist  :  language  for  him  is 
only  a  subordinate  thing,  only  a  means  to  get 
at  other  things,  literature,  art,  etc.,  while  the 
linguist  does  not  look  beyond  the  natural 
phenomenon,  which  is  language. 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS,  189 

We  have  thus  seen  what  the  science  of  lan- 
lage  is  ;  with  what  methods  it  proceeds  in  its 
ivestigations  ;  how  it  has  found  the  apparent 
:onfusion  of  languages  and  words  to  be  ruled 
>y  certain  laws  not  less  than  any  other  part  of 
lis  universe  ;  we  have  observed  how  it  dissects 
'ords,    compares    grammars,    and  studies  the 
iffinities  and  diversities  of  languages  ;  we  have 
seen  how  little   language  was   studied  and  its 
nature  completely  misunderstood  for  centuries  ; 
how    the   discovery    and     study    of  Sanskrit, 
not  yet  one  hundred  years  ago,  made  a  science 
of  language  possible  ;  and  how  this  science  was 
wprked  out  and  carried  to  a  high  degree  of  per- 
fection during  the  last  fifty  years.    We  can  now 
more  safely  approach  an   important    question 
which  once  used  to   be  treated   at  the  begin- 
ning of  every    book    on    languages,   and  dis- 
cussed before  any  analytical   investigation  was 
undertaken — the  question  of  the  origin  of  lan- 
guage. 


VI. 

THE   QUESTION  OF  THE  ORIGIN  OF  LANGUAGE. 

THIS  question  is  so  important,  the  religious, 
historical  and  anthropologic  problems 
connected  with  its  solution  are  so  great,  that 
we  can  not  wonder  that  it  has  been  taken  up  and 
ventilated,  even  in  the  early  blossoming  of 
human  culture,  and  long  before  any  reasonable 
foundation  had  been  laid  of  a  science  of  la.n- 
guage.  Nay,  the  more  involved  and  myster- 
ious appeared  the  nature  of  language,  the  more 
prone  philosophers  were  to  speculate  about  its 
origin.  Thus  we  find,  for  instance,  that  none  of 
the  great  thinkers  to  whom  Greek  philosophy  is 
indebted  for  its  loftiest  flights,  left  this  prob- 
lem untouched.  They  could  not,  even  if  they 
would,  because  the  process  of  language  is  too 
intimately  linked  with  the  process  of  reason,  to 
make  it  possible  to  inquire  into  the  nature  of 
the  latter  without  paying  the  former  any  con- 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  191 

sideration.  The  opinions  of  Greek  philosophers 
may  be  mainly  divided  into  two  classes ;  some 
asserted  that  language  is  a  thing  of  nature,  i.  e., 
that  there  is  a  natural  and  necessary  connection 
between  a  thing  and  its  name.  Others  affirmed 
that  language  is  purely  conventional  ;  that  a 
certain  thing  had  received  a  certain  name 
merely  because  it  had  pleased  men  to  call  it  so. 

The  first  opinion  we  may  safely  say  is  wrong. 
Since  nature  is  universal,  if- there  were  any  nat- 
ural necessity  why  a  horse  must  be  called  a 
"horse,"  how  is  it  that  it  has  different 
names  with  different  peoples?  As  for  the  sec- 
ond opinion,  it  is  to  be  observed,  that  it  had 
only  a  negative  value,  inasmuch  as  it  discarded 
any  natural  and  necessary  link  between  an 
object  and  its  name.  But  here  its  merits  end  ; 
if  we  ask,  how  then  things  came  to  have  their 
names,  the  authors  of  this  theory  do  not  give 
any  answer,  or  if  they  try  to  give  it,  it  is 
simply  to  stumble  about  into  vague  and  base- 
less suppositions. 

Besides,  both  of  these  theories  were  a  priori 
constructions ;  they  had  not  been  reached 
through  well  ascertained  facts,  but  were 


192  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

simply  the  offshoot  of  subjective  and  abstract 
speculations.  The  linguistic  theories  of  Greek 
philosophers  bore  the  same  weight  of  scientific 
truth  as  the  theories  of  the  geographers  of  old 
about  the  form  of  the  earth,  the  existence  or 
non  existence  of  people  at  the  antipodes,  etc. 
Those  theories  might  have  been  either  right  or 
wrong  ;  but  how  could  we  tell  which,  until  bold 
adventurers  went  round  the  earth  and  reported 
what  the  facts  actually  were?  Modern  lin- 
guists did  for  the  science  of  language  exactly 
what  the  early  navigators  did  for  geography. 
They  brought  to  our  knowledge  the  actual 
facts,  thus  enabling  us  to  test  the  theories  of 
the  ancients  and  to  formulate  new  ones,  to  say 
the  least,  not  so  distant  from  truth. 

Before  proceeding  to  inquire  what  light  glot- 
tology  has  thrown  upon  the  origin  of  language, 
let  us  remember  that,  outside  the  pale  of  meta- 
physics, we  have  two  kinds  of  facts  to  deal 
with,  physical  and  historical.  When  it  is  a 
question  of  a  fact  of  the  former  kind,  for  in- 
stance of  the  existence  of  men  at  the  anti- 
podes, there  is  no  other  way  of  ascertain- 
ing the  truth  than  by  taking  actual  and 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  193 


I  physical  cognizance  of  it.  For  the  ultimate 
proof  of  a  physical  fact  we  must  resort 
to  the  testimony  of  our  senses.  But  where 
it  is  a  question  of  historical  facts,  we  can 
not  have  such  direct  evidence ;  we  can  only 

kfrom  other  historical  facts  and  circumstances 
gather  an  inductive  conclusion  about  their  hav- 
ing or  not  having  taken  place,  and  in  one  way 
rather  than  in  another.  That  once  there  was  in 
Rome  a  man  whose  name  was  Julius  Caesar,  that 
this  man  had  been  a  great  general,  that  he  was 
killed  by  a  handful  of  conspirators,  all  this  we 
gather  from  historical  circumstances.  We 
have  not  seen  him,  we  never  shall  see  him  ;  still 
we  are  as  sure  of  his  having  existed  as  we  are 
of  the  existence  of  another  great  general  who 
was  called  Napoleon  the  First.  But  that  that 
Roman  general  really  partook  in  a  conspiracy 
led  by  one  Catilina,  and  that  one  of  his  murder- 
ers killed  himself,  and  before  dying  exclaimed  : 
"  O  Virtue,  thou  art  but  a  name  !  "  of  all  this  we 
are  not  so  sure  as  of  the  existence  of  Caesar, 
because  the  historical  proofs  are  not  so  strong 
as  in  the  former  case.  We  are  sure  of  Rome 
having  been  once  the  capital  of  a  great  empire, 


194  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

but  we  are  not  so  sure,  and  it  is  impossible  for 
us  to  ascertain  the  truth,  as  to  how  Rome  was 
founded  and  by  whom. 

Whatever  idea  we  may  hold  about  the  origin 
of  language,  we  can  not  possibly  hope  to  have  a 
direct,  sensuous  proof  of  this  fact,  but  merely 
an  inductive  one,  just  as  of  any  historical  fact. 
And  in  order  to  arrive  at  it,  we  must  assume  a 
postulatum  which  is  the  foundation  of  all  his- 
torical researches  : — that  the  natural  laws  (both 
of  mind  and  body)  which  now  govern  our  life, 
have  always  governed  human  life  since  its 
beginning.  Should  we  deny  this  postulatum 
(but  nobody  does  and  nobody  can),  we  should 
give  up  in  despair  all  hope  of  acquiring  knowl- 
edge and  any  idea  of  culture. 

The  consequence  is  that  in  order  to  analyze 
and  explain  historical  facts  we  must  look  at 
what  happens  in  the  present  day.  As  the  geol- 
ogist explains  the  formation  of  the  earth  by  the 
laws  which  even  now  govern  its  development, 
the  historian  explains  the  facts  of  the  past  by 
the  laws  and  criterions  which  preside  over  the 
events  of  to-day.  In  the  present  is  the  key  of 
the  past. 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  195 

So  it  is  that  the  best  way  to  reach  a  proba- 
ble opinion  of  how  language  originated  in 
antiquity,  is  to  study  how  language  is 
formed  nowadays  around  us.  This  we  can 
only  observe  with  our  children,  and  with  some 
tribes  in  the  lowest  state  of  savagery.  Let  us 
begin  by  children.  Of  course  the  case  is  not 
exactly  the  same  as  with  our  ancient,  speech- 
less forefathers,  inasmuch  as  children  are  sur- 
rounded by  people  who  speak,  and  are  willing 
to  teach  them  their  own  language.  Neverthe- 
less some  observations  thus  gathered  will 
supply  a  clue,  so  to  speak,  by  which  we  may 
conjecture  how  languages  were  formed  in  the 
remote  ages. 

Sayce  quotes  an  experiment  of  Taine,  the 
French  savant,  which  is  so  interesting  that  I 
ask  permission  to  report  it  in  extenso. 

The  experiment  was  with  one  of  Taine's 
children,  a  little  girl,  of  whom  he  notes  that 
"  the  progress  of  the  vocal  organs  goes  on  just 
like  that  of  the  limbs  ;  the  child  learns  to  emit 
such  or  such  a  sound  as  it  learns  to  turn  its 
head  or  its  eyes — that  is  to  say,  by  gropings  and 
repeated  attempts.  ...  At  about  three  and  a 


196  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

half  months,  in  the  country,  she  was  placed  on  a 
carpet  in  the  garden  ;  lying  there  on  her  back 
or  stomach  for  hours  together,  she  kept  mov- 
ing about  her  four  limbs,  and  uttering  a  number 
of  cries  and  different  exclamations,  but  vuwcls 
only,  no  consonants;  this  continued  for  several 
months.  By  degrees  the  consonants  were 
added  to  the  vowels,  and  the  exclamations 
became  more  and  more  articulate.  It  all  ended 
in  a  sort  of  very  distinct  twittering  which 
would  last  a  quarter  of  an  hour  at  a  time,  and 
be  repeated  ten  times  a  day. 

"  She  took  delight  in  this  twitter '  like  a  bird  ' 
but  the  sounds,  whether  vowels  or  consonants, 
were  at  first  very  vague,  and  difficult  to  catch. 
Her  first  clearly  articulated  sound  was  ;//;/  made 
spontaneously  by  blowing  through  the  lips. 
The  discovery  amused  her  greatly,  and  the 
sound  was  accordingly  repeated  over  and  over 
again.  The  next  sound  she  formed  was 
kraaau,  a  deep  guttural  made  in  the  throat, 
like  the  gutturals  so  characteristic  of  Eskimo; 
then  came  papapapa.  These  sounds,  which 
were  at  the  outset  her  own  inventions,  were 
fixed  in  her  memory  by  being  repeated  by 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  197 


i others,  and  then  imitated  many  times  by  her- 
self. As  yet,  however,  she  attached  no  mean- 
ing to  any  of  the  words  she  uttered,  though, 
like  the  dog  or  the  horse,  she  already  under- 
stood two  or  three  of  the  words  she  heard 
from  the  lips  of  those  about  her.  Thus  from 
the  eleventh  month  onward  she  turned  to  her 
mother  at  the  words  '  where  is  mamma  ? ' 
which,  be  it  observed,  is  a  polysyllabic  sen- 
tence. But  a  month  later  the  great  step  was 
I  made  which  divides  articulate-speaking  man 
from  the  brutes.  The  word  bdbt  had  now 
come  to  signify  for  her  a  picture,  or  rather, 
'  something  variegated  in  a  shining  frame.' 
During  the  next  six  weeks  her  progress  was 
rapid,  and  she  made  use  of  nine  words,  each 
with  a  distinct,  though  wide  and  general  mean- 
ing. These  were  papa,  mama,  t<?t<f,  'nurse,' 
oua-oua,  '  dog,'  koko,  '  chicken,'  dtdt,  '  horse 
or  carriage,'  mia,  '  puss,'  kaka  and  tern. 
Besides  these,  btfbt  also  continued  to  be  em- 
ployed, though  its  meaning  was  enlarged  to 
signify  whatever  wets.  It  will  be  noticed 
that  most  of  these  words  are  reduplications, 
that  only  one  of  them  is  monosyllabic,  and 


198  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

that  three  at  least  are  imitations  of  natural 
sounds.  They  were  used,  too,  as  general  terms, 
not  in  the  sense  of  a  single  individual  only,  but 
of  all  other  individuals  which  seemed  to  the 
child  to  resemble  one  another.  M.  Tainc 
observed  that  the  guttural  cry  of  the  chicken, 
koko,  was  imitated  with  greater  exactness  than 
was  possible  for  grown-up  persons.  The  word 
tcin  was  probably  a  natural  vocal  gesture, 
though  it  might  have  been  a  rude  representation 
Qitiens.  In  any  case  it  was  used  in  the  general 
sense  of  '  give,'  *  take,'  '  look  ';  in  fact,  it  signified 
a  desire  to  attract  attention.  It  had  been  first 
used  for  a  fortnight  as  a  mere  vocal  toy,  with- 
out any  meaning  being  attached  to  it,  and 
after  a  time  was  left  off,  no  other  word  taking 
its  place.  Meanwhile,  by  the  seventeenth 
month,  several  new  words  had  been  learned, 
including  hamin,  which  the  child  employed  to 
signify  'eat'  or  *  I  want  to  cat.'  This  word 
was  her  own  invention,  the  merely  natural  vocal 
gesture  of  a  person  snapping  at  something. 
But  the  guttural  and  labial  force  with  which  it 
was  pronounced  gradually  disappeared  and  the 
word  was  finally  reduced  to  the  nasalized  am" 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  199 


It  would  hardly  be  possible  to  state  in  a 
clearer  and  more  complete  way  all  the  phenom- 
ena which  accompany  the  beginning  of  speech. 
We  have  in  ourselves  by  nature  (and  this  con- 
stitutes the  real  and  exclusive  attribute  of  man) 
the  faculty  of  speech,  as  we  have  the  faculty  of 
walking.  And  we  exercise  the  faculty  of  speech 
for  just  the  same  reasons  as  we  exercise  the 
faculty  of  walking:  that  is,  from  a  natural  im- 
>ulse,  and  because  of  want.  We  walk  because 
feel  this  natural,  uncontrollable  impulse  to 
exercise  our  power  of  motion,  and  because  we 

rant  to  get  our  food  and  every  thing  necessary 
for  us.  We  speak  because  we  have  a  natural 

incontrollable  power  and  tendency  to   speak, 
ind  because  we  want  to  communicate  with  our 
fellow-beings. 
So  the  child,  even  before  understanding  the 

>unds  she  utters,  at  the  same  time  that  she 

toves  about  her  four  limbs,  "  utters  a  number 
of  cries  and  exclamations,"  but  at  first  the 
easiest  sounds,  only  vowels ;  and  we  know  of 

ivages  in  whose  languages  consonants  have 
almost  no  value ;  with  them  language  rests 
almost  entirely  on  vowels.  Then  the  child  uses 


200  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

some  gutturals,  then  tries  to  imitate  the  act 
of  eating  by  uttering  ;;/;;/.  Then  other  sounds 
come,  some  imitative,  like  koko,  oua-oua,  and 
then  other  words.  Their  meaning  is  at  first 
fluctuating  and  uncertain,  but  by  and  by  it 
becomes  more  clear  and  specific;  the  child  be- 
gins to  distinguish. 

Another  very  important  fact  is  to  be 
noticed  :  the  words  which  the  child  begins  to 
utter  are  properly  neither  roots,  nor  nouns,  nor 
verbs.  They  are  all  this  at  one  time  ;  in  fact, 
they  are  all  one  sentence  in  one  sound.  So  amin 
or  mm  to  the  child  means  "  food,"  as  well  as 
"  to  eat,"  and  also,  "  I  want  to  eat,"  "  I  will 
eat."  The  same  fact  occurs  with  the  rudi- 
mentary languages  of  inferior  tribes  :  the  unit 
of  speech  is  not  a  word,  a  noun  or  a  verb,  but 
a  sentence.  This  seems  to  solve  reasonably  a 
problem,  which  for  a  long  time  has  been  agitated 
by  linguists,  whether  language  began  by  nouns 
or  by  verbs,  that  is,  whether  the  primitive  mean- 
ing of  roots  was  a  single  object  or  an  abstraction. 
The  example  of  children  and  uncivilized  peo- 
ples— children  in  the  history  of  mankind- 
seems  to  authorize  us  to  say  that  language 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 


began  with  neither  of  them  :  the  initial  unit  of 
speech  was  a  sentence — an  imperfect,  rudiment- 
ary sentence.  Out  of  this  sentence  grew  the 
distinction  between  the  subject  and  the  predi- 
cate by  that  process  of  differentiation  which 
presides  over  the  development  of  the  whole 
universe.  This  is  not  the  place  to  follow  this 
argument  further,  but  any  one  will  see  for  him- 
self how  greatly  it  must  tell  on  our  ways  of 
conceiving  grammar  and  on  our  doctrines  of 
logic. 

It  was  once  an  argument  of  controversy, 
whether  language  was  due  to  onomatopeic  pro- 
cess, that  is,  to  attempts  to  imitate  with  articu- 
late sounds  the  sounds  of  things  external ;  or 
to  the  interjectional  process — that  is,  to  uncon- 
scious exclamations,  which  man  uttered  at  the 
sight  of  external  objects.  According  to  the 
first  theory,  language  was  in  a  certain  way 
brought  home  to  us  by  the  sounds  of  the  uni- 
verse around ;  by  the  second  theory,  language 
sprang  up  from  our  own  innermost  being,  out  of 
a  pressure,  so  to  speak,  of  our  own  ideas  and  sensa- 
tions. But  all  this  antithetic  architecture  of 
systems  is  more  ingenious  than  true.  We  have 


202  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

no  reason  to  separate  these  two  elements  ;  both 
of  them  concurred  in  the  formation  of  speech. 
Moreover,  we  must  remember  that  our  vocal 
organs  do  not  work  alone  in  the  formation  of 
language.  Spoken  language  is  not  all  the  lan- 
guage. We  speak  with  our  hands,  with  our 
eyes,  with  our  whole  body.  Philology,  of  course, 
studies  only  .ftfttwaManguage ;  but  in  investi- 
gating the  origin  of  language,  we  must  take  in 
consideration  all  the  forces,  all  the  elements 
which  can  assist  man  in  conveying  his  ideas,  in 
laying  his  mind  open  to  his  fellow-beings,  which 
is  the  scope  of  language.  And  when  we  con- 
sider how  many  forces  are  brought  into  play  in 
the  formation  of  language,  we  see  how  futile 
it  is  to  confine  its  origin  to  the  use  of  only  one 
organ,  and  in  only  one  direction. 

As  language  is  due  to  our  need  of  communi- 
cating with  our  fellow-beings,  and  as  our  own 
words  must  be  understood  by  them,  as  well  as 
theirs  by  us,  it  follows  that  language  is  not  the 
work  of  individuals,  but  of  society.  Language 
is  a  social  phenomenon.  No  language  is  possi- 
ble except  where  society  exists,  however  low 
and  rudimentary.  And  just  in  proportion  as  a 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  203 

society  is  complex,  high  and  cultivated,  its  lan- 
guage is  rich  and  highly  developed. 

Another  question  remains  to  be  considered. 
Language  developed  slowly,  through  ages 
and  ages,  from  rude  and  formless  elements, 
such  as  we  observe  in  children  and  sav- 
ages. But  were  there  many  centres  from 
which  language  was  developed,  or  have  all 
the  languages  of  the  world  been  developed 
from  one  centre  alone,  from  one  and  the 
same  source  ?  As  far  as  we  can  tell,  all  analo- 
gies point  to  numerous  centres,  in  each  one  of 
which,  according  to  the  race,  the  climate  and 
other  peculiarities,  a  different  language  was 
brought  forth.  The  further  we  go  back  in  the 
history  of  language,  and  the  lower  we  descend 
in  the  scale  of  civilization,  the  greater  is  the 
variety  of  languages  we  meet  with.  The  child 
of  M.  Taine  developed  some  rudiments  of  lan- 
guage, while  another  child,  in  conditions 
slightly  changed,  would  develop  quite  another 
rudimentary  speech.  Among  savages  each 
little  tribe,  separated  as  they  are  one  from 
another,  has  its  own  language.  Moreover,  as 
there  is  no  strong  institution  like  an  organized 


204  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

government,  a  system  of  religion  or  literature, 
to  fix  and  steady  the  language,  their  language  is 
like  a  stream  of  water  without  banks  :  its  course 
is  forever  changing.  Missionaries  testify  to 
tribes  whose  languages  were  subject  to  such  a 
rapid  transformation  as  to  make  a  dictionary, 
which  had  been  composed  fifty  years  before, 
entirely  worthless.  It  is  civilization,  with  the 
help  of  such  forces  as  government,  religion, 
literature,  common  education,  commerce,  and 
of  great  inventions  like  the  press,  which  fixes  a 
language,  and  by  binding  many  provinces  into 
one  great  state  causes  many  and  different  dia- 
lects to  be  superseded  by  one  national  lan- 
guage. Without  the  press,  commerce  and 
public  schools,  the  language  of  the  United 
States  would  now  differ  more  widely  from  the 
language  of  England  than  Dutch  from  Ger- 
man, or  Italian  from  French. 

Another  question  closely  connected  with  the 
origin  of  language  is  the  relation  between  lan- 
guage and  thought.  It  is  a  common  saying 
that  without  language  no  thought  is  possible. 
There  is  some  exaggeration  in  this  aphorism. 
Thought  properly  exists  before  language.  It 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  205 

is  because  we  have  an  idea  that  we  make  a 
word  or  give  an  old  word  a  new  meaning. 
We  invent  a  new  machine,  we  have  the  idea  of 
it,  and  still  we  do  not  know  yet  how  to  name 
it.  After  some  consideration  we  agree  upon  a 
name  ;  but  the  idea  was  first.  Were  a  savage 
to  see  a  locomotive,  he  would  not  know  what  it 
was;  very  probably  he  would  conceive  of  it  an 
idea  absolutely  inadequate,  and,  according  to 
this  idea,  he  would  name  it.  He  would  per- 
haps call  it  "flying  fire,"  or  something  of  the 
kind.  Thus  when  we  reach  some  new  idea 
either  in  mathematics,  or  metaphysics,  or  any 
other  science,  we  try  to  find  out  a  name  for  it. 
In  any  case  thought  precedes  language  ;  lan- 
guage is  not  to  be  confused  with  thought  ;  it 
is  but  an  instrument  of  thought.  But  withal 
we  must  not  underrate  the  importance  of  lan- 
guage in  this  respect.  If  language  is  not 
thought,  it  is,  however, .  such  a  powerful  aux- 
iliary that  thought  without  it  would  be  little 
better  than  a  helpless  cripple.  Had  we  no 
means  of  expressing  our  ideas,  no  consecutive 
reasoning  would  be  possible  :  because  we  can 
have  an  idea  without  expressing  it  ;  but  we 


206  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

can  not  form  a  simple  ratiocination  without 
putting  it  into  words,  whether  uttered  or  un- 
spoken. We  have  eyes  and  powers  of  vision, 
but  we  can  not  look  at  our  face  without  the  aid 
of  a  mirror  ;  in  the  same  way,  we  can  not  look 
into  ourselves,  we  can  not  be  conscious  of  our 
mental  power, without  the  help  of  language. 

Finally,  before  leaving  this  argument  on  the 
origin  of  language,  one  question  remains  to  be 
answered.  We  said  that  we  have  a  natural 
faculty  of  speech.  It  is  obvious  to  ask:  where 
is  such  faculty?  This  question  transcends  the 
limits  of  philology;  it  is  for  the  biologist  to 
answer  it.  The  French  anthropologist,  M. 
Broca  (quoted  by  Sayce),  localizes  the  faculty 
of  speech  in  a  very  circumscribed  portion  of 
the  two  cerebral  hemispheres,  and  more  espec- 
ially of  the  left.  These  two  hemispheres  are 
distinguished  in  their  under  side  into  three 
lobes:  the  posterior,  th.e  middle  and  the  ante- 
rior. The  two  latter  are  separated  from  one 
another  by  what  is  called  the  Sylvian  fissure. 
It  is  on  the  upper  edge  of  this  fissure  that  M. 
Broca  places  the  seat  of  the  faculty  of  speech. 
"  Aphasia  (want  of  speech),  he  finds,  is  invari- 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 


207 


ably  accompanied  by  lesion  or  disease  of  this 
portion  of  the  brain.  The  lesion  occurs  in  the 
left  hemisphere  in  about  nineteen  out  of  twenty 
cases,  and  though  the  faculty  of  speech  is 
sometimes  not  affected  even  by  a  serious  lesion 
of  the  right  hemisphere,  it  has  never  been 
known  to  survive  in  the  case  of  those  whose 
autopsy  has  disclosed  a  deep  lesion  of  the  two 
convolutions  of  the  right  and  left  hemispheres." 


VII. 

COMPARATIVE  MYTHOLOGY. 

IT  may  now  be  hoped  that  the  reader  is  per- 
suaded   that    the    science     of     language, 
although  it  professes  to  deal  merely  with  words, 
is  not   so    unimportant  a    science  as    it  might 
seem  at  first. 

After  the  human  mind,  language  is  the  most 
powerful  organ  of  civilization,  and  a  scientific 
study  of  language  can  not  but  touch  upon  ques- 
tions of  the  most  vital  importance  to  mankind. 
As  we  have  just  seen,  if  language  is  not  thought, 
it  is  at  least  its  most  powerful  instrument,  its 
most  immediate  index;  and  the  study  of  the 
development  of  language  is  most  closely  con- 
nected with  the  development  of  the  human 
mind.  Besides,  language  has  a  historical 
importance  which  no  other  human  fact  can 
claim  for  itself.  Strange  as  it  may  seem,  this 
invisible  breath,  which  we  utter  in  organic 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  209 


sounds,  is  far  stronger  than  aught  that  we  can 
raise  of  stone  or  bronze.  The  Egyptian  pyra- 
mids will  have  long  been  ruined,  crumbled,  into 
dust,  and  dispersed  by  the  winds  of  the  desert, 
when  the  scholars  of  generations  to  come  will 
still  be  studying  and  analyzing,  with  even 
better  results  perhaps  than  our  own,  the  words 
uttered  by  the  forefathers  of  the  men  who 
raised  those  monumental  structures. 

In  the  history  of  our  race  we  go  back  a  cer- 
tain distance  by  the  help  of  books,  and  other 
monuments,  but  at  last  we  reach  a  point  where 
there  are  no  books,  no  monuments,  no  pyra- 
mids, no  temples  ;  where  not  a  stone  is  left  to 
mark  our  way  further  into  the  mist  of  the  past. 
But  then,  when  every  other  help  fails,  language 
remains  to  us  ;  we  can  rebuild  the  languages  of 
peoples,  who,  centuries  ago,  were  swept  from 
the  face  of  the  earth,  and  by  the  fragmentary 
debris  of  their  language  we  can  still  catch  a 
glimpse  of  their  modes  of  life,  of  some  of  the 
most  notable  events  of  their  history,  of  their 
origin,  and  of  their  fate. 

This  wonderful  work  of  reconstruction  has 
been  carried  on,  to  a  certain  extent,  for  the 


210  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS, 

Indo-European  family.  Although  the  mother 
tongue,  from  which  these  languages  are  derived, 
is  dead,  we  see  by  the  evidence  of  these  same 
languages  that  it  was  spoken  by  people  who 
lived  more  than  3,000  years  ago.  The  original 
abode  of  this  primitive  people  must  have  been 
in  the  north-eastern  part  of  the  Iranian  table- 
land, near  the  Hindu-kush  mountains.  It 
seems  there  were  several  distinct  tribes,  and 
the  language  had  several  local  varieties,  or  dia- 
lects. These  varieties  grew  more  and  more 
important,  especially  after  the  tribes  had  left 
their  ancient  abode  and  scattered  themselves 
over  Europe  and  Asia,  until  they  assumed  the 
aspect  of  languages  which  at  first  seem  to  have 
no  connection. 

Again,  by  the  evidence  of  the  Aryan  lan- 
guages, we  see  that  the  people  who  spoke  the 
Aryan  mother  tongue,  was  not  nomadic,  but 
"  had  settled  habitations,  even  towns  and  fortified 
places,  and  addicted  itself  in  part  to  the  rear- 
ing of  cattle,  in  part  to  the  cultivation  of  the 
earth.  It  possessed  our  chief  domestic  animals 
— the  horse,  the  ox,  the  sheep,  the  goat,  and 
the  swine,  beside  the  dog  ;  the  bear  and  the 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  21 1 

wolf  were  foes  that  ravaged  its  flocks  ;  the 
mouse  and  fly  were  already  its  domestic  pests. 
"  The  region  it  inhabited  was  a  varied  one, 
not  bordering  upon  the  ocean.  The  season 
whose  name  has  been  most  persistent  is  the 
winter.  Barley,  and  perhaps  also  wheat,  was 
raised  for  food,  and  converted  into  meal.  Mead 
was  prepared  from  honey,  as  a  cheering  and 
inebriating  drink.  The  use  of  certain  metals 
was  known  ;  whether  iron  was  one  of  these 
admits  of  question.  The  art  of  weaving  was 
practiced  ;  wood  and  hemp,  and  possibly  flax, 
being  the  materials  employed.  Of  other 
branches  of  domestic  industry  little  that  is 
definite  can  be  said ;  but  those  already  men- 
tioned imply  a  variety  of  others,  as  co-ordinate 
or  auxiliary  to  them.  The  weapons  of  offense 
and  defense  were  those  which  are  usual  among 
primitive  peoples — the  sword,,  spear,  bow  and 
shield.  Boats  were  manufactured,  and  moved 
by  oars.  Of  extended  and  elaborate  political 
organization  no  traces  are  discoverable — the 
people  was  doubtless  a  congeries  of  petty 
tribes,  under  chiefs  and  leaders  rather  than 
kings,  and  with  institutions  of  a  patriarchal 


212  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

cast,  among  which  the  reduction  to  servitude  of 
prisoners  taken  in  war  appears  not  to  have  been 
wanting. 

"  The  structure  and  relations  of  the  family 
are  more  clearly  seen  ;  names  of  the  members, 
even  to  the  second  and  third  degrees  of  con- 
sanguinity and  affinity,  were  already  fixed ;  and 
were  significant  of  affectionate  regard  and 
trustful  interdependence.  That  woman  was 
looked  down  upon  as  a  being  in  capacity  and 
dignity  inferior  to  man  we  find  no  indication 
whatever. 

"  The  art  of  numeration  was  learned,  at  least 
up  to  a  hundred  ;  there  is  no  general  Indo- 
European  word  for  "thousand."  Some  of  the 
stars  were  noticed  and  named.  The  moon 
was  the  chief  measurer  of  time. 

"  The  religion  was  polytheistic,  a  worship  of 
the  personified  powers  of  nature.  Its  rites, 
whatever  they  were,  were  practiced  without  the 
aid  of  a  priesthood." — Whitney. 

Thus  it  is  that  by  the  help  of  words  we  can 
penetrate  into  the  history  of  the  most  civili/rd 
peoples,  as  the  Greeks  and  the  Romans,  into 
their  languages,  into  many  phases  of  their  life, 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  213 

far  deeper  than  they  themselves  were  able  to 
do.  As  for  their  origin,  we  know  positively 
where  they  came  from,  just  as  we  know  who 
our  own  ancestors  were,  while  on  this  subject 
they  had  to  be  satisfied  with  vague  and  fantas- 
tic imaginings,  without  any  means  whatever  of 
ascertaining  the  truth.  Their  mythology  was 
to  their  philosophers  and  poets — and  always 
has  been  since  to  every  scholar — a  great  riddle, 
which  they  tried  in  vain  to  solve.  Now,  thanks 
above  all  to  the  science  of  language,  the  re- 
searches, not  only  in  Greek  and  Roman,  but  in 
all  the  Indo-European  mythology,  have  entered 
upon  a  new  and  sure  path,  where  every  step  is 
at  once  a  conquest  and  a  help  toward  ulterior 
victories. 

The  ancient  and  modern  .  theories  about  the 
origin  of  the  mythology  of  Hellas  and  Rome 
may  be  reduced  to  three.  Some  sneered  at 
those  fanciful  creations  and  thought  they  had 
been  invented'  by  shrewd  men  in  order  to  teach 
the  multitude  to  behave  themselves ;  which  is 
rather  hard  for  us  to  understand,  when  we  con- 
sider that  all  kinds  of  wrongful  acts,  passions, 
and  vices  were  attributed  to  most  of  those 


214  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

gods.  Another  school  pretended  to  see  in 
mythological  fables  merely  a  veil  which  covered 
events  that  had  really  taken  place,  and  years 
of  toil  were  spent,  and  enormous  volumes  pub- 
lished, in  order  to  show  what  hero,  or  king, 
was  hidden  under  the  names  of  Jupiter  ;  who 
was  ^Eacus  ;  where  did  Saturn  live  and  reign. 
The  third  school  held  also  that  mythology 
veiled  historical  events,  but  they  had  a  partic- 
ular tendency  to  look  at  Greek  mythology  as  a 
mere  disguise  of  the  facts  of  the  Old  Testa- 
ment. Thus  they  recognized  Noah  and  Noah's 
three  sons,  Shem,  Ham,  and  Japhet,  in  Saturn 
and  his  three  sons,  Jupiter,  Neptune,  and  Pluto. 
Vulcan  was  identified  with  Tubal  Cain,  Typhon 
with  Og.  One  writer  pretended  that  the 
Odyssey  was  an  exposition  of  the  history  of 
the  patriarchs,  the  emigration  of  Lot  from 
Sodom,  and  the  death  of  Moses,  while  the 
Iliad  told  of  the  conquest  and  destruction  of 
Jericho  !  Of  course,  there  is  not  the  least  fact 
to  buttress  up  such  extravagant  opinions,  and 
all  this  ingenuity  was  simply  wasted.  The 
science  of  language  has  the  great  merit  of 
having  established  this  fact,  that,  given  a  fam- 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  215 


ily  of  peoples  descended  from  a  common  stock, 
as  we  can  not  explain  their  words  without  com- 
paring them  one  with  the  other  and  without 
going  back  to  the  common  source  from  which 
those  different  words  sprung  ;  so  when  we  study 
the  growth  of  mythology  with  kindred  peoples, 
it  is  a  sheer  waste  of  time  to  try  to  explain 
those  various  myths  without  resorting  to  com- 
parison, without  contrasting  the  various  forms 
which  each  myth  assumes  with  each  one  of 
those  peoples,  so  as  to  find  by  means  of  these 
comparisons  which  is  the  simplest  of  all  those 
forms,  where  the  myth  comes  from,  and  how 
it  was  successively  developed. 

With  reference  to  Greece  and  Rome,  it  has 
always  been  known  that  Latin  and  Greek  were 
two  cognate  languages  ;  but  what  their  mutual 
relations  really  were,  and  what  their  origin,  it 
was  not  possible  to  ascertain,  so  long  as  we 
remained  in  Greece  and  Rome.  We  had  to  go 
out  of  that  field  ;  we  had  to  take  in  another 
term  of  comparison — Sanskrit — and  then  the 
structure  of  Latin  and  Greek,  their  origin  and 
mutual  relations,  could  be  found  and  defined 
in  all  certainty. 


216  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

It  is  the  same  with  mythology.  Greek  and 
Roman  mythology  never  could  be  explained 
without  resorting  to  comparisons  with  the 
mythology  of  cognate  peoples.  Luckily,  what 
Sanskrit  has  proved  to  be  for  Latin  and  Greek, 
Indian  mythology  is  for  the  Greek  and  Roman 
Olympus.  Thanks  to  the  Vedas,  the  most  an- 
cient product  of  Indian  literature,  we  can  sur- 
prise, so  to  speak,  mythology  in  its  growth, 
and  thence  follow  it  to  Greece  and  Rome,  and 
to  the  other  branches  of  the  Indo-European 
family. 

Unfortunately,  those  studies  are  rife  with 
difficulties,  and,  having  been  undertaken  only 
of  late  years,  the  harvest  of  positive  results 
which  they  have  yielded  is  not  yet  very  large. 
But  it  is  continually  increasing,  and  it  is  to  be 
hoped  that  it  will  be  great  and  conspicuous  ere 
long. 

Meanwhile,  some  highly  noteworthy  facts 
have  been  acquired  and,  what  is  most  impor- 
tant, we  now  know  how  the  myth  is  formed. 
Although,  it  is  difficult  to  follow  it  in  its  growth, 
and  although  scholars  are  sometimes  apt  to 
disagree  about  many  facts  incident  to  its  life, 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  217 

still  we  are  able  to  tell  how  it  is  born.     This  is 

great  achievement.     When  the   source  of  a 

iver  is  discovered,  it  is  reasonable  to  hope  that 

re   will    succeed    before    long    in  finding    its 

:ourse,  its  branches,  and  every  thing  about  it. 

The  growth  of  the  myth  is  like  a  particular 
:ind  of  metaphor.  The  original  meaning  of  a 
rordis  lost,  one  of  its  metaphorical  meanings  is 
exaggerated  far  beyond  its  original  signification, 
and  around  this  latter  meaning  a  legend  grows 
up,  which  constitutes  a  myth.  For  instance,  as 
Max  Muller  so  well  explains,  nothing  is  so  nat- 
ural, especially  to  a  primitive  people,  as  to  speak 
of  the  sun's  rays,  which  seem  to  play  with  the 
foliage  of  the  trees  and  caress  the  mountain 
tops,  as  the  arms  or  hands  of  the  sun.  We 
must  not  wonder  then  at  reading  in  the  Vedas, 
that  the  sun  was  called,  among  other  epithets, 
"  the  golden-handed."  Nothing  is  more  natural 
and  more  easy  to  explain.  But  by  and  by,  this 
simple  and  natural  reason  for  the  epithet, 
"  golden-handed,"  wras  forgotten :  the  sun  was 
spoken  of  as  a  person,  as  a  God,  who  carries 
gold  in  his  hand  and  showers  it  upon  his  pious 
worshipers.  Nor  does  the  popular  imagination 


218  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

stop  here  :  we  find  in  the  commentaries  to  the 
Vedas,  a  story  that  the  sun  had  lost  one  of  his 
hands,  and  the  priests  had  replaced  it  with  a 
golden  one.  Later  the  sun,  under  the  name  of 
Savitar,  becomes  himself  a  priest,  and  we  read 
how  once  in  performing  a  sacrifice  he  cut  off  his 
hand,  and  the  other  priests  made  a  golden  one 
for  him. 

Take  another  case;  Marut  in  Sanskrit  means 
"  wind,"  and  there  is  nothing  extraordinary  in 
saying  that  the  wind  sings.  Such  expressions  are 
familiar  in  all  languages.  But  in  the  Vedas  we 
find  that  the  Maruts  are  transformed  into  singers. 
They  are  "  musicians." 

The  most  important  God  of  the  Greek  and 
Roman  Olympus  had  no  dissimilar  origin.  The 
Greek  Zeus,  the  Latin  Jovis  (or  In,  Ju-piter), 
Dyaus  in  Sanskrit,  Tiw  in  Anglo-Saxon  (pre- 
served in  Tiwsdoegi  Tuesday)  are  all  traced  back 
by  comparative  philology  to  the  root  din  which 
means  "  to  beam,"  "  to  shine,"  and  it  was  used 
especially  to  denote  sky  and  day.  At  the  start, 
then,  Zeus  and  Jove  meant  nothing  but  the  sky; 
but  this  primitive  meaning  of  the  word  by  and 
by  was  lost,  and  Zeus  and  Jupiter  became  the 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  219 

giver  of  the  rain,  the  source  of  light,  the  maker 
of  the  seasons,  the  ruler  of  the  world. 

The  great  personality  of  Prometheus,  the 
deep  meaning  attributed  to  it  by  Greek  poets, 
the  works  of  art  that  illustrate  it  all  over 
the  world,  are  known  to  every  body ;  yet  this 
great  myth,  if  we  trace  it  back  to  India,  has  a 
very  humble  origin.  Pramantha,  the  Indian 
name  of  Prometheus,  was  but  a  stick,  which,  by 
rubbing  against  another  stick,  was  made  to  give 
heat  and  fire — the  only  way  this,  of  getting 
fire  with  a  primitive  community.  The  root 
manth,  from  which  Pra-mantha  comes,  means  to 
agitate,  to  shake  quickly  ;  a  meaning  which  fits 
perfectly  the  first  condition  of  PramantJia.  But 
the  root  manth  means  also  to  draw  out,  to  steal. 
Hence  Pramantha  came  to  be  thought  of  as  a 
"  stealer  of  fire;"  hence,  the  whole  legend— 
which  did  not  reach  its  utmost  complexity  until 
it  was  elaborated  by  Greek  fancy — of  the  giant 
stealing  the  fire  from  Heaven,  the  consequent 
wrath  of  Zeus,  and  the  martyrdom  of  Pro- 
metheus. Prometheus  was  all  the  dearer  to  the 
people  inasmuch  as  the  origin  of  fire  was 
naturally  connected  with  the  origin  and  progress 


220  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

of  every  useful  art,  and  Prometheus  was  there- 
fore looked  upon  as  the  greatest  benefactor  of 
mankind. 

I  do  not  pursue  these  mythological  dis- 
quisitions any  further,  as  most  myths 
can  not  be  explained  satisfactorily  without 
bringing  in  many  linguistic  facts  which  would 
transcend  by  far  the  limits  of  this  work.  But 
these  brief  hints  are  enough,  I  hope,  to  show  in 
what  light  now  the  growth  of  mythology 
is  regarded,  and  how  this  branch  of  human 
research  has  been  entirely  renovated  by  the 
science  of  language.  Of  course,  we  must  not 
forget  another  powerful  factor  of  mythology  : 
that  tendency,  common  especially  to  unculti- 
vated minds,  to  see  personal  forces  at  work  in  all 
the  phenomena  of  the  universe.  But  this  same 
tendency  would  go  a  very  short  way,  were  it  not 
helped  in  its  course  by  the  metaphorical  use  of 
words,  which  alone  can  give  shape  to  the 
personifying  tendencies  of  our  minds. 

So  that,  after  all,  the  history  of  mythology  is 
in  great  part  a  history  of  words.  Words, 
metaphorically  used,  and  whose  original  mean- 
ing is  lost,  give  rise  to  legends  in  keeping  with 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  221 

their  new  meaning  and  with  the  tendency  of 
primitive,  uncultivated  minds  to  see  in  natural 
phenomena  those  same  forces,  whose  working 
they  feel  within  themselves.  This  mythological 
process  is  not  different  after  all  from  what  has 
taken  place  in  historical  times,  nor  from  what  is 
going  on  daily  around  us.  The  history  of  the 
middle  ages  is  full  of  astonishing  legends, 
built  entirely  upon  words,  and  more  sur- 
prising even  than  the  stories  of  ancient 
mythology.  The  name  of  the  city  of  Rheims 
in  France,  for  instance,  gave  rise  to  a  legend 
widely  spread  over  Europe,  that  that  city  had 
been  founded  by  Remus,  the  brother  of  Rom- 
ulus, and  we  read  in  many  medieval  chronicles 
that  afterwards  Remus  went  to  Rome,  and  the 
enmity  between  the  two  brothers  grew  out  of 
the  jealousy  of  Romulus  because  of  the  great 
prosperity  of  the  city  founded  by  his  brother. 

The  names  of  almost  all  the  German  princes 
and  barons  were  traced  back  by  medieval 
writers  to  Roman  families,  and  stories  ad  Jioc  of 
their  descent,  of  fabulous  migrations  and  deeds, 
were  easily  invented  and  currently  believed. 

The  "  Legenda   Aurea  "  says  of    St.  Christo- 


222  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

pher:  "  He  would  not  serve  any  body  who  had 
himself  a  master,  and  when  he  heard  that  his  lord 
was  afraid  of  the  devil,  he  left  him  and  became 
himself  the  servant  of  the  devil.  One  day, 
however,  when  passing  a  cross,  he  observed 
that  his  new  master  was  afraid  of  the  cross,  and 
learning  that  there  was  One  still  more  power- 
ful than  the  devil,  he  left  him  to  enter  the  ser- 
vice of  Christ.  He  was  instructed  by  an  old 
hermit,  but  being  unable  to  fast  or  to  pray,  he 
was  told  to  serve  Christ  by  carrying  travelers 
across  a  deep  river.  This  he  did  until  one  day  he 
was  called  three  times,  and  the  third  time  he  saw 
a  child  that  wished  to  be  carried  across  the  river. 
He  took  him  on  his  shoulders,  but  his  weight 
was  so  great  that  he  could  hardly  reach  the 
opposite  shore.  When  he  had  reached  it,  the 
child  told  him  he  had  carried  Christ  himself  on 
his  shoulders,  in  proof  whereof  his  stick,  which 
he  had  used  for  many  years,  when  planted  in 
the  earth  grew  into  a  tree." 

There  is  not  a  shadow  of  truth  in  this  legend  ; 
even  sacred  writers  agree  that  it  sprung  up 
entirely  from  the  name  of  the  saint,  "Christo- 
pher," which  means  "  he  who  carries  God," 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  223 

(from  the  root  fer,  to  carry,)  namely  in  his 
heart.  But  the  name  was  taken  in  a  material 
sense  and  the  legend  was  invented  to  explain  it. 

Sayce  relates  how  a  "  houskeeper  used  to 
point  out  a  Canaletto  to  visitors  with  the 
remark  that  it  was  '  a  candle-light  picture,  so- 
called  because  it  could  not  be  seen  to  best 
advantage  during  the  day,'  and  what  this  good 
housekeeper  did  on  a  small  scale,  mankind  has 
always  been  doing  on  a  large  scale." 

A  snow  lake  on  the  top  of  the  Swiss  moun- 
tain Pilatus  is  said  to  have  been  the  place 
where  the  unworthy  Roman  proconsul  found 
his  death  ;  and  horrible  descriptions  were 
spread  abroad  of  that  pretty  lake.  The  name 
of  the  mountain  has  nothing  to  do  with  Pilate  ; 
it  was  called  Pilatus  from  Latin pileum,  "cap," 
whether  they  meant  the  cap  of  clouds  or  the 
cap  of  snow  which  crowns  it. 

Closely  connected  with  comparative  mythol- 
ogy is  the  science  of  religions.  Religions  may 
be  divided  into  two  classes  :  those  that  have 
been  organized  into  a  system,  and  those 
that  have  not.  The  religions  of  the  latter  class 
are  in  reality  a  mere  ensemble  of  mythological 


224  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

tales,  and  in  order  to  explain  them  we  must 
resort  to  the  science  of  language,  as  we  have 
seen.  Religions  of  the  former  class  rest  on 
sacred  books  which  also  can  not  be  satisfactor- 
ily explained  without  the  help  of  comparative 
philology.  So  that  in  either  case,  the  science 
of  religions  rests  on  the  science  of  language. 
Of  course,  the  intuition  of  the  divine,  the 
sense  of  the  infinite,  which  constitutes  the  soul 
of  all  religion,  lies  outside  the  pale  of  science. 
But  the  various  forms  in  which  different  peo- 
ples have  conceived  divinity,  the  various  ways 
in  which  they  have  represented  it,  may  be  the 
object  of  scientific  investigations.  The  science 
of  religions  will  be  one  of  the  greatest  offsprings 
of  the  science  of  language,  since  nothing  is  so 
interesting  as  to  follow  step  by  step,  compara- 
tively and  historically,  the  toilsome  path  by 
which  poor  struggling  humanity  has  risen  to  an 
ever  higher  conception  of  the  Divine. 

Leaving  Christianity  aside — from  the  ser- 
pents and  stones  and  beasts  worshiped  by  the 
savage,  to  the  beautiful  genial  inhabitants  of  the 
Greek  Olympus,  what  a  long  way !  what  a  long 
course  of  centuries  is  required  to  bridge  over 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  225 

such  an  abyss  !  Would  it  not  be  highly  interest- 
ing, would  it  not  throw  a  great  light  upon 
human  nature,  if  it  were  possible  to  follow,  step 
by  step,  the  way  trodden  by  mankind  from  one 
of  these  extremities  to  the  other  ?  Undoubtedly 
it  would  ;  and  it  will  be  possible  too,  but  solely 
through  the  science  of  language.  The  work  is 
as  vast  as  it  is  important  ;  a  long  time  will  be 
requisite  before  all  possible  results  can  be  ob- 
tained ;  but  it  is  fairly  begun,  and  scholars  of 
all  nations  toil  on  at  it  laboriously  and  hope- 
fully. 

Another  science  which  owes  its  origin  to  the 
science  of  language  is  known- by  the  name  of 
folk-lore.  It  studies  particularly  all  those 
legends  and  stories  which  are  current  among 
the  people,  and  those  tales  which  are  the 
special  heirloom  of  nurseries  and  in  which  chil- 
dren revel. 

Once  these  legends  and  tales  were  looked 
down  upon  as  mere  nonsense,  fit  only  to  amuse 
children  and  decrepit  old  people.  But  since  they 
have  been  studied  in  the  light  of  comparative 
philology,  treasures  of  ethnological,  historical 
and  linguistical  information  have  appeared  hid- 


226  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

den  in  them,  which  at  first  it  would  have 
been  temerity  even  to  suspect.  The  tales 
with  which  mothers  and  nurses  amuse  chil- 
dren, and  which  fill  them  with  terror,  or 
light  up  with  merriment  familiar  gatherings 
around  the  fireside,  all  the  world  over,  are 
not  the  inventions  of  the  mother,  the  nurse, 
or  the  story  teller;  they  belong  to  a  large 
patrimony,  common  to  all  branches  of  one  race, 
sometimes  even  to  different  races.  They  have 
traveled  from  afar;  many  of  them  have  come 
down  to  us  from  our'forefathers  in  the  central 
plains  of  Asia;  they  have  accompanied  them 
in  their  migrations  all  over  Europe  and  Asia ; 
they  have  changed  with  the  language,  the 
religion,  and  the  surroundings;  but  in  sub- 
stance they  have  remained  the  same.  To-day 
we  can  take  a  story  told  to  English  children 
by  their  nurses,  compare  it  with  the  same  story, 
slightly  changed,  as  it  is  told  to  French,  Ger- 
man, Italian,  Russian,  and  Indian  children,  and 
go  back  to  the  source  from  which  the  story 
came,  or  at  least,  to  a  very  ancient  version  in 
which  it  was  first  told. 

These  comparative  studies  in  folk-lore  are  not 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS'.  227 

without  great  importance  :  they  throw  no  little 
light  upon  the  relations  of  the  different  branches 
of  mankind,  and  their  history,  and  upon  the 
psychic  development  of  nations ;  and  they  teach 
us,  more  forcibly  perhaps  than  any  other  science, 
the  fundamental  unity  of  human  nature.  It 
has  been  said  with  reason  that  "  an  exhaustive 
account  of  the  folk-lores  of  the  world  would  be 
equivalent  to  a  complete  history  of  the  thoughts 
of  mankind." 


VIII. 

LANGUAGES  AND   RACES  —  LOCAL  AND  FAMILY 
NAMES. 

"Names  are  enduring  —  generations  come  and  go  .  .  .  . 
Nomenclature  is  a  well  in  which  as  the  fresh  water  is  flowing 
perennially  through,  there  is  left  a  sediment  that  clings  to  the 
bottom." — C.  W.  BARDSLEY. 

AMONG  the  most  important  questions  which 
present  themselves  to  the  mind  of  the 
student  of  language,  is  that  of  the  connection 
between  peoples  and  languages.  In  the  begin- 
ning of  the  science  of  language  some  students, 
not  entirely  free  from  that  over-enthusiasm 
which  is  a  great  strength  as  well  as  a  fruitful 
cause  of  mistakes  with  all  pioneers,  went  so  far 
as  to  identify  the  idea  of  race  and  language, 
and  to  hold  that  peoples  who  speak  the  same 
language  belong  to  the  same  race,  or  the  same 
family.  A  great  part  of  the  political  move- 
ments which  in  this  century  have  changed  the 
face  of  Europe,  have  been  prompted  by  the 
idea  of  nationality.  Europe  aspired,  and  still 
aspires  to  be  organized  according  to  nationali- 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  229 


t;s,  which  is  considered  a  natural  organization 
contrasted  with  the  artificial  divisions  die- 
ted by  diplomacy.  But  on  what  ground  was 
placed  the  differentiation  of  nationalities? 
Mainly  on  language.  Germans  were  said  to  be 
the  peoples  who  speak  German  ;  French  those 
who  speak  French  ;  Italians  those  who  speak 
Italian.  But  whoever  has  followed  our  pre- 
vious reasonings  can  easily  judge  for  himself 
of  the  real  value  of  such  claims.  Language  is 
entirely  distinct  from  race.  As  an  Indian  child 
brought  up  in  England  learns  English  as.  his 
own  natural  language,  so  a  community  belong- 
ing to  one  family  of  peoples  may,  and  many 
times  do,  learn  and  speak  and  use  exclusively  a 
language  belonging  to  quite  a  different  family. 
France,  which  is  mainly  of  Celtic  and  Germanic 
blood,  speaks  a  Latin  language ;  while  in  the 
veins  of  the  peoples  who  speak  Italian  flows  a 
great  amount  of  non-Latin  blood.  Celtic  Ire- 
land speaks  English,  a  Teutonic  language. 
History  is  full  of  such  instances,  and  to  assume 
that  peoples  belong  to  the  same  family  merely 
because  they  speak  cognate  languages  is  against 
all  historical  evidence. 


230  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

We  must  not,  however,  underrate  the  value  of 
language  for  ethnological  researches.  If  rela- 
tionship of  language  does  not  prove  absolutely 
relationship  of  blood,  it  has  still  great  weight. 
If  other  characteristics  concur,  and  positive  his- 
torical facts  are  not  against  it,  then  relationship 
of  language  may  be  supposed  to  afford  a  con- 
clusive proof.  Besides,  we  must  remember 
that  when  a  community  came  to  change  their 
own  language  for  another,  there  generally  is 
historical  evidence  of  such  fact ;  so  that,  when 
such  historical  evidence  is  wanting,  relationship 
of  language  is  by  itself,  if  not  a  proof,  at  least 
a  strong  presumption  of  relationship  of  blood. 

If  we  go  back  to  the  mists  of  earliest  his- 
tory, nothing  helps  us  so  much  as  the  science 
of  language  to  discover  and  follow  the 
tracks  of  the  great  migrations  of  races  which 
first  peopled  Europe  and  superseded  each 
other,  or  mingled  together,  long  before  they 
were  civilized  enough  to  preserve  and  hand 
down  to  posterity  the  records  of  important 
events.  The  monuments  of  those  ages  which 
can  be  utilized  by  the  ethnologist  are  extremely 
scanty;  records,  properly  historical,  are  missing 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  231 

entirely ;  nothing  remains  but  fragments  of 
speech.  By  the  aid  of  these,  the  science  of 
language  can  take  us  back  to  ages  where  both 
history  and  ethnology  are  equally  silent,  and 
can  show  us  by  what  races  the  ground  of  Europe 
has  been  successively  trodden  ;  how  they  forced 
one  another  away  from  their  places,  or  how 
they  settled  and  mingled  together.  Thus  it  is 
that  by  the  help  of  these  linguistic  materials 
we  can  discern  the  nationality  of  the  migratory 
tribes  which  move  in  the  early  history  of  Eu- 
rope, better  even  than  the  Romans  who  came 
in  contact  with  them,  and  a  few  fragmentary 
words  enable  us  to  correct  the  mistakes  of 
Julius  Caesar. 

Treasures  of  historical  and  ethnological  infor- 
mation lie  hidden  in  local  names,  which  have 
persisted  through  centuries  down  to  our  days, 
and  that  branch  of  the  science  of  language 
which  is  devoted  to  the  study  of  local  names  is 
one  of  the  most  interesting  of  all.  We  daily 
pronounce  the  name  of  some  river,  or  mountain, 
or  city,  without  ever  pausing  to  ask  why  they 
should  be  called  by  such  names.  Who  has 
ever  asked  himself  what  London  means?  or 


232  TUE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

Paris,  or  Berlin  /  Where  do  the  names  of  our 
rivers  come  from?  Who  named  them  ?  Such 
names  cannot  be  the  work  of  nature  ;  they  have 
been  bestowed  by  men.  And  if  men  are  reason- 
able beings,  we  must  assume  that  there  was  a 
reason  why  such  city,  or  river,  or  mountain,  or 
country  was  called  by  such  or  such  a  name. 
In  other  words,  local  names,  however  obscure 
and  meaningless  they  may  appear  to  us,  must 
have  had  a  meaning  ;  a  meaning  which  was 
clear  to  those  by  whom  such  names  were  first 
bestowed.  Even  the  uneducated  feel,  as  by 
instinct,  that  it  must  be  so,  since  they  display 
an  uncheckable  tendency  to  etymologize  about 
local  names.  But  it  was  for  the  science  of 
language  to  study  in  a  systematic  way  the 
formation  of  local  names,  to  bring  forth  their 
true  value,  both  linguistic  and  historical,  and 
in  many  cases  to  find  out  their  primitive  mean- 
ing, although  hidden  by  centuries  of  unwritten 
history,  and  sometimes  disguised  by  false  ety- 
mologies and  fanciful  legends.  In  this  wax- 
local  names  are  made  to  throw  not  a  little  light 
upon  events  long  forgotten,  or  very  dimly 
remembered,  migrations  of  peoples,  and  mem- 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS,  233 

ories    of    races    afterward     swept     from     the 
country. 

Under  the  title,"  Words  and  Places,"  Isaac  Tay- 
lor, the  learned  author  of  the  History  of  the  Al- 
phabet, has  summed  up,  in  a  plain  and  at  the 
same  time  comprehensive  way,  the  main  results 
of  recent  philological  researches  concerning  local 
names  in  Europe,  and  in  England  in  particular. 

In  the  first  place,  in  order  to  understand 
better  what  happened  centuries  ago,  let  us 
glance  at  what  has  been  going  on  in  recent 
times,  where  facts  can  be  easily  ascertained. 

If  we  look  at  a  map  of  America,  we  find 
names  derived  from  a  dozen  languages.  First 
we  have  scattered  Indian  names ;  like  the 
Potomac,,  Niagara,  Allegheny,  etc.  "These 
names  are  very  sparsely  distributed  over  large 
areas,  some  of  them  filled  almost  exclusively 
with  English  names,  while  in  others  the  names 
are  mostly  of  Spanish  or  Portuguese  origin — 
the  boundary  between  the  regions  of  the 
English  and  Spanish,  or  of  the  Spanish  and 
Portuguese  names,  being  easily  traceable.  In 
Louisiana  and  Lower  Canada  we  find  a  pre- 
dominance of  French  names,  many  of  them 


234  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

exhibiting  Norman  and  Breton  peculiarities. 
In  New  York  we  find,  here  and  there,  a  few 
Dutch  names,  as  well  as  patches  of  German 
names  in  Michigan  and  Brazil.  We  find  that 
the  Indian,  Dutch  and  French  names  have 
more  frequently  been  corrupted  than  those 
derived  either  from  the  English  or  from  the 

Spanish  languages If  we  were  entirely 

destitute  of  any  historical  records  of  the  actual 
course  of  American  colonization,  it  is  evident 
that,  with  the  aid  of  the  map  alone,  we  might 
recover  many  most  important  facts,  and  put 
together  an  outline,  by  no  means  to  be  despised, 
of  the  early  history  of  the  continent  ;  we  might 
successfully  investigate  the  retrocession  and 
extinction  of  the  Indian  tribes — we  might  dis- 
cover the  positions  in  which  the  colonies  of  the 
several  European  nations  were  planted — we 
might  show,  from  the  character  of  the  names, 
how  the  gradually  increasing  supremacy  of  the 
Anglo-American  stock  must  have  enabled  it  to 
incorporate,  and  overlay  with  a  layer  of  English 
names,  the  colonies  of  other  nations,  such  as 
the  Spanish  settlements  in  Florida  and  Texas, 
the  Dutch  colony  in  the  neighborhood  of  New 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  235 

York,  and  the  French  settlements  on  the  St. 
Lawrence  and  the  Mississippi. 

"The  same  thing  that  happened  with  local 
names  in  America,  took  place  in  Europe,  where 
we  can,  with  their  sole  aid,  follow  the  migra- 
tions of  the  Celts,  the  Teutons,  and  all  the 
most  important  races. 

Wilhelm  von  Humboldt  was  one  of  the 
>ioneers  in  this  new  science  of  etymological 
ethnology.  On  the  map  of  Spain,  France  and 
Italy,  he  has  marked  out,  by  the  evidence  of 
names  alone,  the  precise  regions  which,  before 
the  period  of  the  Roman  conquest,  were  inhab- 
ited by  those  Euskarian  or  Iberic  races,  who 
are  now  represented  by  the  Basques — the 
mountaineers  of  the  Asturiasand  the  Pyrenees. 

"  By  a  similar  process  Prichard  demonstrated 
that  the  ancient  Belgie  were  of  Celtic,  not  of 
Teutonic,  race,  as  had  previously  been  sup- 
posed. So  cogent  is  the  evidence  supplied  by 
these  names,  that  ethnologists  are  agreed  in 
setting  aside  the  direct  testimony  of  such  a 
good  authority  as  Caesar,  who  asserts  that  the 
Belgae  were  of  German  blood. 

"  Archdeacon  Williams,  in  like  manner,  has 


236  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

indicated  the  limits  of  the  Celtic  region  in 
Northern  Italy,  and  has  pointed  out  detached 
Celtic  colonies  in  the  central  portion  of  that 
peninsula.  Other  industrious  explorers  have 
followed  the  wanderings  of  this  ancient  people 
through  Switzerland,  Germany  and  France,  and 
have  shown  that  in  those  countries  the  Celtic 
speech  still  lives  upon  the  map,  though  it  has 
vanished  from  the  glossary." 

For  England,  "  this  method  has  afforded  re- 
sults of  peculiar  interest  and  value.  It  has 
enabled  us  to  detect  the  successive  tides  of 
immigration  that  have  flowed  in  ;  as  the  ripple- 
marked  slabs  of  sandstone  record  the  tidal  flow 
of  the  primeval  ocean,  so  wave  after  wave  of 
population — Gaelic,  Cymric,  Roman,  Saxon, 
Anglian,  Frisian,  Norwegian,  Danish,  Nor- 
man and  Flemish — has  left  its  mark  upon  the 
once  shifting,  but  now  indurated  sands  of  lan- 
guage. The  modern  map  of  England  enables 
us  to  prove  that  almost  the  whole  of  England 
was  once  Celtic,  and  shows  us  that  the  Scottish 
lowlands  were  peopled  by  tribes  belonging  to 
the  Welsh,  and  not  to  the  Gaelic  stock.  The 
study  of  Anglo-Saxon  names  enables  us  to  trace 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  237 

the  nature  and  progress  of  the  Teutonic  settle- 
ment, and  to  draw  the  line  between  the  Anglian 
and  the  Anglo-Saxon  kingdoms ;  while  the 
Scandinavian  village-names  of  Lincolnshire, 
Leicestershire,  Caithness,  Cumberland,  Pem- 
brokeshire, Iceland  and  Normandy,  teach  us 
the  almost  forgotten  story  of  the  fierce 
Vikings,  who  left  the  fiords  of  Norway  and  the 
vies  of  Denmark  to  plunder  and  to  conquer 
the  coasts  and  kingdoms  of  western  Europe." 

In  these  researches,  names  of  rivers  and 
mountains  are  of  the  greatest  value  ;  since 
great  rivers  generally  mark  the  course  of  emi- 
gration, and  "  mountain  fastnesses  have  always 
formed  a  providential  refuge  for  conquered 
tribes." 

We  can  follow,  by  the  aid  of  the  map,  the 
progress  of  the  Phoenicians,  and  the  triumphal 
march  of  the  Arabs.  Spain  is  all  dotted  with 
Arabic  names,  thick  near  the  shores,  but  which 
become  less  and  less  numerous  the  more  we 
progress  toward  the  mountains,  until  they  dis- 
appear almost  entirely  in  Galicia  and  the 
Asturias,  the  extreme  northern  part  of  the 
peninsula.  There  are  many  Spanish  rivers 


238  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

whose  names  begin  by  guad.  In  Palestine  and 
Arabia  this  word  appears  in  the  form  of  ivadi 
— a  ravine,  a  river.  The  name  of  the  Gaudal- 
quivir  is  a  corruption  of  Wadi-1-kcbir,  the  great 
river — a  name  which  is  found  also  in  Arabia. 
We  have  also  the  river  names  of  Guadalca/ar, 
which  is  Wadi-1-kasr,  "  the  river  of  the  palace"; 
Guadalhorra,  from  Wadi-1-ghar,  "  the  river  of 
the  cave"  ;  Guadarranke,  from  Wadi-1-ramack, 
"  the  mares'  river"  ;  Guadalquiton,  from  Wadi- 
1-kitt,  "  the  cat  river " ;  Guadalaxara,  from 
Wadi-1  hajarah,  "the  river  of  the  stones"; 
Guaroman,  from  Wadi-roman,  "  the  river  of 
the  pomegranate  trees ";  Guadalaviar,  from 
Wadi-1-abyadh,  "  the  white  river"  ;  Guadaltipc, 
"  the  river  of  the  bay"  ;  Guadalbacar,  "the  ox 
river"  ;  Guadaliman,  "  the  red  river"  ;  Guadn- 
rama,  "  the  sandy  river,"  etc. 

We  find  the  word  medina,  "  city,"  in  Medina 
Cceli,  Medina  Sidonia,  and  three  other  Spanish 
cities.  We  find  not  a  few  names  beginning  by 
cala  (Arabic  kal-ah,  a  castle),  or  by  alc<i/a, 
which  is  the  same  word  with  the  Arabic  defi- 
nite article  prefixed. 

Turning    again    to  England,  the  results    of 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  239 

such  researches  are  even  more  abundant. 
England  has  been  said  to  be  "  the  land  of  inclo- 
sures."  In  fact  "  an  examination  of  English 
local  names  shows  us  that  the  love  of  privacy, 
and  the  seclusiveness  of  character,-  which  is  so 
often  laid  to  the  charge  of  Englishmen,  pre- 
vailed in  full  force  among  the  races  which 
imposed  names  upon  English  villages.  The 
universally  recurring  terminations  ton,  ham, 
worth,  stoke,  stow,  fold,  garth,  park,  Jiay, 
burgJi,  bury,  brough,  borrow,  all  convey  the 
notion  of  inclosure  or  protection." 

The  primary  meaning  of  the  suffix  ton  (Bar- 
ton, Burton,  Shottington,  Wingleton,  Coding- 
ton,  Appleton),  is  to  be  sought  in  the  Gothic 
tains,  the  old  Norse  teinn,  and  the  Frisian 
tcnc,  all  of  which  mean  a  twig — a  radical 
signification  which  survives  in  the  phrase  "  the 
tine  of  a  fork."  The  Anglo-Saxon  verb  tynan 
means  "  to  hedge."  Brushwood,  used  for 
hedging,  is  called  tinetum  in  Low  Latin.  Hence 
a  tun  or  ton  was  a  place  surrounded  by  a  hedge, 
or  rudely  fortified  by  a  palisade. 

In  most  cases  the  isolated  ton  became  the  nu- 
cleus of  a  village ;  the  village  grew  into  a  town. 


240  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

The  Anglo-Saxon  yard  and  the  Norse  equiva- 
lent garth  contain  nearly  the  same  idea  as  ton. 
Both  denote  some  place  guarded  or  girded. 

Again  the  Anglo-Saxon  weortiJig,  which 
appears  in  E-nglish  names  in  the  form  of  worth 
(Bosworth,  Tamworth,  Kenilworth,  Walworth, 
Wandsworth,  etc.),  bears  a  meaning  nearly  the 
same  as  that  of  ton  or  garth.  It  denotes  a 
place  warded  or  protected,  from  the  Anglo- 
Saxon  warian,  to  ward  or  defend. 

The  suffixes  bury,  borough,  burgJi,  brough  and 
burrow  are  related  to  the  Anglo-Saxon  verb 
beorgan,  and  to  the  German  bcrgcn,  to  shelter 
or  hide. 

The  suffix  ham,  which  is  very  frequent 
in  English  names,  appears  in  two  forms  in 
Anglo-Saxon  documents.  One  of  them,  ham, 
signifies  an  inclosure,  that  which  hems  in  ;  the 
other,  /tain  (German  hcim,  English  home),  ex- 
presses "  the  sanctity  of  the  family  bond." 

But  "  the  most  important  element  which 
enters  into  Anglo-Saxon  names  is  the  suffix 
ing.  It  occurs  in  the  names  of  more  than  one- 
tenth  of  the  whole  number  of  English  villages 
and  hamlets,  often  as  a  simple  suffix,  as  in  the 


I 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  241 

case  of  Barking,  Brading,  Dorking,  Hastings, 
Kettering,  Tring,  or  Woking ;  but  more  fre- 
quently we  find  that  it  forms  the  medial  sylla- 
ble of  the  name,  as  in  the  case  of  Buckingham, 
Kensington,  Islington,  Haddington,  or  Wel- 
lington. This  syllable  ing  was  the  usual  Anglo- 
Saxon  patronymic. 

"Thus  we  read  in  the  Saxon  Chronicle  (A.  D. 
547): 

Ida  waes  Eopping,  Ida  was  Eoppa's  son  ; 

Eoppa  waes  Esing,  Eoppa  was  Esa's  son  ; 

Esa  waes  Inguing,  Esa  was  Ingvvy's  son  ; 

Ingui,  Augenwiting,  Ingwy,  Augenwit's  son. 

"  In  fact,  the  suffix  ing  in  the  names  of  persons 
had  very  much  the  same  significance  as  the  pre- 
fix Mac'm  Scotland,  (9'  in  Ireland,  Ap  in  Wales. 
A  whole  clan  or  tribe  claiming  to  be  descended 
from  a  real  or  mythic  progenitor,  or  a  body  of 
adventurers  attaching  themselves  to  the  stand- 
ard of  some  chief,  were  thus  distinguished  by  a 
common  patronymic  or  clan  name.  .  .  .  The 
Saxon  immigration  was,  doubtless,  an  immigra- 
tion of  clans.  The  subsequent  Scandinavian 
colonization  was,  on  the  other  hand,  wholly  or 


242  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

mainly  effected  by  soldiers  of  fortune."  We 
can  see  this  by  Saxon  local  names  which 
mostly  refer  us,  by  their  ending  ing,  to  a  clan, 
while  local  names  of  Scandinavian- origin  are 
generally  traceable  to  the  name  of  a  single  in- 
dividual. 

It  is  very  interesting  to  compare  Anglo-Saxon 
names  in  England  with  those  on  the  opposite 
French  coast,  where,  between  Calais,  Boulogne, 
and  St.  Omer,  the  name  of  almost  every  village 
and  hamlet  is  of  the  pure  Anglo-Saxon  type.  It 
appears,  by  the  analysis  of  these  local  names, 
that  the  Anglo-Saxon  settlements  in  France 
were  filial  settlements  of  the  Anglo-Saxons 
already  established  in  England. 

Not  less  instructive  are  the  local  names  given 
by  the  Northmen.  One  of  the  most  important 
suffixes  in  such  names  is  byr  or  by.  This  word, 
which  has  the  form  bear  or  bcrc  in  Devonshire, 
boer  in  Iceland,  originally  meant  an  abode,  a 
single  farm  ;  afterward  it  came  to  denote  a  vil- 
lage (a  by-law  is  a  local  law  enacted  by  the 
township).  "  In  the  Danish  district  of  En- 
gland— between  Watling  Street  and  the  river 
Tees — the  suffix  by  frequently  takes  the  place 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  243 

of  the  Anglo-Saxon  ham  or  ton.  In  this  region 
there  are  numerous  names  like  Grimsby,  Whit- 
by,  Derby,  Rugby,  Kirby,  Netherby,  Selby, 
Ashby.  In  Lincolnshire  alone  there  are  one 
hundred  names  ending  in  by.  To  the  north  of 
Watling  Street  there  are  some  six  hundred  in- 
stances of  its  occurrence — to  the  south  of  it, 
scarcely  one.  There  are"  scores  and  scores  of 
names  ending  in  by  in  Jutland  and  Sleswic, 
and  not  half-a-dozen  throughout  the  whole  of 
Germany,  and  even  these  are  found  chiefly  in 
the  Danish  district  of  Holstein." 

Another  suffix  is  tJiorpe,  tJiorp,  or  trop  (Al- 
thorpe,  Copmansthorpe,  Wilstrop),  which 
means  an  aggregation  of  houses — a  village  ;  and 
is  the  Norse  form  of  the  German  dorf,  a.  village. 

By  the  help  of  such  suffixes  we  can  follow 
the  Northmen  in  their  excursions,  discover  their 
settlements,  and  even  distinguish  between 
places  which  they  visited  for  trade,  and  those 
which  they  visited  for  booty. 

In  the  same  way  we  can  follow  the  course  of 
that  Celtic  race  which  played  so  great  a  part 
in  the  colonization  of  Europe.  They  were 
divided  into  two  great  branches,  both  of  which 


244  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

have  been  pushed  westward  by  the  succeeding 
deluges  of  the  Romanic,  Teutonic,  and  Sla- 
vonic peoples.  "  In  the  geographical  nomen- 
clature of  Italy,  France,  Spain,  Switzerland, 
Germany,  and  England,  we  find  a  Celtic  sub- 
stratum underlying  the  superficial  deposits  of 
Romanic  and  Teutonic  names. 

"One  class  of  local  names  is  of  special  value 
in  investigations  relating  to  primeval  history. 
The  river-names,  more  particularly  the  names 
of  great  rivers,  are  everywhere  the  memorials  of 
the  earliest  races.  These  river-names  survive 
where  all  other  names  have  changed — they 
seem  to  possess  almost  an  indestructible  vital- 
ity. Towns  may  be  destroyed,  the  sites  of 
human  habitation  may  be  removed,  but  the 
ancient  river-names  are  handed  down  from  race 
to  race ;  even  the  names  of  the  eternal  hills  are 
less  permanent  than  those  of  rivers.  In  Ger- 
many, France,  Italy,  Spain,  we  find  villages 
which  bear  Teutonic  or  Romanic  names,  stand- 
ing on  the  banks  of  streams  which  still  retain 
their  ancient  Celtic  appellations.  Throughout 
the  whole  of  England  there  is  hardly  a  single 
river-name  which  is  not  Celtic." 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS,  245 

The  Celtic  river-names  are  of  two  classes  : 
some  mean  simply  water  or  river;  others  mean 
rough,  gentle,  smooth,  white,  black,  yellow,  or 
denote  some  other  quality  of  the  river.  Celtic 
words  meaning  "  water,"  "  river,"  are  avon 
(afon,  aon,  on),  dur  (dwr),  esk,  to  which 
scores  of  names  of  rivers  have  to  be  referred.1 
Avon,Axona(Aisne),  Seguana  (Seine),  Garumna 
(Garonne),  Dour,  Glasdur  (gray  water),  Esky, 
Esker,  Tem-ese  (Thames)  "  the  broad  water." 

Not  only  ethnological  facts  we  can  discover 
hidden  in  ancient  local  names;  but  sometimes 
they  tell  us  also  important  news  about  the 
state  of  civilization  with  a  certain  people  at  a 
given  period  of  time. 

In  England,  for  instance,  it  is  an  important 
fact  that,  while  almost  all  names  of  villages  are 
either  Saxon  or  Scandinavian,  the  name  for  a 
road  has  been  borrowed  from  the  Romans. 
Street,  as  we  have  had  occasion  to  mention,  is 
the  Latin  strata,  "  paved  roads."  This  fact 
testifies  to  the  great  constructive  qualities  of 
the  Romans.  They  had  not  time  to  settle  in 

1  The  Gaelic  word  for  water  is  uisge.  Whisky  is  a  cor- 
ruption of  uisge-boy,  ' '  yellow  water. " 


246  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

England  permanently ;  still,  all  the  island  had 
been  covered  with  forts,  united  one  with  the 
other,  straight  as  an  arrow,  by  their,  for  the 
time,  magnificent  roads. 

The  Romans  had  built  also  some  bridges, 
but  that  streams  were  generally  unbridged 
"nothing  shows  more  conclusively  than  the 
fact  that  where  the  great  lines  of  Roman  road 
are  intersected  by  rivers,  we  so  frequently  find 
important  towns  bearing  the  Saxon  suffix  ford. 
At  Oxford,  Hereford,  Hertford,  Bedford,  Strat- 
ford on-Avon,  Stafford,  Wallingford,  Guilford, 
and  Chelmsford,  considerable  streams  had  to 
be  forded.  In  the  kingdom  of  Essex,  within 
twenty  miles  of  London,  we  find  the  names 
Old  Ford,  Stratford,  Ilford,  Romford,  Wood- 
ford,  Stapleford,  Passingford,  Stanford,  Ching- 
ford  and  Stortford." 

"The  Wall  of  Hadrian,  or  of  Severus,  as  it 
is  called,  ran  from  New  Castle  to  Carlisle,  and 
is  still  in  wonderful  preservation.  But  even  if 
the  massive  masonry  and  huge  earthen  rampart 
of  this  wall  had  perished,  it  would  be  easy  to 
trace  its  direction  by  means  of  the  continuous 
series  of  memorial  names  which  are  furnished 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  247 

by  the  villages  and  farm-houses  along  its  course. 
It  began  at  Wattsend,  now  famous  as  the  place 
where  the  best  New  Castle  coals  are  shipped. 
We  then  come  in  succession  to  places  called 
Bentvett,  WWbottle,  Heddon-on-the-fJW/,  Wei- 
ton,  ^//houses,  Wall,  WWwick  Chesters, 
PF#//shiels,  ZfW/town,  Thirlz£/#//,  Birdoszew/d', 
WW/bours,  Walton,  Oldwall,  Wai/knoll,  Wall- 
mill,  and  Wallby,  with  Walled,  WW/foot,  and 
WW/head  at  the  western  end. 

Cester,  caster,  Celtic  (T^r,  are  modifications  of 
Latin  castra,  castle ;  and  generally  recall  the 
name  of  some  Latin  fort :  Rochester,  Porches- 
ter,  Chesterton,  Tadcaster,  Brancaster,  Ancas- 
ter,  Lancaster,  Caerleon,  Caerwis,  Caerven,  etc., 
etc." 

Of  historical  events  recorded,  stereotyped, 
so  to  speak,  in  local  names,  all  Europe  is  full. 
"  Probably  the  greatest  reverse  ever  suffered 
by  the  Roman  arms  was  the  defeat  which 
Hannibal  inflicted  on  Flaminius  at  Thrasy- 
mene.  The  brook  which  flows  through  this 
scene  of  slaughter  is  still  called  the  '  Sangui- 
netto  '  ('  blood '  in  Italian  is  '  sangue  '). 
and  the  name  of  the  neighboring  valley  of 


248  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

'  Ossaia  '  ('  ossa,'  bones)  shows  that  the  plain 
must  have  long  been  whitened  by  the  bones  of 
the  fallen  Romans." 

Now  should  any  body  ask  whether  any  prac- 
tical result  may  come  out  of  this  branch  of  the 
science  of  language,  we  can  surely  answer : 
yes  !  one,  at  least,  and  very  great.  This  ety- 
mological ethnology  helps  the  historian  to  pen- 
etrate into  the  darkness  of  those  ages,  when  the 
nations,  whose  descendants  now  people  Europe 
and  America,  were  not  firmly  settled  anywhere, 
but  were,  so  to  speak,  in  a  state  of  wild  sus- 
pense, warring  against  one  another,  forcing,  and 
forced  in  their  turn  away  from  their  abodes  to 
new  regions  and  new  climes.  By  these  investi- 
gations, which  the  science  of  language  has  made 
possible  and  fruitful,  we  see,  for  instance,  that 
"  Franks,  Saxons,  Angles,  Sucvcs,  Lombards 
and  Burgundians,  were  united  by  a  much 
closer  connection — ethnological,  geographical 
and  political — than  historians  have  hitherto 
been  willing  to  admit;  " — we  see  that  the  pre- 
tended differences  of  race  between  the  present 
European  nations  are  mostly  the  offspring  of 
national  conceit,  prejudices,  and  chauvinism. 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  249 


England,  the  country  of  the  Anglo-Saxons, 
teems  with  Celtic,  Scandinavian,  and  Latin 
blood  ;  whilst  Anglo-Saxon,  Normand,  Celtic 
and  Teutonic  blood  flows  in  no  small  quantity 
in  the  veins  of  the  modern  French.  In  Italy  her- 
self, at  the  very  core  of  the  Latin  race,  we  find 
streams  of  Teutonic  and  Celtic  blood,  which  in 
some  parts  even  exceeds  by  far  the  blood 
inherited  from  Latin  forefathers.  The  divis- 
ions of  nationalities,  as  they  are  now  com- 
monly understood,  which  foster  the  interna- 
tional antagonism  of  Europe,  and  weigh  down 
the  people  with  blind  wars  and  ruinous  stand- 
ing armies,  by  these  etymological  researches 
are  once  more  shown  to  be  false  and  artificial 
not  less  than  inhuman. 

Thus,  even  from  the  remotest  quarters, 
science  comes  to  the  help  of  progressive 
humanity,  and,  by  the  light  of  these  investiga- 
tions, which  at  first  may  seem  useless  and  more 
like  learned  trifling  than  earnest  and  worthy 
research,  those  very  names  of  nationalities — 
like  English,  French,  Germans — which  thus  far 
have  been  pitted  one  against  the  other  as 
standards  of  hatred,  are  made  to  testify  to  the 


250  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

common  descent  and  brotherhood  of  those  who 
bear  them.  In  truth,  nothing  helps  more  to 
destroy  prejudices  than  to  inquire  into  their 
origin.  Prejudices  are  not  checked  either  by 
hatred  or  contempt ;  amidst  persecutions  they 
wax  stronger :  blood  seems  to  foster  them.  But 
they  can  not  stand  the  light  of  history. 


A  kindred  and  very  interesting  subject  of 
study  are  the  surnames.  As  tribes  and  peoples 
grow,  individual  names  are  no  longer  sufficient. 
Other  names  are  to  be  resorted  to,  and  they 
are  found  sometimes  in  personal  qualities,  more 
often  in  names  which  mark  the  family,  or  the  clan, 
or  both,  to  which  the  individual  belongs.  The 
number  of  such  names,  their  nature  and  mean- 
ing, vary  from  people  to  people,  and  their  sys- 
tematic study  affords  a  good  deal  of  interesting 
information  for  the  historian  and  the  ethnolo- 
gist, as  well  as  for  the  linguist.  Even  people 
most  superficial  in  their  culture  have  not  failed 
to  notice  that  the  way  of  naming  a  person  in 
the  Old  Testament  is  quite  different  from  the 
Roman  way,  and  both  differ  from  the  Greek 
surnames.  Every  people  has  worked  out  for 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  251 

itself  a  system  of  surnames  in  harmony  with 
its  own  nature  and  institutions. 

But  we  must  confine  our  researches  to  En- 
glish surnames,  and  here,  too,  we  must  be  satis- 
fied with  the  most  elementary  observations. 
Those  who  would  like  to  know  more  about  this 
matter  may  consult  C.  W.  Bardsley's  "  Our 
English  Surnames,"  to  which  I  am  largely  in- 
debted for  the  remarks  that  follow. 

The  origin  of  most  English  surnames  is  to  be 
found  either:  1st,  in  baptismal  or  patronymic 
names  ;  2d,  in  local  names  ;  3d,  in  trades  and 
occupations  ;  or  4th,  in  nick-names. 

In  the  first  place,  it  is  useful  to  remember 
that  kin,  cock,  ot  or  oft,  et  or  ett  were  suffixes 
used  to  form  diminutives.  Kin  is  the  Saxon 
kin,  and  means  "  child,  offspring"  ;  ot,  et  are  of 
Norman  origin  ;  cock  we  have  still  in  "  cock- 
robins,"  "  cock-boats,"  cock-horses." 

As  instances  of  surnames  of  the  first  cate- 
gory— from  personal  or  patronymic  names — we 
may  quote  :  from  Simon,  Simcox,  Simpkins ; 
from  William,  Wilkins,  Wilcox,  Willot,  Wil- 
lett ;  from  Mary,  Marriott ;  from  Elias,  Elliott ; 
from  Emma,  Emmett,  Emmott.  Other  names 


252  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

have  become  surnames  without  any  change : 
John,  Richard,  Robert,  Henry,  Thomas,  Ralph, 
Geoffrey,  Jordan,  Stephen,  Martin,  Benedict, 
Lawrence,  Reginald,  Gilbert,  Roger,  Walter, 
Baldwin,  Francis,  Maurice. 

TJicobald  was  reduced  to  Tibbald,  Tibbe  and 
Tebbe,  and  from  it  we  have  the  following  sur- 
names:  Theobald,  Tibbald,  Tibbie,  Tipple, 
Tibbes,  Tebbes,  Tipkins,  Tippins,  Tipson,  Tib- 
bats,  Tibbets,  Tibbits,  Tebbatts,  Tebbotts, 
Tebbutts. 

We  must  not  wonder  at  this  fecundity  of 
forms.  In  Italian  there  are  more  than  three 
hundred  surnames  derived  from  the  name  of 
Domenico  (Dominic). 

From  Gilbert  we  have  Gibbs,  Gibbins,  Gib- 
bons, Gibson,  Gibbonson  and  Gipps. 

From  Elias  we  have  Ellis,  Elys,  Elice, 
Ellice,  Elyas,  Helyas,  Eliot  or  Elliott,  Ellsons, 
Elkins,  Elkinsons,  Elcocks,  Elliotsons. 

Peter  gives  us  the  shorter  forms  :  'Parr,  Peirs, 
Pierce,  Pears,  Pearse,  Peers.  Hence  Parsons, 
Pearsons,  Piersons,  Peterson,  and  the  pet  forms 
— Perretts,  Parrots,  Parretts,  Peterkins,  Per- 
kins, Parkins,  Parkinson,  Perks  and  Perkes. 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  253 

From  the  feminine  Petronilla  we  have  Pero- 
nell,  Pernell  or  Parnell ;  from  Magdalen,  Mau- 
dlins, Maudsley.  Tiffany  is  only  a  popular  form 
for  Theophania.  From  Margaret — the  Nor- 
man-French Margot,  Marjorie,  Maggots,  Mag- 
gotson,  Margots,  Margets,  Margetson,  Mar- 
gison,  Margerison,  Meggs,  Maggs,  Megson. 

Matthew  gives  Matthews  and  Mathewsons, 
Matinsons,  Matsons  and  Matts. 

From  Bartholomew  :  Bartle,  Bartlett,  Batte, 
Batty,  Bates,  Batsons,  Batcocks,  Badcocks, 
Batkins  and  Bodkins. 

To  Thomas  are  to  be  referred  :  Thomasons, 
Thomsons,  Thompsons,  Thomasetts,  Thoms- 
etts,  Tompsetts,  Thompkins,  Tompkins,  Tom- 
kins,  Tomkinsons,  Thomlins,  Tomlins,  Tom- 
linsons,  Thomms,  Thorns  and  Toms. 

Not  less  numerous,  perhaps,  are  the  sur- 
names derived  from  names  of  office  and  trade. 
Sergeant  is  the  origin  of  Sargeants,  Sargants, 
Sargeaunts,  Sargents,  Sergents,  Sergeants,  Sar- 
jants,  Sarjeants. 

Beadell,  Beadle,  Beaddal,  Biddle  are  to  be 
referred  to  beadle,  the  man  who  executed  pro- 
cesses or  attended  to  proclamations. 


254  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

Names  of  office  we  have  also  in  Priest, 
Priestmann,  Deken,  Deakin,  (Deacon),  Chap- 
lains, Chaplin,  Abbot,  Prior  or  Pryor,  Canon  or 
Cannon,  Moyne  or  Munn  (Monk),  Cook,  But- 
ler, for  which  we  have  the  forms  Botiller,  Botil- 
lers,  Botelers,  Botellers,  Butillers,  Butellier. 

Spearman,  Pikeman,  Furbisher,  Frobisher, 
Furber,  Sworders,  Sheathers,  and  Spurriers, 
remind  us  of  warlike  times  and  professions. 
The  surname  Kisser  is  more  warlike  and  blood- 
thirsty than  it  seems  at  first  sight.  Kisser  was 
the  manufacturer  of  "cuishes"  or  "thigh 
armor  "  (French  "  cuisse,"  thigh). 

In  Forester  or  Forster  or  Foster,  Parker,  Park- 
man,  Woodward,  we  have  a  record  of  the  exten- 
sive woods  of  old,  and  of  men  devoted  to  their 
care;  while  Woodreefs,  Woodrows,  Woodruff, 
and  Woodruff  are  but  corrupted  forms  of 
"  wood-reeve." 

When  the  roofs  of  houses  were  composed 
of  thack,  or  thatch,  every  village  had  its 
"  thatcher."  Hence  the  surnames  of  Thatcher, 
Thacker,  Thackery,  and  Thackeray. 

As  for  the  surname  Smith,  suffice  it  to  say, 
on  Mr.  Bardsley's  authority,  that  in  England, 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  255 

between  and  including  the  years  1838  and  1854, 
were  registered  as  born,  or  married,  or  dead, 
not  less  than  286,307  Smiths. 

Not  a  few  surnames  are  due  to  personal  nick- 
names, as  Strong,  Long,  Short,  Bigg,  Little, 
Large,  Small,  Thick,  Thin,  Slight,  Round, 
Lean  and  Fatt,  Megre  and  Stout,  Ould  and 
Young,  Light  and  Heavy.  Many  times, 
beside  the  Anglo-Saxon,  we  have  the  Norman 
nickname,  as  Large  and  Gros  or  Gross,  Big  or 
Bigg  or  Bigge  and  Graunt  or  Grant  or  Grand, 
Small  and  Pettit,  Pettye,  Petty  or  Peat  ;  Lowe 
and  Bas  or  Bass,  Short  and  Curt,  Fatte  and 
Gras  or  Grass,  Strong  and  Fort,  Ould  and 
Viele,  Young,  Younge  and  Jeune. 

To  the  different  complexions  or  the  color  of 
the  hair  we  owe  such  surnames  as  White,  Black, 
Roux,  Russell,  Brown,  Hore  and  Houre,  Grey 
and  Grissel,  Blanc,  Blund,  Blunt,  Whitelock 
or  Whitlock,  Silverlock,  Blacklock.— Reeds, 
Reids,  Reads  are  all  forms  of  the  old  rede,  red. 

Nicknames  or  personal  qualities  we  have  in 
Goode,  Patient,  Best,  Perfect,  Wise,  Sage, 
Merry,  Gay,  Blythe,  Joice,  Friend,  Goodhart, 
Truman,  True,  Leal,  Kind,  Curtis  or  Curteis, 


256  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

Fulhardy,    Wilfulle,    Hardy,    Grave,     Gentle, 
Sweet,  Meek,  Goodfellow,  and  Longfellow. 

Apropos  of  Longfellow,  I  transcribe  here, 
merely  for  a  diversion,  a  rhythmical  pleasantry, 
recorded  in  the  "  Book  of  Days"  (Chambers, 
quoted  by  Mr.  Bardsley).  "Thomas  Long- 
fellow, landlord  of  the  Golden  Lion  Inn,  at 
Brecon,  must  have  pulled  a  rather  long  face 
when  he  observed  the  following  lines  written 
on  the  mantelshelf  of  his  coffee-room  : 

'  Tom  Longfellow's  name  is  most  justly  his  due, 
Long  his  neck,  long  his  bill,  which  is  very  long  too  ; 
Long  the  time  ere  your  horse  to  the  stable  is  led  ; 
Long  before  he's  rubbed  down,  and  much  longer  till  fed; 
Long  indeed  may  you  sit  in  a  comfortless  room, 
Till  from  kitchen  long  dirty  your  dinner  shall  come  ; 
Long  the  oft  told  tale  that  your  host  will  relate, 
Long  his  face  while  complaining  how  long  people  eat ; 
Long  may  Longfellow  long  ere  he  see  me  again  — 
Long  't  will  be  ere  I  long  for  Tom  Longfellow's  Inn.'  " 

Not  a  few  nicknames  are  taken  from  the  ani- 
mal kingdom,  as  Jay,  Peacock,  Rook,  Pye, 
Pyett,  Lark,  Finch,  Goldfinch,  Cuckoo,  Cock, 
Cockerell,  Sparrow,  Pidgeon,  Dove,  Swans, 
Stork,  Crane,  Heron,  Duck,  Duckerell,  Drake, 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  257 

Wildgoose,    Greygoose,    Gander,    Woodcock, 
Partrick,  Pheasant  or  Peasant,  Blackbird,  etc. 

But  the  most  interesting  for  our  studies  are 
the  surnames  derived  from  local  names.  The 
name  of  the  place  where  a  man  lived  and  whence 
his  family  derived  its  name  is  indicated  in 
many  ways.  For  instance,  in  connection  with 
the  name — brook  (old  form  broke]  we  find, 

Alice  de  la  Broke, 

Andreas  ate  or  atte  (at  the)  Broke, 

Peter  ad  le  Broke, 

Matilda  ad  Broke, 

Reginald  del  Broke, 

Richard  apud  (Latin  "  near  ")  Broke, 

Sarra  de  Broke, 

Reginald  bihunde  Broke, 
where  we  have  admixtures  of  Latin,  Norman 
and   English  prefixes.     These  prefixes  play  a 
rather  important  part  in  the  formation  of  sur- 
names. 

From  At-the-Well  we  have  the  surname 
Wells,  and  also  Attwell,  or  Atwell.  From 
Atte-Wood  we  have  Wood,  Atwood,  and  Att- 
wood.  •  From  Atte-Lea— "at  the  pasture,"  we 
have  Lees,  Leighs,  Leghs,  Atlays,  Attlees. 


258  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

From  Atte-Borough,  Attenborough,  and  Atter- 
bury.  Atte-Ridge  has  given  Attridge  ;  Atte- 
Field,  Attfield.  From  Atte-Town,  Atte-Hill, 
Atte-Tree,  Atte-Cliffe,  we  have  Atton,  Athill, 
Attree,  Atcliffes.  The  prefix  sometimes  is 
simply  a :  Thomas  a  Becket,  is  Thomas  atte 
Becket,  that  is  to  say,  "  at  the  streamlet." 

Before  a  vowel,  instead  of  attc,  we  find  not 
seldom  atten.  Atten-Oaks,  for  At-the-oaks, 
has  given  Noakes  and  Nokes.  Atten-ash  has 
given  Nash  ;  Nelmes  is  for  Atten-Elms  ;  Oven, 
and  Orchard  in  the  olden  registers  are  found 
as  Atte-novene,  and  Atte-norchard. 

The  same  local  qualifications  give  us  Bridger, 
and  Bridgman,  living  near  the  bridge  ;  Brooker 
and  Brookman,  Becker  and  Beckman,  by  the 
brook,  by  the  streamlet  ;  Welter  or  Wellman, 
by  the  well;  while  from  particular  trees  we 
have  Beecher,  (once  written  Le  Beechar), 
Asher,  Oker,  and  so  on. 

The  word  den  we  find  in  many  surnames,  as 
Wolfenden,  Foxden,  Ramsden,  Harden  (hare), 
Buckden,  Horsden,  Oxenden,Cowden,  Borden, 
Sowden,  Swindcn,  Eversden,  Ogden,  written 
once  "  de  Hogdene." 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  259 

A  fissure  between  hills  is  recorded  by  such 
names  as  Clives,  Cliffes,  Cleves,  Clifford,  Cleve- 
land, Tunnicliffe,  Sutcliffe,  Nethercliffe,  Top- 
cliff,  Ratcliffe,  Redcliffe,  etc.  From  combe,  "  a 
cup-shaped  depression,"  of  the  higher  hillsides, 
we  have  Broadcombe,  Newcombe,  Morcombe, 
Lipscombe,  Woolcombe,  •  Whitecombe,  Slo- 
combe. 

A  provincialism  for  gate  was  yate,  from 
which  we  have  "  Yates,"  written  once  "  atte- 
Yate " ;  Bygate  or  Byatt ;  Woodgate  or 
Woodyat. 

House  we  have  in  "del  Hellus,"  written 
once  Hill-house.  Woodus  is  the  old  "de  la 
Wode-house  "  ;  Stannus  is  "  Stane-house "  or 
"  Stone-house  "  ;  Malthus  is  "  Malt-house."  The 
original  form  of  the  surname  Bacchus  is  "  del 
Bake-house." 

Croft,  an  inclosed  field,  has  given  Croft, 
Meadowcroft,  Ryecroft,  Haycroft  (that  is 
hedged-croft ;  hay  means  a  hedge,  as  we  have 
seen)  ;  Bancroft,  from  bean-croft. 

The  lee  offered  a  shelter  for  all  domestic 
live-stock,  and  is  represented,  mainly  under 
the  form  ley,  in  many  surnames :  Horsley, 


260  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

Cowley,  Kinley,  Oxley  or  Oxlee,  Buckley, 
Hindley,  Harley  (hare) ;  and  from  the  names 
of  the  trees  which  inclosed  or  covered  the  lee, 
we  have  Ashley,  Elmsley,  Oakley,  Lindley, 
Berkeley. 

We  should  never  come  to  an  end  had  we  to 
go  through  all  the  -English  surnames  derived 
from  local  names.  There  is  an  old  couplet : 

In  "  ford,"  in  "  ham,"  in  "  ley,"  in  "  ton," 
The  most  of  English  surnames  run  ; 

and,  as  we  have  seen  elsewhere,  all  these  end- 
ings, "  ford,"  "  ham,"  "  ley,"  "  ton,"  are  but 
words  to  denote  places. 

These  brief  and  fragmentary  mentions  are 
not  guilty  of  any  pretense  of  being  a  review  of 
English  local  and  family  names.  But  they  are 
sufficient,  I  hope,  to  show  that  in  this  field,  too, 
for  every  name  there  is  a  reason,  which  most 
often  we  are  able  to  find  out  ;  and  in  so  doing, 
the  science  of  language,  while  it  accumulates 
useful  materials  for  itself,  brings  out  no  little 
light  for  the  historian  and  the  ethnologist. 

Sometimes  particular  customs,  events,  or 
prejudices,  local  oddities  or  genealogical  anec- 
dotes, which  otherwise  would  be  lost  forever, 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  261 

are  unearthed  by  the  linguist  by  means  of  a 
local  or  family  name.  Viewed  in  this  light,  it 
is  true,  then,  as  Mr.  Bardsley  says,  that  "  the 
country  churchyard,  with  each  mossy  stone,  is 
a  living  page  of  history,  and  even  the  parish 
register,  instead  of  being  a  mere  record  of  dry 
and  uninteresting  facts,  becomes  instinct  with 
the  lives  and  surroundings  of  our  forefathers," 


IX. 

LANGUAGE  AND   EDUCATION. 

study  of  language  is  so  great  a  part  of 
A  our  education  that  it  is  but  natural  to 
expect  that  a  science  whose  object  is  language, 
must  have  some  bearing  on  education.  In  fact, 
education  begins  to  feel  the  influence  of  the 
great  results  attained  by  the  science  of  lan- 
guage. It  merely  begins,  since  the  science  of 
language  is  very  young,  and  its  method  and 
achievements  are  not  yet  sufficiently  known 
even  among  those  who  are  most  concerned 
with  education. 

But  every  day  that  passes,  witnesses  the 
importance  of  this  science  increased  and  its 
influence  widened  ;  and  it  is  safe  to  say  that 
the  first  half  of  the  next  century  will  see  great 
changes  wrought  in  the  programme  and  method 
of  public  education.  In  the  first  place  the 
great  achievement,  which  we  owe  to  the  science 
of  language,  is  the  discovery  of  laws  governing 
the  life  of  speech.  This  apparently  bewilder- 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS,  263 

ing  growth  of  words  and  this  complicated  cross- 
ing and  recrossing  of  sounds  obey  certain  laws 
as  well  as  all  that  lives  in  the  realm  of  nature. 
This  fact  is  easy  to  enunciate,  but  it  requires 
a  good  deal  of  reflection  to  grasp  its  whole 
bearing.  It  upsets  all  the  ideas  about  language 
that  still  are  almost  commonly  entertained 
even  by  educated  people,  who  have  had  no  par- 
ticular philological  training.  It  lays  open  be- 
fore us  an  entirely  new  world  ;  a  world  of  sounds 
intimately  connected  with  thoughts;  a  world  of 
music,  more  powerful  than  all  the  music  we 
know,  and  obedient  to  particular  laws,  just  as 
music  is  ruled  by  harmonic  laws ;  a  world  in 
which  all  the  powers  of  man,  his  mind,  his  bod- 
ily organs,  his  reason,  his  perceptions,  his  sense 
of  art,  his  taste,  meet  and  work  together.  To 
know  and  prove  that  such  a  world  is  ruled  by 
laws,  and  that  we  can  acquire  a  knowledge  of 
these  laws,  is  indeed  a  great  achievement,  whose 
importance  will  be  felt  every  day  more  and 
more  in  all  departments  of  human  culture. 
That  a  knowledge  of  such  laws  is  of  practical  util- 
ity in  acquiring  languages,  is  not  to  be  doubted. 
He  who  undertakes  to  study  French,  Italian 


264  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

and  Spanish,  and  meets  the  words  faire  in 
French,  fare  in  Italian,  and  Jiacer  in  Spanish  ;  or 
lait  in  French,  latte  in  Italian,  Icche  in  Spanish, 
or  again,  fait  in  French,  fat  to  in  Italian,  hccho 
in  Spanish,  what  can  he  do  but  learn  materially 
and  mechanically  all  these  words  by  heart  ? 
But  if  he  has  had  any  training  in  the  science  of 
language,  if  he  knows  some  of  the  rules  accord- 
ing to  which  the  Latin  word  passes  into  the 
Neo-Latin  languages,  he  will  see  at  once  that 
the  words  above  quoted  are,  respectively,  mere 
varieties  of  the  Latin  words  faccre,  to  do  ;  lacte 
milk ;  factum,  done.  He  will  thus  have  a 
rational  knowledge  of  the  language  he  is  study- 
ing ;  his  reason  comes  to  help  his  memory  ;  his 
study  becomes  more  interesting  and  more  prof- 
itable at  once. 

He  who  studies  a  language  without  caring  to 
know  where  it  comes  from,  and  what  are  the 
laws  that  rule  the  formation  of  its  words,  pur- 
sues a  very  material  task  which  appeals  a  good 
deal  to  his  memory  and  very  little  to  his  intelli- 
gence, and  he  is  robbed  of  nine-tenths  of  the 
interest  which  is  to  be  found  in  the  study  of 
languages. 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  265 

I  well  remember  the  first  time  I  ever  saw  a 
game  of  cricket.  The  rules  of  the  game  were 
perfect  Chinese  to  me.  I  saw  a  party  of  young 
men,  fine  fellows  most  of  them,  throwing  or 
pitching  a  ball,  and  running  to  and  fro  as 
quickly  as  they  could.  Of  course  I  could  not 
help  enjoying  the  sight,  the  clever  throwing  and 
catching  the  balls,  the  elegant  costumes  and 
attitudes  of  the  young  athletes ;  still  I  was 
puzzled  rather  than  amused  when  I  heard 
the  public  applaud  enthusiastically  every 
now  and  then,  and  I  did  not  know  why  ;  when 
I  saw  the  bowlers  change  their  positions,  or  run 
and  yell  ;  or  when  I  saw  a  player  going 
off  the  field  and  another  coming  in,  without  my 
having  a  clue  as  to  why  they  did  so,  and  who 
were  the  conquerors,  or  who  the  beaten. 

At  last  a  gentleman  undertook  kindly  to  ex- 
plain to  me  the  laws  of  the  game.  Then  I  saw 
into  it  ;  I  understood  the  reason  of  every  move- 
ment ;  I  could  appreciate  better  the  skill  of  the 
players,  and  my  interest  therein  increased  a 
thousand  fold. 

It  is  very  much  the  same  thing  with  the 
study  of  languages.  He  who  studies  them  ma- 


266  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

terially,  as  is  now  generally  done,  can  not  help 
but  wonder  at  the  mysterious  play  of  words  and 
sounds  which  is  going  on  before  him,  and  all  he 
can  do  is  to  try  to  catch  as  much  of  it  as  he  can, 
almost  by  sheer  dint  of  memory.  He  who  brings 
to  the  study  of  languages  a  good  philological 
training,  sees  into  the  nature  of  the  matter.  He 
notices  the  working  of  laws,  and  follows  them 
with  interest  and  pleasure.  Each  law  is  like  a 
thread  that  guides  him  through  the  labyrinth 
of  language.  Every  word  for  him  is  not  an 
isolated  fact,  but  a  link  of  a  great  chain,  or,  if 
you  like,  a  little  twig  of  a  great  tree,  of  which 
he  comprehends  at  a  glance  the  full  growth — 
the  roots,  the  trunk,  the  branches,  the  fruits. 

He  who  knows  only  English  and  undertakes 
the  study  of  French, will  grind  at  it  for  months 
and  months,  in  many  cases  without  satisfactory 
results.  He  who  has  studied  some  Latin,  and 
has  had  some  training  in  scientific  grammar, 
will  master  the  French  forms,  especially  the 
formation  of  words  and  the  grammatical  inflec- 
tions, in  a  very  short  time,  and  in  such  a  way 
as  to  have  of  them  not  merely  a  material,  but 
a  rational  and  historical  knowledge.  As  for 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  267 

fluency  of  speech,  of  course,  it  can  only  be 
attained  by  practice  ;  but  every  body  knows 
what  a  great  help  it  is  to  this  end  to  be  well 
grounded  in  the  grammatical  forms. 

Besides  this  practical  advantage,  still  greater 
is  the  importance  of  the  science  of  language 
for  the  general  training  of  the  mind.  It  is  a 
universal  complaint  that  the  study  of  languages 
develops  almost  exclusively  memory,  at  the 
expense  of  our  other  mental  faculties.  There- 
fore there  is  a  general  cry  for  more  scientific 
education.  This  is  perfectly  right  when  we 
consider  the  way  in  which  the  study  of  lan- 
guages is  now  pursued ;  millions  of  boys  and 
girls  are  mercilessly  crammed  with  tenses, 
moods  and  cases,  which  are  dead  letter  to  them. 
The  boy  whose  mind  is  forever  prone  to  ask 
why?  why?  at  every  thing  he  comes  across,  is 
obliged  to  sit  still  for  years  and  years,  and 
swallow  paradigms  and  conjugations  without 
ever  being  allowed  to  ask  the  why  of  what  he 
studies,  and  whence  those  forms  come  ;  so  that 
at  last  he  takes  it  as  a  matter  of  course,  that 
for  such  things  there  is  no  why ;  they  are  so 
simply  because  they  are  so.  He  sees  that  in 


268  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

order  to  please  his  teachers  and  receive  an  attes- 
tation of  merit,  he  must  know  so  many  cases 
and  so  many  tenses  by  heart  ;  and  so  he  sits 
down  and  learns  them  by  heart.  That  is  all : 
his  teachers  are  satisfied,  his  parents  delighted  ; 
some  of  his  companions,  who  are  a  little  lazier 
or  more  independent,  or,  even  better  endowed 
with  brains  than  he  is,  have  not  such  a  good 
memory,  seem  to  envy  him:  what  else  can  he 
desire?  He  acquiesces  by  and  by  in  the  univer- 
sal supineness  ;  that  natural,  almost  irrepressi- 
ble, tendency  to  ask  why,  is  checked,  and  when 
he  has  learned  some  dozens  of  cases  and  tenses 
he  is  convinced  that  he  knows  of  grammar 
about  all  that  there  is  to  know. 

Still  it  is  impossible  that  human  nature, 
which  delights  in  reasoning  more  than  in  mem- 
orizing, should  be  satisfied  with  such  kind  of 
knowledge  ;  and  we  can  easily  understand  why 
so  many,  who  in  after  life  proved  to  be  very 
great  men,  when  they  were  boys,  either  disliked 
grammar  profoundly,  or  showed  themselves 
very  backward  in  learning  it. 

The  science  of  language  will  make  a  great 
change  in  all  this  :  the  study  of  language  will 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  269 

become  very  soon  a  matter  of  reasoning  rather 
than  of  memory. — Once  boys  and"  girls  were 
taught  nothing  about  the  laws  which  rule  our 
bodily  organism.  Now  they  learn  the  pro- 
cesses by  which  food  is  transformed  into  blood  ; 
the  composition  of  our  bodies,  the  forming  and 
perishing  of  our  tissues  ;  the  development  of 
our  muscles,  the  function  of  our  nerves,  the 
structure  of  our  eyes  and  ears  and  lungs,  and 
the  principal  laws  which  govern  our  physical 
life.  In  the  same  way  they  will  learn  that 
there  are  laws  which  govern  the  life  of  our 
language  ;  they  will  be  taught  how  words  are 
built,  where  such  and  such  a  word  comes  from, 
and  how  it  came  to  assume  its  present  form. 
Of  course,  at  first  it  will  be  a  matter  of  no  little 
difficulty  to  adapt  such  teaching  to  the  intelli- 
gence of  young  people.  But  this  difficulty  will 
be  easily  overcome  by  experience.  It  is  not 
much  more  difficult  to  adapt  to  the  capacity 
of  a  boy  the  fundamental  laws  of  language, 
than  the  fundamental  laws  of  physiology.  And 
that  his  mind  will  be  interested  in  it,  there  is  no 
room  for  doubt ;  since  he  must  learn  a  lan- 
guage, he  will  feel  greatly  relieved  if  you  show 


270  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

him  how  the  things  which  he  has  to  commit  to 
memory  came  to  be.  I  never  happened  to 
talk  to  a  boy  or  a  girl,  a  gentleman  or  a  lady, 
about  any  linguistic  fact,  whether  etymological, 
comparative  or  phonetic,  without  their  taking 
real  delight  in  the  argument.  It  must  indeed 
be  no  little  pleasure  to  discover  in  the  old  well- 
worn  words,  which  we  use  every  moment 
almost  unconsciously,  facts  and  relations  which 
open  before  us  an  entire  world  of  historical 
information  ;  which  throw  a  flood  of  light 
upon  the  way  in  which  we  inherit  the  old 
words  and  form  new  ones  ;  and  the  way  in 
which  we  develop  their  meaning,  bending  it  to 
the  ever  increasing  and  exacting  wants  of  our 
mind. 

Of  course  we  shall  have  to  change  many  of 
our  ideas  about  grammar.  As  we  have  had 
occasion  already  to  point  out,  the  grammar 
which  is  now  generally  studied  in  our  schools, 
is  merely  a  copy,  with  some  blunders  added,  of 
the  grammar  which  was  used  in  Rome  about 
2000  years  ago.  It  is  sad,  but  it  is  a  fact. 
Many  notions  have  to  be  given  up,  which  com- 
parative philology  shows  are  entirely  wrong  ; 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  271 

many  have  to  be  modified,  and  many  other  ele- 
ments introduced.  Of  course  this  will  take  a 
long  time  ;  meanwhile,  since  the  Greek  gram- 
mar of  George  Curtius,  and  the  Latin  grammars 
of  Schweitzer-Sidler,  of  Miiller-Lattmann,  and 
Robs,  a  great  improvement  has  been  attained 
in  teaching  the  classical  languages.  As  for  the 
modern  languages,  the  English  grammar  of 
Morris,  the  French  grammars  of  Brachet,  and 
Meissner,  and  Ayer,  the  German  grammars  of 
Scherer,  of  Vilmar,  and  Heyse,  and  the  Neo- 
Latin  grammars  of  Monaci  and  D'Ovidio,  are 
the  best  specimens  of  grammars  as  modified  by 
the  results  of  the  science  of  language. 

As  for  English  especially,  to  all  those  who 
wish  to  acquire  a  rational,  superior  knowledge 
of  the  language,  we  could  never  advocate 
strongly  enough  the  study,  at  least  elementary, 
of  Anglo-Saxon  and  Latin.  Those  who  will 
give  to  these  two  languages  at  least  one  or  two 
years  of  good  and  serious  study,  will  store  away 
in  their  minds  a  precious  treasure,  which  will  nev- 
er fail  them;  they  will  lay  a  foundation,  on  which 
all  the  knowledge  they  acquire  in  after  years, 
will  rest  as  a  solid  and  substantial  structure. 


272  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

When  the  study  of  languages  is  carried  on  in 
this  way,  the  chief  objection,  which  rests  on  its 
appealing  only  to  memory,  falls  of  itself.  Not 
that  science  should  be  excluded  from  educa- 
tion ;  far  from  that,  there  never  was  a  time 
when  a  scientific  training  was  so  important  as  it 
is  now-a-days.  But  it  is  to  be  remembered  that 
in  a  standard  education  language  will  always 
have  the  first  place,  since  there  is  nothing  in 
the  world  that  represents  man  so  fully  in  his 
whole  being  as  language.  No  other  study 
develops  all  our  faculties  so  thoroughly;  only 
it  is  to  be  pursued  with  such  a  method  as  to 
call  really  into  action  all  the  forces  of  our  mind. 

The  great  advantage  of  the  study  of  science 
is  to  accustom  our  minds  to  observe  the  exist- 
ence of  laws  in  the  universe  ;  to  understand 
how  such  laws  work,  how  they  can  be  known 
by  us ;  and  that  the  only  way  in  which  we  can 
master  them,  is  by  obeying  them. 

It  is  obvious  that  this  logical  habit  of  mind 
can  be  cultivated  by  the  study  of  languages  as 
well  as  by  that  of  sciences,  if  only  we  pursue  it 
according  to  the  methods  which  comparative 
philology  teaches  us. 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  273 

Besides  our  ideas  about  grammars,  we  have 
to  change  not  a  little  also  our  ideas  about  dic- 
tionaries. The  dictionary  of  a  language  is  a 
record,  a  depository,  of  all  the  words  that 
belong  to  that  language.  But  every  record  of 
the  kind  has  to  be  classified.  Without  clas- 
sification it  is  difficult  to  find  what  we  want 
among  a  small  number  of  things;  it  is  nearly 
impossible  among  a  large  number.  Besides, 
classification  ought  to  be  such  that  when  we 
know  to  what  class,  or  family,  or  order,  one 
thing  belongs,  we  should,  by  this  mere  fact, 
know  what  are  its  essential  qualities  and  char- 
acteristics, and  how  it  is  connected  with,  or  sepa,- 
rated  from,  other  things  of  the  same  kind. 
It  is  then  of  the  greatest  importance  which 
characteristics  we  assume  as  foundations  for 
our  classifications.  Had  we  to  classify  books 
by  their  size,  plants  by  their  height,  animals 
by  the  number  of  their  extremities,  our  clas- 
sifications would  be  of  very  little  help,  indeed, 
in  bibliographical,  botanical  and  zoological 
studies.  We  would  find  a  treatise  on  meta- 
physics beside  a  book  on  nervous  diseases  ;  a 
poem  of  Homer  near  the  file  of  a  humoristic 


274  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

paper;  potatoes  near  heliotropes  ;  serpents  and 
fish,  men  and  birds  together.  On  the  contrary, 
we  know  that  books  are  classified  in  catalogues 
according  to  their  subjects,  and  such  catalogues 
are  supplemented  by  the  alphabetical  list  of 
the  authors'  names.  Plants  and  animals  are 
so  accurately  classified  according  to  their  most 
essential  organs,  that  when  we  know  to  what 
class  a  plant  or  an  animal  belongs,  we  know 
almost  all  that  science  can  tell  us  about  that 
plant  and  that  animal.  Classification,  properly 
understood,  is  the  last  result  of  science  ;  indeed 
science  consists  in  classifying  the  universe. 

Let  us  now  turn  to  what  happened  with  the 
classification  of  words  in  our  dictionaries.  The 
most  important  elements  in  a  word  are  its  root 
and  its  meaning.  Do  our  dictionaries  classify 
words  according  to  either  or  both  of  such  char- 
acteristics ?  Not  at  all.  They  classify  words 
according  to  their  first  letter  f  Why  not,  for 
instance,  according  to  the  second  letter?  or  to 
the  last  letter  ?  It  would  be  just  as  reasonable  ; 
nay,  there  is  a  greater  advantage  in  having 
words  classified  by  their  endings  than  by  their 
beginnings.  The  beginning  of  a  word  may  be 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  275 

either  a  part  of  the  root,  or  a  prefix,  or  the 
beginning  of  another  word,  which  helps  to  form 
a  compound  word  ;  so  that,  really,  from  the 
beginning  of  a  word  we  have  no  light  whatever 
on  its  structure  or  composition.  The  ending, 
on  the  contrary,  is  generally  a  suffix  with  a 
certain  meaning;  and  by  seeing  so  many 
suffixes  side  by  side,  the  student  would,  at  least 
intuitively,  if  in  no  other  way,  learn  the  par- 
ticular meaning  of  each  suffix,  and  thus  would 
at  least  have  a  clue  to  the  formation  of  words. 
We  have  many  instances  of  dictionaries  of  this 
kind  ;  but  they  were  compiled  with  another 
practical  aim  ;  namely,  to  help  cheap  poets  to 
find  their  rhymes  ! 

Still,  so  great  is  the  force  of  habit,  so  unre- 
flective  are  we  when  we  deal  with  language, 
that  I  am  sure  many  readers  must  have  laughed 
when  I  said  :  "  Why  not  make  a  dictionary 
according  to  the  endings  of  words?" 

And  then,  what  is  the  order  according  to 
which  we  classify  the  beginnings  of  our  words? 
It  is  the  so-called  alphabetical  order.  But  this 
is  no  order  at  all.  The  order  of  our  alphabet 
is  simply  a  chaos.  Vowels  and  consonants  are 


276  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

mixed  up  together  without  reason  or  dis- 
crimination. The  present  order  of  our  letters 
has  no  more  scientific  value  than  if  we  put  all 
of  them  into  a  box  and  take  them  out  one  by 
one,  blindfolded.  The  Hindu  grammarians 
were  far  ahead  of  us  in  this  as  in  every  thing 
that  concerns  grammar ;  their  alphabet,  besides 
being  far  more  perfect  than  ours,  is  classified 
in  a  thoroughly  scientific  way.  First  we  have 
the  vowels ;  these,  too,  rationally  classified. 
Then  come  the  consonants,  classified  according 
to  their  physiological  nature  :  gutturals,  labials, 
dentals,  etc. 

But  this  does  not  matter  much  for  our  argu- 
ment about  dictionaries.  What  is  important  is 
that  we  must  recognize  the  entire  absence  from 
our  dictionaries  of  any  thing  worth  the  name 
of  classification.  Words  which  have  nothing  in 
common,  either  in  their  root  or  meaning,  arc 
registered  beside  one  another  simply  because 
they  happen  to  begin  with  the  same  letter.  A 
classification  of  animals  by  the  number  of  their 
extremities  would  be  just  as  valuable  as  this. 
A  good  scientific  classification  of  the  materials 
of  our  language  would  help  us  immensely,  be- 


THE  PHILOSOPHY.  OF  WORDS.  277 

yond  any  thing'  we  can  imagine,  in  mastering 
easily  and  scientifically  the  whole  language,  as 
a  rational  classification  helps  us  in  the  study  of 
zoology  and  botany.  Absence  of  classification, 
which  would  make  it  impossible  to  learn  zool- 
ogy or  botany,  is  one  of  the  reasons  why  our 
knowledge  of  languages,  even  of  our  own,  is 
generally  so  scanty  and  poor. 

We  have  seen  that  the  most  important  char- 
acteristics of  words  are  their  roots  and  their 
meanings.  We  must  resort  to  either  of  these 
elements  in  order  to  have  a  good  classification 
of  words.  Attempts  at  classifying  words  ac- 
cording to  their  meaning  or,  as  they  are  called, 
idealogical  dictionaries,  have  been  made  every 
now  and  then.  And  very  useful  they  are, 
withal  ;  but  sometimes  a  word  is  used  with  dif- 
ferent meanings,  and  the  borders  between  one 
group  and  another  of  ideas  are  so  difficult  to 
trace,  that  some  confusion  is  unavoidable. 

On  the  other  hand,  roots  are  such  a  substan- 
tial and  distinct  element,  and  the  knowledge 
of  the  value  of  a  root,  and  of  the  most  impor- 
tant affixes,  leads  us  so  clearly  to  the  funda- 
mental meaning  of  the  word,  that  evidently  a 


278  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

classification  of  words  according  to  their  roots 
is  at  once  easier  and  more  advantageous.  In 
this,  too,  we  can  learn  a  good  deal  from  the 
Indians  ;  Sanskrit  dictionaries  start  not  from 
words,  but  from  roots. 

We  must  consider  that  hardly  any  language 
has  more  than  five  hundred  roots  as  the  origin 
of  all  its  words.  Now,  had  we  all  its  words  ar- 
ranged under  these  five  hundred  and  odd  roots, 
how  easy  it  would  be  to  take  every  day  half  a 
dozen  of  those  roots,  or  ten,  or  twelve,  and 
learn  them,  and  look  carefully  at  their  most 
important  derivatives  !  We  could  then  in  a 
few  weeks  go  over  all  the  material  of  the  rich- 
est language  in  the  world.  We  could  see  the 
links  that  connect  words,  apparently  dissimilar, 
into  so  many  clusters.  We  could  see  their 
fundamental  meaning,  and  how  it  is  modi- 
fied by  prefixes  and  suffixes.  We  could  see 
how  one  group  of  words  is  allied  with  another. 
We  could,  then,  read  and  study  a  dictionary 
systematically,  just  as  we  read  or  study  a  treat- 
ise on  zoology  or  botany.  Instead  of  a  form- 
less, unreasonable,  hap-hazard  agglomeration  of 
words,  we  would  have  all  of  one  language 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  279 

reduced  to  a  system.  The  story,  or  rather  the 
life,  of  a  root  would  lie  before  us,  just  as  a  map 
of  a  river  ;  we  see  its  source,  we  see  it  growing 
on  its  way,  as  it  winds  through  valleys,  and 
plains ;  we  see  it  branch  in  two  or  three  direc- 
tions ;  we  see  the  rivulets  and  torrents  that 
run  into  it. 

The  materials  for  such  dictionaries  are  not 
yet  ready  in  full,  but  they  are  coming  in  steadily 
and  rapidly.  The  day  is  not  far  off  when  our 
dictionaries  will  be  looked  at  as  we  look  at  the 
botanical  classifications,  or  rather  agglomera- 
tions, of  two  centuries  ago.  Lexicology 
awaits  its  Linnaeus,  and  it  will  have  him. 

Now  it  remains  for  us  to  consider  how  lan- 
guage is  to  be  represented.  It  is  needless  to 
sketch  here  the  secular  efforts  by  which  the 
accumulated  labor  and  genius  of  generations  and 
generations,  starting  from  the  rudest  attempts, 
came  to  represent  words  with  letters,  as  all 
civilized  peoples  do.  What  is  important  to 
notice  is,  that  whatever  means  we  resort  to,  the 
signs  we  use  must  represent  the  words  we 
utter,  in  a  clear  unmistakable  way.  Our  signs 
must  photograph  our  words.  If  any  body, 


280  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

looking  at  the  sign,  feels  doubtful  what  kind  of 
sound  is  represented  thereby,  that  sign  is  im- 
perfect ;  it  should  be  corrected.  In  plain 
words,  our  spelling  must  be  the  faithful  picture 
of  our  speaking.  This  has  been  attained 
almost  to  perfection  by  such  languages  as 
Sanskrit,  Greek,  Latin,  German,  Italian, 
Spanish,  Russian,  and  others.  It  is  with  an 
uncontrollable  feeling  of  sadness  and  shame 
that-one  turns  to  the  English  system  of  spell- 
ing. English  spelling  is  the  greatest  monument 
of  stupidity  that  the  history  of  languages  shows 
us.  The  notion  that  words  are  not  letters,  but 
sounds,  has  been  forgotten  to  such  an  extent 
by  the  English  speaking  people  ;  the  confusion 
between  the  relations  of  sounds  and  their  rep- 
resentatives in  writing  has  been  carried  to  such 
a  point,  that  it  would  be  ridiculous,  were  it  not 
so  harmful.  We  find  poets  who  rhyme  by  with 
beauty,  was  and  pass,  kuoivn  and  won,  iiw^and 
a/as/and  other  words  which  have  nothing  in  com- 
mon except  apart  of  their  spelling.  This  fact, 
apparently  so  unimportant,  betrays  the  deepest 
ignorance  of  the  nature  of  language,  that  it  is 
possible  to  conceive. 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  281 

I  will  not  insist  at  length  on  this  argument. 
All  who  know  what  language  is,  and  what  the 
function  of  spelling  is,  are  fully  aware  of  the 
gross  inconvenience  of  English  spelling.  It  is 
not  only  the  greatest  drawback  to  the  spread 
of  the  English  language,  but  also  a  very  great 
encumbrance  to  the  education  of  English  speak- 
ing people.  The  reader  may  consult  with  profit 
an  excellent  article  by  Frederic  D.  Fernald  in 
the  "  Popular  Science  Monthly  "  (Sept.  '83), 
"  How  Spelling  Damages  the  Mind"  ;  and  J.  H. 
Gladstone's  "  The  Spelling  Reform  "  ;  Max 
Miiller's  "Spelling"  (Fortnightly  Review, 
April  1876)  ;  Whitney's  "  How  shall  we  Spell?" 

The  question  is  urgent,  and  all  thoughtful 
men  should  take  a  share  in  ventilating  it  and 
promoting  its  solution.  Only  this  I  will  add: 
when  we  hear  a  foreigner  make  some  curious 
mistake  in  pronunciation,  instead  of  feeling 
like  laughing,we  shoulcHeel  humiliated,  because 
of  our  miserable  spelling,  which  does  not 
convey  immediately  and  of  itself  alone  the 
sound  of  the  word. 

Now,  on  reaching  the  end  of  our  not  long 
journey,  which  I  wish  had  proved  to  my  reader 


282  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  IVORDS. 

at  least  half  as  interesting  as  it  has  been  to  me, 
let  us  cast  a  glance  at  language  as  a  whole,  as 
the  official  organ,  so  to  speak,  of  a  people. 

When,  through  influences  of  races  or  migra- 
tions, or  political  and  social  revolutions,  a  lan- 
guage has  been  at  last  set  down  as  the  lan- 
guage of  a  people,  how  does  its  development 
go  on  ?  For  instance,  since  the  time  when  France 
was  strongly  organized  into  a  state,  and 
French  became  the  language  of  literature,  of 
science,  of  government,  of  commerce,  and  the 
means  of  intercourse  between  the  generality  of 
the  French  people,  what  forces  have  contrib- 
uted to  its  development?  Because  French,  not 
less  than  any  other  language,  is  developing 
still  ;  is  still  losing  and  transforming  old  words 
and  acquiring  new  ones  every  day. 

Languages  present  to  us  the  highest  standard 
of  organic  constitution  which  any  political 
body  might  be  happy  to  approach.  The  high- 
est pattern  of  a  political  constitution  would  be 
that  by  which  all  the  forces  of  the  people,  of 
the  rich  as  well  as  the  poor,  of  the  educated  as 
well  as  the  uneducated,  of  the  individuals  by 
themselves  as  well  as  of  corporations,  trades  and 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  283 

callings,  are  brought  to  work  together,  helping 
one  another,  and  checking  each  other's  too 
one-sided  tendencies,  for  a  final  harmonizing  of 
the  whole  work. 

Languages  show  us  exactly  such  kinds  of 
typical  constitutions.  The  educated,  who  have 
a  better  sense  of  the  value  of  words  and  often 
know  where  they  come  from,  have  a  natural 
tendency,  in  their  speaking  and  writing,  to  be 
conservative,  to  preserve  words  in  their  time- 
honored  forms,  to  renew  old  meanings  and 
revive  old  words  which  have  been  lost.  On 
the  other  hand,  they  bring  also  into  language  a 
very  progressive  element,  inasmuch  as  their 
being  in  the  van  of  science,  philosophy,  art,  lit- 
erature and  government,  makes  it  indispensable 
for  them  to  coin  new  words,  or  to  give  old 
words  new  meanings,  in  order  to  designate  the 
new  ideas  which  they  are  the  first  to  scout. 

The  uneducated,  or  half-educated,  are  also 
progressive  in  one  respect,  as  on  account  of 
their  imperfect  knowledge  of  the  structure  of 
words,  they  are  not  well  aware  of  the  true  value 
of  each  part  of  them  ;  they  are,  therefore,  very 
careless  in  handling  them,  and  the  wear  and 


284  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

tear  which  eats  up  or  transforms  words  from 
generation  to  generation,  is  especially  due  to 
the  dialectic  transformations  which  they  undergo 
at  the  hands  of  the  least  educated.  On  the 
other  side,  the  uneducated  are  strongly  con- 
servative of  familiar  words  and  sayings,  and 
very  slow  to  adopt  the  new  words  which  are 
introduced  into  the  language  by  the  progress 
of  culture. 

Meanwhile,  together  with  those  two  main 
streams,  numberless  rivulets  contribute  to  make 
up  the  great  river  of  national  speech.  The 
scientist  or  the  philosopher  brings  in  a  new 
word  for  a  new  idea,  for  a  new  phenomenon 
observed,  for  a  new  disease  or  a  new  experi- 
ment ;  the  poet  a  new  epithet ;  the  sailor  a  new 
name  for  a  kind  of  wave,  or  a  new  implement 
on  his  ship;  the  traveler  the  name  of  a  foreign 
plant,  or  animal,  or  custom,  or  dress ;  the  cow- 
boy a  new  word  concerning  cattle-raising. 

Thus  every  living  force  of  the  people  tells  on 
its  language.  Thus  it  is  that  language  may  be 
said  to  be  the  mirror  of  the  life  of  a  people. 
We  can  say  more :  language  is  the  best  record, 
as  well  as  the  highest  reward,  of  a  people's 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS.  285 

labor.  Look  at  what  happens  daily  around 
us.  A  man  who  lives  on  the  sea,  knows  so 
many  things  and  has  so  many  words  about 
ships,  waves,  winds,  and  gales,  that  we  land- 
lubbers listen  to  with  astonishment.  A  lumber- 
man has  many  words  to  indicate  every  kind  of 
wood,  their  properties  and  qualities,  that  no 
scholar  knows.  A  painter  can  see  and  name  a 
large  number  of  colors  and  nuances,  whose 
existence  the  layman  does  not  even  suspect. 
In  the  same  way,  the  more  varied,  the  more 
lively,  the  more  intense  the  activity  of  a 
people,  the  richer,  the  stronger,  the  higher  its 
language — and  the  richer  especially  in  those 
directions  in  which  the  activity  of  the  people 
has  particularly  developed.  No  language  is  so 
rich  as  German  in  metaphysical  and  philological 
terms,  because  no  people,  in  modern  history  at 
least,  has  given  so  much  study  to  metaphysics 
and  philology.  Why  Italian  is  so  rich  in  musi- 
cal and  artistic  terms,  it  is  easy  to  understand. 
The  sociableness  of  French  people  explains 
their  genial  wealth  of  conversational  words  and 
idioms. 

If  we  turn  now  to  the  English  language,  we 


286  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 

have  before  us  a  spectacle  so  great,  that  I  do 
not  know  where  we  can  find  a  parallel.  En- 
glish speaking  people  are  spread  all  over  the 
world  ;  there  is  no  degree  of  latitude,  no  cor- 
ner of  the  globe,  but  bears  witness  to  the  glory 
of  this  race.  They  are  great  in  science,  rich  and 
inventive  in  literature,  deep  in  poetry,  active 
and  successful  in  commerce,  manly  in  war, 
giants  at  sea.  In  social  and  political  organi- 
zation they  lead  the  world.  Must  we  wonder 
then,  that  the  English  language  has  been  devel- 
oped in  such  a  way  that,  taken  as  a  whole,  no  lan- 
guage can  stand  comparison  with  it  ?  No  lan- 
guage combines  to  such  a  degree  strength  with 
simplicity,  depth  with  perspicuousness,  innate 
poetical  vigor  with  practical  efficacy. 

We  have  had  occasion  to  mention  that  the 
further  we  go  back  in  the  history  of  civilization, 
the  greater  we  find  the  number  of  languages 
spoken.  Civilization  in  its  triumphal  march 
unifies  tribes  into  nations,  and  reduces  the 
number  of  languages,  sweeping  out  of  existence 
those  which  are  unfit  for  the  struggle.  If  one 
day  civilization  should  unite — and  we  fervidly 
hope  it  will — all  or  almost  all  the  world  into  a 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  WORDS. 


287 


bond  of  peaceable  brotherhood,  one  language 

»will  supersede  all  others,  and  become  the  recog- 
*  J     1  f.i_1.Ll_j_'L1  J  AT  i_t. 


nized  language  of  that  brotherhood.  No  other 
of  the  living  languages  has  as  great  chances  of 
becoming  that  language  as  English.  •  There  is, 
it  is  true,  a  great  drawback  in  its  miserable 
spelling  ;  but  this  is  an  evil  which  can  and  will 
be  corrected.  English  is  the  language  of  the 
future. 


THE  END. 


PLEASE  DO  NOT  REMOVE 
CARDS  OR  SLIPS  FROM  THIS  POCKET 

UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO  LIBRARY